Home

PicoScope 9000 Series User's Guide

1. Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Ol xj Clear Display F StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Eye Diagram 501 3 Pen med Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Sola Time Base B ee Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye idth Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing WA 12 GHz 1 501 Bit kate E A400 Wiis hi Main Intensified Delayed a 0 o SCALE A a ETE Fos Crossing Iw Fos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Total Mea Con off chi EE ch2 Er Bie CEDE e posi Neg Ext HF DELTA DELAY a Be EA Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics Cle ie RZ Positive Duty Cycle definition The RZ Positive Duty Cycle is determined as follows Transom T risesom _ RZ_PositivePulse Width RZ _ DutyCycle T 2 risesom L Lriseso RZ _ Bitlime Where T1Rise50 T1Fall50 and T2Rise50 are the mean of the histogram of the first three consecutive crossings at the 50 reference level This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement systemto use a waveform database if available
2. Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing am E C Intensified f Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles fw Timegtihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Current Total tms Maximum Mean Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY os Minima 5 915 n f Ext Dir a Pos Ne ETA gt i Ext HF gt dil HC inch C Time amp Maximum definition The Margins menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of Time Maximum value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 269 Menu 5 11 3 14 Time Minimum Time Minimum is a measure of the time of the first occurrence of the first data sample with the minimum signal level The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the display right margin TimeO Minimum is position independent Therefore the instrument uses the entire waveform on the display graticule to determine the minimum signal level Pico rechoblaaa e 9000 PC Sarnia Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Ol x a Print About Measure 1 ie 1 E ae SAI Persistence External Direct Time Base
3. Persistence Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top e Base Amplitude T middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Bit kate st 400 Wiis Woce Main O Intensified Delayed SCALE E 200 psidiv BELA 2502 Dual Delayed Con f off Current Total Wma Minimum 271 9 p 395 504 4 pi DELTA DELAY 500 psiciv Et e pos neg i Ext HF ans cno ES Base definition The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Base value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 280 5 11 4 6 Amplitude Amplitude is a measure of the difference between the Top and Base of a displayed pulse waveform Use the Methodl 2 and Thresholds 30 menus to customize the measurement threshold levels Amplitude may be equal to Peak Peak for many waveforms such as triangle waveforms The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Y Ol x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Au
4. Bit kate 5 6400 Moss amp Main amp Intensified Delayed 1 neidiv SEALE B 1 netdiv DELAY Os Dial Delayed Con amp Off no Minimum Maximum Mean mM 196 3 mi 195 1 OS DELTA DELAY Pos cha im ie 4 1 nsidiv e Ext Dir le Pos Meg CAJA Ext HF Y 250 my C o ca os cma ES ac RMS definition The ac RMS measurement is determined as follows iy YG Mean acRis yt gt where n is the number of waveform points on screen and not the memory depth V 1 is the voltage at the th point on screen and Mean is an average mean voltage The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the ac RMS value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 285 5 11 4 11 ps9000 en Menu Area Area is the area under the curve of the waveform within the measurement region in vertical units multiplied by horizontal units such as volt seconds or watt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display un StopiSinale A GORY Print About Measure 1 12 GHz 50 Gsaf Time Base Parameters Time Base Amplitude Paramete Maximum 2 Ti
5. 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 251 Menu Frequency value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 252 5 11 3 3 Positive Width mn 2 Positive Width is a measure of the time from the mid threshold of the first rising edge to the mid threshold of the next falling edge The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Measure X Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Iw Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run Sars Persistence External Direct 2 GHz StopiSingle Autoscale Copy a I Sas 12GHz 25005 Time Base _ Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate js A400 Wiis y bode i hain O Intensified f Delayed Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Cu
6. An example of the Histogram Measure tab The tabs only appear as the one of the histogram measurements Is performed For example if you performed a vertical histogram measurement on the channel 1 only this tab will appear on the display The measurement database and the graticule display will clear when you perform the following actions Switch between operating modes in the Display menu Change vertical and horizontal scale and position e Click on the Clear Display button The Measure tab displays the following measurement statistics for each measurement Scale Lists the display scale in hits per division or dB per division Offset Lists the offset in hits or dB Offset is the number of hits or dB at the bottom of the display as opposed to the centre of the display Hits in Box The total number of samples included in the histogram box 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Waveforms Peak Hits o Pk Pk Median Mean e StdDev Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev o Min Max Max Max The measurement statistics reported will vary depending on the mode of operation selected The number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram The number of hits in the histogram s greatest peak 178 The width of histogram For horizontal histograms width is the difference time between the first and la
7. the mean Click the Define Param button and open the Statistics menu for some statistics options O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 246 5 11 2 Source The Source drop down list box selects the source you are measuring You can select as the source channels 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 spectrums 1 and 2 The measurement readouts of each parameter will have the same color as the selected source O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 247 5 11 3 X Parameters ps9000 en Measure X Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg width TF Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Meg Crossing 7 Burst Width Cycles A Timecthtaximurm FF TimeatMinimum Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p FT Neg Jitter RMS Menu Clicking the X Parameters button opens the list of timing parameters The list includes eighteen timing parameters used for pulse measurements Once the Top and Base calculation area is completed most of the amplitude measurements can be made You can continuously update as many as ten parameter measurements and as many as four statistics measurements at any one time The pulse measurement algorithms for X Parameters will only work when a single valued signal is used and no NRZ eye diagram or RZ e
8. 10 x f Independent Paired Reference fon i off Sel Reference Period measurement with the X Markers ps9000 en 191 ps9000 en Y Markers Menu The Y manual markers YM1 and YM2 markers are two horizontal lines you can move vertically The YM1 is displayed as a solid line and the YM2 is displayed as a dashed line You can position the Y markers anywhere on the display which allows you to make custom measurements The Y markers track the voltage values as the vertical scale is changed which allows you to make accurate voltage measurements The position readout is based on the scale factors of the source waveform Marker resolution is limited to the pixel resolution of the display Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Run Stop Single Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Channels ee 12 GHz 250 GSals f Chi C che Display w On O Off Acquire n or OFFSET o EEE Narrow DESKEN At Acq yf Trigger iz 250 Persistence External Direct A co Ea Ara Est HF Amplitude measurement with the Y Markers tf Ext Dir o Neg F 7 ai i aN rp os gt crc ME Display Save Recal Limit Test Mathematics O x hi Source Chi ALE f Independent Paired Reference Con Off Sel Relerente O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 900
9. H l over all N samples s within the measured region full display window of duration At Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Print About Eye Diagram 15 12 GHz 1 501 TSalz Persistence External Direct Time Base sample ve Parameters Time Base XA RZ Eye Paramete Gl ro z LERN Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye Width TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Bit kate E A400 Wiis y Mode i Main Intensified e Delayed Fos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Total Meas Dual Delayed Con ft Off ls Pos C Meg i Ext HF e Ext Dir Chi ES Ady 66 52 pa diw DELTA DELAY Y a 15016 ps Comtek 250 mv RZ Area definition This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 120 121 5 4 7 2 ps9000 en Menu RZ Bit Rate W Bit Rate The RZ Bit Rate is a measure of the inverse of the bit time 1 bit time or 1 period of the RZ eye rising edges The bit time is a measure of the time between the 50 rising edges of two consecutive eyes Pico Technology PicoS
10. Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Eye Diagram 12 GHz 1 501 3 12 GHz 1 501 TSass Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters sample Area 7 Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye Width 36 FF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise 7 Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing 4 Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width TF Rise Time Time Base Unite Time 7 Bit Period Crossing Total Mea 320 Dual Delayed Con off cha E div Bie CEDE e posi Neg Ext HF K DELTA DELA a os 4 n ac 150 16 ps Int Clk Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics RZ Positive Crossing definition The RZ Positive Crossing is determined as follows RZ Positive Crossing TCrossPos where TCrossPos is the mean of the histogram of a positive crossing This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 131 5 4 7 11 ps9000 en Menu RZ Positive Duty Cycle RZ Positive Duty Cycle is a measure of the ratio of the RZ positive pulse width to the RZ bit time
11. ds ale f Ext Dir fe Pos Ne E i Ext HF E NRZ Area definition This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement systemto use a waveform database if available O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 79 Oa oye ps9000 en Menu NRZ Bit Rate Bit Rate NRZ Bit Rate is the inverse of bit time 1 bit time The bit time is a measure of the horizontal opening of an eye diagram at the crossing points of the eye Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display lo StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ie Print About Eye Diagram 12 56H z 12 GHz 746 35 GSal Fersistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base A NRZ Eve Paramet Units Area f Time 7 Bit Rate C Bit Period Bit Time Crossing Time Cycle Area MT DutcyeDist DutcycDist Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time z 7463 Gals Bit kate st 400 Wiis gt hlade i Main C Intensified e Delayed By pedi DELA gt E Dual Delayed Con i off i Ext HF DELTA DELA a Os a a ae crc MO f Ext Dir yo Neg NRZ Bit Rate definition To compute bit time bit period the crossing points of the
12. 2 Amplitude is the amplitude of the waveform 3 Amplitude Top Base where Top is the most prevalent point above the waveform midpoint and Base is the most prevalent point below the waveform midpoint Analog to digital conversion The process that changes an analog signal into a digital magnitude value AND Logical designation or circuit function meaning that all inputs must be in the TRUE state for a TRUE output Annotations Lines displayed on screen to indicate measurement reference levels and points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement value Anti alias filter A filter that attenuates noise and high frequency components of an analog signal prior to its conversion into a digital value Aperture Jitter In a sample hold or ADC the jitter between the time of the sample or convert command pulse and the time the input signal is actually sampled This jitter is usually due to thermal noise O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 379 Glossary Aperture Uncertainty In a sample hold or ADC the total uncertainty in the time of the sample or convert command pulse and the time the input signal is actually sampled due to all causes including noise signal amplitude dependent delay variation as in a flash ADC temperature etc Often used interchangeably with aperture jitter but aperture uncertainty is the more inclusive term Area Measurement of the
13. Dual Delayed Con ft off DELTA DELAY a Bi EA i Ext Dir poe Ne fe Ext HF m C Int Clk 50 15 E S0 mv oy 148 8 ps Trigger Acquistion Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics RZ Eye Amplitude definition RZ Eye Amplitude measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from the upper and lower halves of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines the mean values of the logic 1 and logic O levels The eye amplitude is determined as follows RZ Eye Amplitude One Level Zero Level ps9000 en 142 143 5 4 8 5 ps9000 en Menu RZ Eye Height and RZ Eye Height dB le Eye Height V Eye Height dB RZ Eye Height is a measure of the vertical opening of an RZ eye diagram An ideal eye opening would be measured from the one level to the zero level but noise on the eye causes the eye to close The eye height measurement determines eye closure due to noise Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale De
14. Intensified e Delayed Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycDist DutCycDist s Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Iw Period Rise Time 67 pedi DELA gt E Dual Delayed Con t off Est HF DELTA DELA a Os a ah ae crc ME f Ext Dir yo Neg NRZ Period definition NRZ Period can be defined as NAZ Period AT To NRZ _ BitTime cas ere where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the means of the histograms of the two crossings of the eye diagram Right Crossing and Left Crossing This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available Also see NRZ Bit Time 0 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 91 Menu 5 4 5 12 NRZ Rise Time ps9000 en e Rise Time NRZ Rise Time is a measure of the mean transition time of the data on the upward slope of an eye diagram The data crosses the lower middle and upper thresholds as well as the eye crossing points Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 17 GHz E af x Clear Display Pun Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo i Copy nee Print About Eye Diagram 1 12 GHz 746 3 Goals Persistence External Direct Time Base sample ye Parameters Time Base XNRZ Eye Paramet Hl rea f Time T Bit Rate Bi
15. Menu Acquisition Menu Acquisition Acquisition is a process of digitizing data points from a signal and assembling them into a trace record that is shown on the display Once you have created a trace acquisition of the signal is continuous and you see a live trace on the display How traces are acquired The PicoScope 9000 uses a sequential sampling technique for acquiring waveforms When the oscilloscope acquires trace records it bases the sampling process on a trigger event that occurs on the trigger signal The trigger signal is independent of the signal being acquired Sample Interval Trigger First Event on Sampled Trigger and Signal Digitized Signal Minimum Delay Acquisition of a Trace When the trigger event is detected the PicoScope 9000 waits a specified period of time before sampling and digitizing the first trace point The time period is the horizontal position of the trace which is set using the variables After the first point is digitized the PicoScope 9000 waits for another trigger event before sampling and digitizing the second point of the trace record For the second point the waiting time between the trigger event and the sampling and digitizing of the point is increased by the sample interval The acquisition process continues until all the points in the trace are sampled and digitized Points are acquired in order from left to right and each point is sampled from a separate trigger event
16. NRZ _ axtinetionkatio o Pone Mole MRA Extirciorfa o H Vzero dark Vone or Pone and Vzero Pzero are determined from vertical histograms of the eye window The histogram Is typically bimodal and Vone and Vzero correspond to the two means of the histogram Histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the central 20 of the bit period between the Eye Boundaries One histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram one level The second histogram is composed of data points from the lower half of the eye zero level The instrument analyses the histograms and determines the histogram means The vertical scale setting affects the magnitude of the offset For best accuracy perform the extinction ratio calibration at the vertical scale at which you will make your measurement You can then adjust the vertical scale between and up to the next closest scale value in the 1 2 5 sequence For example if you set the vertical scale to 50 mV and then performed an extinction ratio calibration you can adjust the scale between and up to 20 mV and 100 mV If you exceed those upper and lower values the instrument will recommend that you perform another extinction ratio calibration at the new value This recommendation is to ensure best measurement accuracy You will still get valid measurement results without a new extinction ratio calibration but wit
17. Trigger NRZ Frequency definition The NRZ Frequency is determined as follows NRE Frequency F T aos ore where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the means of the histograms of the two crossings This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 89 Menu 5 4 5 10 NRZ Jitter pp and NRZ Jitter RMS e Jitter P p e Jitter RAS NRZ Jitter is a measurement of the time variance of the crossing points Horizontal time histograms are constructed to determine the location of the crossing points An iterative process is used to narrow the histogram window to precisely determine the crossing points and the variance The measurement window is kept extremely small so that the width of the crossing points is not influenced by the rise time and fall time of the waveform The amount of jitter on the waveform is directly related to the width of the crossing points Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display R n StopSingle _Autoscale Defaut Setup Uno Eson Preto spot Eye Diagram als 2 GHz 746 5 Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Area f Time Bit Rate Bit Period Bit Time Bit Fate Crossing Time 51 8400 mvs Cyc
18. ve Parameters A ARS Eye Paramet Eye Diagram ve Parameters YMRS Eye Paramet Zero Level Eye Diagram Eye Diagram ies AC RMS ACRMS E Avg Power Avg Power Bit Rate Avg Power dB Avg Power dEr mo E Crossing E Crossing Crossing Level eS Crossing Level Crossing Time Ext Ratio dB y I Ext Ratio dB m Ext Ratio Eye width FT Ext Ratio Ext Ratio T Eve idth Ext Ratio DutcycDist Eye Amplitude FT Eve Amplitude Eye Height Fall Time Eye Height DutlycDist ycDist s E sE Height dB I Jitter P p Fall Eye Height dB Eye v icth ax N Max T Eye width Mean Jitter P p Rise Mean D Mid T Jitter RMS Fall J Mid Fall Time F Min Min Neg Overshoot Jitter RMS Rise Neg Overshoot Frequency E ras nen els Neg Crossing E oe e a Jitter Pp oise P p Zero aise P p Zero I Noise RMS One Fos Crossing I Noise RMS One Jitter RMS E Moise RMS Zero Pos Duty Cycle E Moise RMS Zero Period One Level One Level m pe Peak Peak Pulse Symmetry Peak Peak Rise Time E Pos Overshoot Pulse Width E Pos Overshoot RMS RMS 7 S N Ratio Rise Time S N Ratio 53 8 Ratio dB S N Ratio dB Zero Level Menu The Eye Diagram menu The measurement algorithms for Eye Parameters will only work when an eye diagram and not a pulse is present on the screen Eye measurements are based on stati
19. 1 5400 mes A400 Wiis 51 S400 mes Mode Dual Delayed Con tf off DELTA DELAY ds chi A E BAD pos Neg C EAH int IC NRZ Cycle Area definition This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement systemto use a waveform database if available O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 83 Menu 5 4 5 6 NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion and NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion s e DutCycDist Se e DutCycDist s NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion is a measure of the time between the falling edge and the rising edge of the eye pattern at the middle threshold 50 level Pico Techni PicoScope 9000 PC Sar Oscilloscope 12 GHz 3 Oo xj o GORY Print About Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate 5400 Mbs y Main Intensified e Delayed Crossing Time Cycle Area M DutCycDist jw DutcycDist Eye Width Eye idh Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Minima f Ext Dir oOo gt Neg Ext HF EN C ntek Ld Measurement of Duty Cycle Distortion NRZ eye diagram has Significant distortion The instrument constructs a histogram that records the time at which the rising edge and falling edge cross the m
20. 5 14 4 ps9000 en Menu Autoscale Autoscale Adjusting an oscilloscope to display a stable trace of usable size and amplitude can be a time consuming process The Autoscale feature of the PicoScope 9000 can quickly give you a Stable meaningful trace display The Autoscale button causes the instrument to quickly analyse any waveforms connected to the trigger and channel inputs Then it sets up the vertical horizontal and trigger controls to best display that signal When you click the Autocale button you tell the PicoScope 9000 to examine the Signal and adjust the following controls for optimum display e Vertical scale and offset Timebase scale and delay e Trigger level if appropriate to that trigger source The PicoScope 9000 must have an available trigger source and input For example if you are using the DIRECT TRIGGER INPUT and Direct is selected in the Trigger Source 25 menu the trigger signal must be connected to this trigger input Autoscale can then set the trigger level If you are using the PRESCALE TRIGGER INPUT and the Prescaler is selected in the Trigger Source 35 menu the trigger signal must be connected to this trigger input When Direct is selected in the Trigger Source 35 menu the Autoscale function can find repetitive signals with Frequency greater than 1 kHz Duty cycle greater than 1 Vertical amplitude greater than 50 mV p p Trigger amplitude as it is specified When Prescaler i
21. 5 2 12 5 2 13 ATTENUATION The ATTENUATION variable lets you select an attenuation that matches the device connected to the instrument When the attenuation is set correctly the instrument maintains the current scale factors if possible All marker values and voltage amperage or wattage measurements will reflect the actual signal at the input to the external device The channel attenuation factor is used to establish a database for Generating the vertical scale and offset prompts on the display Calculating the automated waveform measurements Y marker levels Calculating functions The attenuation factor can be adjusted from 0 0001 1 to 1000000 1 or from 80 dB to 120 dB The ATTENUATION function allows you to set attenuation of the selected channel in one of two ways By using the ATTENUATION spin box By using the Pop up Keypadl 37 to enter specific settings Scale The External Scale function lets you select a unit of measure that is appended to the channel scale offset and vertical measurement values The units are Volt Watt Ampere or Unknown Use Volt for voltage probes Ampere for current probes Watt for optical to electrical converters and Unknown when there is no unit of measure or when the unit of measure is not one of the available choices O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 47 5 3 ps9000 en Menu Display Menu The Display menu controls most of the feature
22. About Measure 12 GHz E iz 12 GHz 500 GSafs External Direct Time Base Parameterz Time Base i Time 7 Bit Period ats Persistence Timing Parameters Period Frequency Poe Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Bit kate js A400 Mis y Mode f Main Intensified e Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum F Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Iw Neg Jitter p p E Current Total vims Minimum Maximum Mean Meg Jitter RMS 7 We oe ae Dual Delayed Con t off 30 pz ou DELTA DELAY Est HF cock MOR EES iV e pos neg Negative Jitter p p definition Negative Jitter p p is determined as follows Negative Jitter p p Full width of the Horizontal Histogram in the Middle Threshold The Margins menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of Negative jitter p p will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 273 Menu 5 11 3 18 Negative Jitter RMS Negative Jitter RMS is a measure of the rms time variations of the falling edges of a pulse waveform at the middle threshold Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autosca
23. BELA 2502 a ee Con f Off DELTA DELAT OE E Ext Dir ep pea MH EE Est HF ans C int ck IC Peak Peak definition Peak Peak is determined as follows Peak Peak Maximum Minimum where Maximum is the voltage or power of the absolute maximum value of the waveform and Minimum is the voltage or power of the absolute minimum value of the waveform The Margins 307 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of peak peak value will be performed only inside these margins O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 278 5 11 4 4 Top sunnemeune Top is the voltage of the statistical maximum level Use the Method 23 and Thresholds 4 menus to customize the measurement threshold levels Top may be equal to Maximum for many waveforms such as triangle waveforms The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz S Z Ol x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy AE Print About Measure 1 12 100 External Direct Time Base Parameters Unite i Time 7 Bit Period Persistence Amplitud
24. Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot a a 91 a Mei 1 eee e Delayed Current Total Wma Minimum 106 6 mw 2 Cual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Pos tf Ext Dir e Pos Ne EA i Ext HF E ah 250 int ck IC Minimum definition The Margins 32 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of minimum value will be performed only inside these margins O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 277 5 11 4 3 ps9000 en Menu Peak Peak m Pesk Peak Peak Peak is a measure of the difference between Maximum and Minimum of a displayed waveform The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology e 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz 7 Oo x Clear Display StopiSingle A Autoscale A Setup i Undo E e E Print About Measure ts Persistence External Direct Time Base Parameters Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum e Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude T middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot SCALE E 200 psidiv
25. DELAT 9 2 0n Dual Delayed Con f off KIG DELTA DELAT 30 ne liv A 10 nsvdiv Ext Dir e Pos i Mec 7 i O AIB E z 32 3 cmo ME Main Time Base Mode 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 347 Menu Pko Technology PkoScepe 0000 PE S5Sanp ngOsciosope 17 Gy Mi o e Li 17 Gy R alti x nw Cargar 134 e Atoe oe eine Seow rae jj Oai Prt aera Channels ares son Ove Time Bane Carra t Tene Dare E f cm aa E Fo on A ce A ace sif i 4 C mae ar i gt tae f oo Ei E oo Ei m fone nmga Ma Tact fre Degen y m Zoom nmga Mask Tet fre Degen tty Intensified Time Base Mode Dual Delayed Time Base Mode ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 15 4 SCALE A 348 10 n idiv The SCALE A function Is similar to the time div knob of the main timebase ona traditional oscilloscope Division is this instance equals 1 10 of the horizontal axis Adjusting the horizontal timebase scale control expands and compresses the displayed waveform horizontally y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Channels 12 GHz 10 3 e 11 Persistence External Direct Time Base hannel 1 f chi Cha Display On oC Of
26. Determines the duration between the Pulse Start the 50 magnitude transition point on the leading edge and the Pulse Stop medial point on the trailing edge of a pulse waveform Q Q factor Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye diagram indicating the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at both the high and low logic levels Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Quantizing error The inherent uncertainty in digitizing an analog value that is caused by the finite resolution of the conversion process Increasing the resolution of an ADC reduces the uncertainty R RAM A memory in which each data address can either be written into or read from at any time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 405 ps9000 en Glossary Random Jitter Random Jitter is jitter that is unpredictable and not data related Random jitter Is unbounded meaning that measured values increase with longer measurement times Random Repetitive Sampling One method of Equivalent Time Sampling Acting upon stable repetitive signals it represents the process of storing different full sampling sweeps in a DSO or digitizer system where each sweep is slightly offset from the other to achieve a higher effective sampling rate than the single shot rate A major advantage of this technique is pretrigger viewing Range The maximum and minimum
27. Humidity PC connection PC connection Power Requirements Power supply voltage Power supply current Protection AC adaptor Physical Characteristics Dimensions Net Weight Specifications amp Characteristics FC133 FC266 FC531 FC1063 FC2125 FC4250 LOGFC GB Ethernet 2XGB Ethernet 10GB Ethernet 10GBE Ethernet 10XGB Ethernet DS1 DS2 8 Mb DS3 140 Mb DS1 DS1C DS2 DS3 STS1 Eye STS1 Pulse Ss3 Available for industry standard mask testing Masks are created automatically for single valued voltage signals Automask specifies both delta X and delta Y tolerances The failure actions are identical to those of limit testing Total number of waveforms examined number of failed samples number of hits within each polygon boundary Operating 5 C to 35 C for normal operation 15 C to 30 C for quoted accuracy Storage 20 C to 50 C Operating Up to 85 relative humidity non condensing at 25 C Storage Up to 95 relative humidity non condensing USB 2 0 FS Compatible with USB 1 1 LAN PicoScope 9201 only 6 V 5 PicoScope 9201 2 0 A max PicoScope 9211 2 2 A max Auto shutdown on excess or reverse voltage Universal adaptor supplied Width 170 mm 6 7 Height 40 mm 1 6 Depth 255 mm 10 0 PicoScope 9201 1 1 PicoScope 9211 1 3 kg kg kg O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 20 5 5 1
28. Max Envelope mode Min Envelope mode Clicking one of the envelope radio buttons Min Max Envelope Max Envelope or Min Envelope lets you acquire and display a waveform showing the extreme values of several acquisitions over a period of time Thus the oscilloscope detects peaks You can specify a number of acquisitions over which to accumulate and display the min max data The oscilloscope compares the min max values from the current acquisition with those stored from previous acquisitions up to the specified number of acquisitions An enveloped waveform then shows the maximum excursions of the individual waveform records This often results in a thicker waveform trace that shows the variations of the Signal Use this mode to reveal the noise band around the signal Because it degrades the timing information in the data by a factor of 2 Envelope mode is typically not suitable for FFT analysis In addition this mode can obscure the Statistical distribution of the samples that occurred between the minimum and maximum values However you can create a display of this distribution by using the persistence display modes to view only peak values sampled over a period of time O The Envelope mode requires a stable trigger for time correlation Min Max Envelope This radio button tells the oscilloscope to acquire and display the variation of both extremes maximum and minimum Max Envelope This radio button tells the oscilloscope to acquire a
29. Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SIN Ratio dB e Zero Level Bit kate Js 5400 mb Main Intensified fe Delayed Current Total Meas Minima Y CEDE pos Neg Ext HF ce Int Clk 50 9 NRZ Zero Level definition Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from only the lower half of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines histogram mean The RZ Zero Level is determined as follows NRZ Zero Level Histogram Mean All data at the one level is disregarded 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 118 The standard deviation that is reported on the instrument display as part of the measure results is derived from the statistical analysis of the zero level measurement result It is not the same as the standard deviation derived from the histogram analysis of the signal O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 119 5 4 7 ps9000 en Menu X RZ Eye Parameters Eye Diagram ve Parameters The list of X
30. S Safety 4 Safety symbols 5 Sampling mode 25 Save as Default button 330 Save function 321 Save Mask as Std button 230 Save Setup button 330 Save User Mask button 229 Save Waveform function 317 Save Recall Menu 316 specifications 15 Scale 46 SCALE A variable 348 SCALE B variable 349 Screen X control 62 Screen Y control 62 Self windowing 170 Set Color menu 65 Set on Top menu 66 Setup button 325 Single Parameter button 314 Single valued signal mode 24 SMA connectors 8 SONET SDH Masks list 201 Source Waveform Memory menu 317 Specifications 10 Standard Mask button 200 Statistics 244 menu 301 Statistics Mode menu 302 Stop Single button 334 Style menu 49 Support 6 System Controls 331 System requirements 3 y Technical support 7 Telephone 7 Thresholds menu 304 Time Base Horizontal 11 Time Base menu 343 Time Base Mode menu 346 Time Base Units menu 344 Time Maximum parameter 268 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 422 Time Minimum parameter 269 TOP and BASE variables 303 Total harmonic distortion parameter 311 Trace display style 48 Trace mode 48 Trademarks 6 Transparency variable 66 Trigger menu 354 prescaled 13 Specifications 12 Trigger Source menu 358 Trigger Attenuation Units menu 364 Trigger ATTENUATION variable 365 Trigger External Direct Scale function 363 Trigger HOLDOFF variable 362 Trigger Hysteresis menu 363 Trigger LEVEL variable 361 Trigger Mode menu 360 Trigger S
31. Time Base Unite i Time Bit Period Standard Mask Bit kate E 5400 Mbs Main O Intensified e Delayed Build Automask Edit Mask Recall User Maszk Save User Mask Cual Delayed Con off DELTA DELAY os cA BY pedi Ext Dir f Pos O Neg CAIB Ext HF C Int Clk 50 An example of eye diagram with positive mask margins 20 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 204 Pico Techn au PicoScope 9000 PC Samping Oscilloscope 12 GHz l Ol x CORY A ee Mask Test 1 49 E SHz 1 49 Persistence External Direct Time Base reate Mask S 110116040 Time Base i Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate E A400 Wiis bode C Main C Intensified e Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY ds 2 f Ext Dir oo 8 Neg f Ext HF a SL He 2 Int Clk 5 An example of eye diagram with negative mask margins 20 5 9 1 1 3 Alignment The instrument can align the Time Base Scale to a selected industry standard mask To turn on the alignment option check the Alignment check box located on each opened list of industry standard masks 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 205 5 9 1 1 4 ps9000 en Fiber Channel Masks l Fiber Channel Menu Clicking the Fiber Channel tab opens the list of industry standard masks Any of t
32. When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 6 7 NRZ Mean 4 Mean 102 NRZ Mean is a measure of the arithmetic mean of the selected waveform within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Fun StopSingle Auto cale 12 GHz 1 4 z 12 G Eye Diagram 14 ve Parameters GHz 1 493 TS Persistence External HF I Y AR Eye Paramet DT AC RMS D Avg Power TF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB hax e Mean T mid F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level a 67 psidiv Ext Dit bos eg Y Ext HF as ae LES ona 200 mi 1 Y Y oy Trigger Acquistion Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics Default Setup Undo f Cony ee era ale O x Time Base Time Base Unite Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate 51 8400 Mihis od Main O Intensified e Delayed By psdiv gt KE Cual Delaye
33. e Variable Color Grading Infinite Color Grading 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 58 Variable Color Grading In the Variable Color Grading display style the screen is not refreshed after every acquisition instead the screen is refreshed at a specified user selectable rate You can vary the refresh time from minimum of 1 s to 200 s You can change the refresh time with the REFRESH TIME variable If one of the following is changed when the instrument is in the Variable Color Grading display style the displayed waveform is redrawn and any accumulated waveforms are cleared Clear Display button is pressed e An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed The instrument is turned off Infinite Color Grading When you select the Infinite Color Grading display style all the data points are kept on the display With the Infinite Color Grading display style all sampled data points are left on the display until one of the following occurs Clear Display button is pressed An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed The instrument is turned off You can use infinite color grading for worst case characterization of signal noise jitter and drift and to see a waveform s envelope look for timing violations and find infrequent events 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 59 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 ps9000
34. 2 Click the Delete Point button The point will be deleted 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz Persistence External HF lp E sample sample User Mask pf et 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 223 Menu 3 Click the Back button The scope returns to high level menu and the mask gets a new shape without the deleted point 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz i I Persistence External HF sample ale User Mask ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 224 5 9 1 4 3 Add Polygon The Add Polygon function allows you to select one of the eight polygons that you want to create To add a polygon 1 Click the Edit Mask button and then the Add Polygon button To create the first point of the new polygon click on the waveform area of the screen Move the mouse to the second point of the new polygon then click again Continue for all new points You will see lines connecting all the points of the polygon To finish the construction right click anywhere on the display The polygon is now built and the mouse is free ete epi bt jee See Passes siecle pa sample Ampie Me 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 225 Menu 2 Click the Back button The scope returns to the high level menu and the mask gets a new polygon 12 GHz 4 493 a 120 i Persistence External HF oma sample ale LL ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technolo
35. 200 m 200 mv DELTA DELAY Pos a 67 psidiv Ext Dit bos eg f Ext HF de sd CES ena gt Acquistion Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics NRZ Middle definition The NRZ middle is determined as follows NRZ Mid Max Min 2 where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements See also NRZ Max 110 and NRZ Min 10 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 6 9 NRZ Min Peres 104 NRZ Min is a measure of the minimum vertical value of the selected waveform of the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l Run StopSingle Auto cale Default Setup Undo i le External HF Clear Display Eye Diagram ve Parameters 1 49 3 Persistence le Y NRZ Eye Paramet DT ac RMS D Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB T Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude TF Eye Height Eye Height dB hax Mean T mid e Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio T S N Ratio dB Zero Level current Total Meas 60 19 mv 92 li B
36. Extinction Ratio dB ratio Eye Amplitude Eye High Eye Width s Fall Time Frequency Jitter p p RMS Max Mean Mid Min Negative Overshoot Noise p p One Zero Noise RMS One Level Peak Peak Positive Overshoot Period Rise Time RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level AC RMS Area Bit Rate Bit Time Contrast Ratio dB ratio Cycle Area Eye Amplitude Eye High Eye Opening Factor Eye Width s Fall Time Jitter p p RMS Max Mean Mid Min RMS Rise Fall Negative Crossing Noise p p One Zero Noise RMS One Level Peak Peak Positive Crossing Positive Duty Cycle Pulse Width Rise Time RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level Acquired signals are tested for fit outside areas defined by up to eight polygons Any samples that fall within the polygon boundaries result in test failures Masks can be loaded from disk or created automatically or manually You can create the following Mask Standard predefined Mask Automask Mask saved on disk Create new mask Edit any mask Standard predefined optical or standard electrical masks can be created OC1 STMO OC3 STM1 OC9 STM3 OC12 STMA4 OC18 STM6 OC48 STM16 FEC2666 OC192 STM64 FEC1066 FEC1071 FEC4266 FEC4302 ps9000 en 19 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 ps9000 en Fiber Channel Ethernet INFIBAND XAUI ITU G 703 ANSI T1 102 Mask Margin Automask Creation Data collected during test Environmental Conditions Temperature
37. Eye Diagram 18 Define Parameters menu 159 Measure menu 73 menu 70 Mode menu 157 Source menu 76 Statistics menu 156 Statistics on off 156 Thresholds menu 160 View Define Param control 158 Waveforms variable 157 Weight variable 157 F Fall Time parameter 258 Fan 4 FCC rules 5 FFT 17 ps9000 en Index Basics 162 Define Parameters menu 312 Define Parameters Method menu 313 Delta Frequency parameter 310 Delta Magnitude parameter 311 Display control 165 Frequency parameter 310 Magnitude parameter 310 Menu 161 Parameters menu 309 Select buttons 165 Source selection 165 FFT Window Blackman Harris 174 Cosine 172 flattop 173 Hamming 171 Hann 172 Kaiser Bessel 175 menu 166 rectangular 170 Fiber Channel Masks list 205 File Name menu 319 File Type menu 319 Fit Acquisition To menu 24 Fitness for purpose 6 Flattop window 166 173 G Glossary 377 Graticule menu 64 Gray scaling 49 Grounding safety 4 H Hamming window 166 171 Hann Hanning window 172 Hanning window 166 Help button 342 Histogram 17 OF SAMPLES variable 186 OF WAVEFORMS variable 186 Axis control 179 menu 1 76 181 Mode button 181 Mode menu 181 OFFSET variable 186 Run Until control 186 Scale button 184 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Histogram 17 Scale Mode control 185 Scale Type control 184 SCALE variable 185 Source menu 180 Window button 182 Window Display menu 184 Window
38. FEC 1071 10 703 Gbps A E Alignment OF Cancel The list of industry standard SONET SDH masks Any of these masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveformto a Specific industry standard listed above An example eye diagram with the OS48 STM16 industry standard mask is shown below ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 202 a Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display StopSingle Auto cale Setup Undo E Print Help Mask Test z 1 493 is a 1 493 T Pers etenee External HF Time Base reate Mask Standard Mask Build Altormazk vode i Main C Intensified f Delayed Edit Mask SCALE A Recall User hlask Save User Mask We baszk e Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY 1 a C Ext Dir g Post Hed f Ext HF ae 2 C Int Clk 50 a An example of eye diagram with the 0S48 STM16 SONET SDH mask O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 203 loz ps9000 en Menu Mask Margins Iw Margins EFI gt The Margins option is a part of each opened list of industry standard masks Mask margins are used to determine the margin of compliance for a standard mask The operator can use both positive mask margins and negative mask margins Positive mask margins determine how much larger you will be
39. Mode The Mode menu defines one of two modes that determine an algorithm for statistical calculation Normal When the Normal mode is selected each of the acquired waveforms has equal influence on the result of the statistical calculations on the histogram The WEIGHT 18f variable is not active in this mode Exponential When the Exponential mode is selected each of the acquired waveforms has a weighted influence on the result of statistical calculations on the eye diagram The WEIGHT 18 variable specifies the degree of this influence WEIGHT The WEIGHT variable specifies the degree of influence of the nearest acquired waveform against more remote waveforms The WEIGHT variable is active when Exponential is selected in the Models menu The WEIGHT can be varied from 8 to 8192 in multiples of two O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 182 5 6 5 Window Two common uses for histograms are measuring and characterizing noise or jitter on displayed waveforms Noise is measured by sizing the histogram window to a narrow portion of time and observing a vertical histogram that measures the noise on a flat section of a waveform Jitter is measured by sizing the histogram window to a narrow portion of voltage and observing a horizontal histogram that measures the jitter on an edge The histogram window determines which region of the database will be used to construct the histog
40. Other Line Impedance 100 Ohm twisted pair 120 Ohm twisted pair 5 Ohm coax 110 Ohm twisted pair 5 Ohm coas 5 Ohm coax 5 Ohm coas fo Ohm coas 5 Ohm coax 5 Ohm coas fo Ohm coas 5 Ohm coas 5 Ohm coas TE Miera aaa Margins RE Cancel Us Fiber Channel SONET SOH Bit Rate 1 544 Mbps 2 045 Mbps 2 048 Mbps 6 312 Mbps 6 312 Mbps 6 445 Mbps 34 369 Mbps 44 736 Mbps 139 264 Mbps 139 264 Mbps 139 264 Mbps 155 520 Mbps 155 520 Mbps 1EE F20 kin A The list of industry standard electrical ITU G 703 masks Menu Clicking the ITU G 703 tab opens the list of industry standard electrical masks Any of these masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveform to a specific industry standard listed above ANSI 11 102 ITU G 703 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 208 5 9 1 1 7 ANSIT1 102 Masks ANSI 11 102 Clicking the ANSI T1 102 tab opens the list of industry standard electrical masks Any of these masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveform to a specific industry standard listed above ITU G 703 Other SONET SDH ANSI 11 102 Ethernet Fiber Channel Line Impedance Bit Rate 0571 100 Ohm twisted par 1 544 Mbps DST C 100 Ohm twisted pair 3 152 Mbps DS 110 Ohm twisted par 6 312 Mbps DS3 25 Ohm coax 44736 Mbps 57151 Eye 5 Ohm coas 51 84 Mbps 5151 Pulse 5 Ohm coax 51 8540 Mbps 5153 Eve 5 Ohm
41. Parameters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Bit kate 5400 Mbs Main O Intensified f Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum e Timecehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY ds Current Total Wma Minimum f Ext Dir e Pos Ne EA gt i Ext HF gt Ss E Int Clk C Time Minimum definition The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Time Minimum value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 11 3 15 Positive Jitter p p 270 Positive Jitter p p is a measure of peak peak time variations of the rising edges of a pulse waveform at the middle threshold Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Run StopSingle Auto cale TE e gt iz 12 GHz 500 GSa Measure Parameterz Timing Parameters Period Frequency Poe Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst wid
42. RZ Eye Opening Factor definition The RZ Eye Opening Factor measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 The eye opening factor is determined as follows aN Cnelhevel ao Zero hevel Be ByeCveningPacior _ Quelevel Teno eeroLevel Teer CQreLlevel ZeroLevel O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 145 5 4 8 7 ps9000 en Menu Aa RZ Max is a measure of the maximum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy ee Print Help Eye Diagram deaa ests le SS Time Base ve Parameters Persistence MT AC RMS D Avg Power D Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Jw haz Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level in ensitied elayed 01 Ta Bis current Total Meas Minimum Waite Dual Delayed 7 Signal t
43. To compute jitter peak to peak the standard deviation is measured at a 50 level of the first measurable falling edge The measurement window is kept extremely small so that the width at the 50 level is not influenced by the slope of the waveform The histograms are then analysed to determine the amount of RMS jitter which is defined as lo standard deviation from the histogram mean The RZ peak to peak jitter is the full width of the histogram at the eye 50 level RZ Jitter P p Fall 60 crossing The RZ RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation from the histogram mean at the eye crossing point RZ Jitter RMS Fall 10 crossing 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 128 5 4 7 8 RZ Jitter P p Rise and RZ Jitter RMS Rise RZ Jitter P p Rise and RZ Jitter RMS Rise are the measures of signal instability relative to its ideal position in time Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display un StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ae Print About Eye Diagram 12 GHz 1 501 EE 12 GHz 1 501 Tsa z Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period ve Parameters Area Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Bit kate st A400 Wiis Eye width Main FT Fall Time Intensified f Delayed
44. i Bme ee pP E mi k 7 ian i 1 MOV LR APM y 3 ee x A a PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes User s Guide ps9000 en 2 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide I Contents WMV CIC OMS io bt 2 DZ MACRO UCA Ni ias 3 I Overview ee diodo dial to UE 3 2 Minimum PC requirements o eccoooncnuonononacnonncnaonononacnoncncnnonenannonanacnoncccnononanacnonaccnnonenannenanacnonacinno 3 3 Safety information iseset eae AE EE E EEE OE E EEEa 4 4 Safety symbols essessesseeseesseeseessesseeseesscesesscaseeneessceseeneessceseenresecascenteseenresscaseeseesseeseeseeseceseeseens 5 SECO NO tc A SA SAA AAA ARA 5 A O A Rae EO A ET OEY A 5 7 Legal information ssssseseesseeseesecsseeseesscesessceseeneesscaseeneesscescesresscsscesteseesresscaseesressceseeseesecaseeseens 6 SS Contacideta Ul oscars ae sei oo a Soca A ias 7 3 PrOGuUEtiINtO Mao Nulidad di 8 1 What do I get gt seessseesseereseersseeesseeenerceneceneceasecesseceneccenecessreessreeneeeesecenecessreesseceserreseceaseeesseeesees 8 Connections NS A SS A a 8 4 Specifications lt Characteristics risa tai 10 1 Channels Vertical eooonocoonononccnnonenanacnonacnonacaninncnannenannononacnonnenannononacnonccno A A as 10 2 Timebase Horizontal ssesseseeseseeseeseeseesessessessenresreseeseesesseseeseesessessessenresreseeseeseesessesseseesens 11 3 Trigger eeeseereseereseerssrerreeceseceasecessee
45. it is ground plus offset Channel probe deskew A relative time delay for each channel The ability to adjust deskew lets you align Signals to compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing length Chop Mode A display mode of operation in which small parts of each channel are traced so that more than one waveform can appear on the screen simultaneously Circuit Loading The unintentional interaction of the probe and oscilloscope with the circuit being tested distorting the signal Coherency The optical power emitted from a laser diode after a specific current threshold is reached Also known as Stimulated Emission Coherent display A display where the time sequence of signal events is preserved A coherent display may be produced by either random or sequential sampling Color Grading Waveform Persistence The color graded persistence mode displays the sampled data points for an endless period of time This persistence mode uses five color levels to represent the total number density of data counts acquired on a pixel time and amplitude display coordinate of the display graticule Every time a display is acquired on a display coordinate the counter for that coordinate is incremented Each color used for the color grade mode represents a range of data counts As the total count increases the range of hits represented by each color also increases If color grade is left on for a long time the w
46. measurement cycle 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 158 5 4 10 View Define Parameters Setting View Define Param to On gives you a visual indicator of the calculation of the Eye Window placement The Eye Window is red Setting the control to Off makes the Eye Window disappear 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 159 Menu 5 4 11 Define Parameters The Define Param menu sets the measurement points boundaries and thresholds where the automatic measurements are made The menu influences the measurement algorithm by allowing you to use the standard measurement points or customize the measurements with user defined selections Eye Diagram ve Define Parameter EYE BOUNDARY EYE BOUNDARY 2 5 4 11 1 EYEBOUNDARY 1 8 EYE BOUNDARY 2 EYE BOUNDARY 1 EYE BOUNDARY 2 The EYE BOUNDARY 1 left boundary and the EYE BOUNDARY 2 right boundary variables set the time for the eye boundaries These settings determine what horizontal portion of the eye will be used to generate histograms for eye diagram amplitude measurements Both boundaries directly determine One Level and Zero Level values You can use the instrument s default values of 40 and 60 for NRZ eye diagrams and 47 5 and 52 5 for RZ eye diagrams or you can enter the values you want for the boundaries EYE BOUNDARY 1 allows you to set the percentage time for the left
47. otherwise blue The vertical and horizontal coordinates of the selected point will appear in the Status Area of the GUI 12 GHz 1 493 T5alz 12 GHZ 1 493 Tas Persistence Exter nal HF sample sample DO eT 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 215 Menu 3 Click and hold the left mouse button on the selected point then drag the mouse to move the point to the desired position Release the mouse button when finished 12 GHz 1 493 Tals 12 GHz 1 493 Taals Persistence External HF n sample sample DO O O ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 216 4 Click the Back button The scope returns to the high level menu and mask gets a new shape 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz i I Persistence External HF sample 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 217 Menu 5 9 1 4 1 Add Point The Add Point function adds a point on the selected polygon in a Mask 1 Click Edit Mask Click on the polygon that you want to edit and then click ona vertex of the polygon 12 GHz 1 493 sale 12 GHz 1 493 TSals Persistence External HF sample sample pf eT E ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 218 2 Click Add Point A new point highlighted in yellow will appear counter clockwise of the selected point You can continue to edit this point 12
48. the point on a displayed waveform representing the instant of trigger recognition 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 415 6 21 6 22 ps9000 en Glossary Trigger Source The signal source used to trigger the scope Usually one of the input channels or a dedicated input TTL Transistor Transistor Logic A class of logic circuitry with signal levels defined as follows logical O O to 0 8 V and logical 1 2 0 to 5 0 V U Update Rate Display Update Rate In digital scopes the number of trigger events that the scope can capture and display is referred to as its update rate Unlike analog scopes digital scopes require time to move the sampled data to memory display the acquired data do any post processing math such as Amplitude or Frequency measurements and rearm the trigger circuitry for the next acquisition Technology advances have greatly improved the update rate in digital scopes Better update rate in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a significant event Uptime The number of hours the instrument has been powered on V Variable Persistence The ability to set time parameters for the displaying of acquired data is a valuable analysis tool Setting the time to a minimum allows you to view rapidly changing signals when you want immediate display feedback Setting the time to infinite allows you to observe worst case jitter of a signal as the acquired waveforms are ne
49. 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 157 S492 5 4 9 3 5 4 9 4 ps9000 en Menu The Mode menu defines one of three modes for statistical calculations Normal Each of the acquired waveforms has equal influence on the eye diagram statistics The WAVEFORMS 15 and WEIGHT variables are not active in this mode Window Only the last specified number of acquired waveforms will have equal influence on the eye diagram statistics The WAVEFORMS 57 variable specifies the number of these influenced waveforms Exponential Each of the acquired waveforms has a weighted influence on the result of the eye diagram statistics The WEIGHT variable specifies the degree of this influence WAVEFORMS amp WEIGHT WAVEFORMS The WAVEFORMS variable specifies the number of influenced waveforms when the Window is selected in the Mode 57 menu WAVEFORMS can be varied from 8 to 8192 in multiples of two The WEIGHT variable specifies the degree of influence of the latest acquired waveform against more remote waveforms The WEIGHT variable is active when Exponential is selected in the Models menu WEIGHT can be varied from 8 to 8192 in multiples of two WEMS IN CYCLE WE MIS IM CYCLE The WFMS IN CYCLE variable determines how many acquired waveforms will be used for the one measurement cycle in eye diagram calculations The WFMS IN CYCLE variable can be selected from 64 to 1024 waveforms per one
50. 5 5 5 4 Flattop Window The Flattop window has fatter and flatter characteristic in the frequency domain The flatter top on the spectral line in the frequency domain produces improved amplitude accuracy but at the expense of poorer frequency resolution when compared with the Hann window The flattop window is the best window for making accurate amplitude measurements or frequency peaks ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 174 5 5 5 5 Blackman Harris Window A Blackman Harris window is a bell shaped window It reduces the leakage to a minimum has the widest pass band lowest frequency resolution and lowest side lobes It decreases the amount of energy spillover into adjacent frequency bins increasing the amount of amplitude accuracy at the expense of decreasing the frequency resolution because of wider lobe widths BLACKMAN MHARRIS Time domain characteristics for Blackman Harris window The Blackman Harris window is the best window for measuring the amplitude of frequencies but worst at resolving frequencies This window is especially good for viewing a broad spectrum O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 175 Menu 5 5 5 6 Kaiser Bessel Window This window has resolution bandwidths and scallop losses close to the Blackman Harris window Choose the Kaiser Bessel window to view the signal characteristics you are inter
51. 90 C 2056 50 8056 User Defined Detined Thresholds Margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 300 The Define Parameters menu sets the measurement points thresholds and margins where the automatic measurements are made These measurement points can be set to the same points for all waveforms channel waveforms function waveforms and waveform memories or can be set differently for each individual waveform The menu influences the measurement algorithm by allowing you to use the standard IEEE measurement points or customize the measurements with the user defined selections The Define Param menu also includes the Statistics 30 menu for some statistics options The Define Parameters menu is different when you work in time domain with signals or in the frequency domain with spectrums Standard IEEE measurement points The waveform drawing below shows some of the standard measurement points thresholds and parameters M x mum Uppe Threshold PeakPeak Mdd e Threshold Standard IEEE measurement points ps9000 en 301 Menu 5 11 6 1 Statistics Measure The Statistics menu includes modes and variables that determine the algorithm for a statistical measurement calculation The Statistics menu is active only when the Statistics mode of the Display 4 menu is selected ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User
52. A E A EE MAA EES Mi Custom colors Define Custom Colors gt gt Cancel Windows Color Dialog You can change the color of every item selected from the Item drop down list box O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 66 5 3 7 3 SetOn Top Click the Set On Top if you want to superimpose the display element selected from the Item list over all another display elements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz a 5 xj Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz loj xj Print About Print About Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Default Setup Undo GSal 12 3 ce zS a Gt l Pe ce Channels GHz Persii External Direct Display Channels I Display Channel 1 me Color Channel 1 Color 7 Select tem Chi C Ch2 chi Ch2 E aa On Off fe On Off Acquire uine Con C off n Top Con Cor Set On Top TRANSPARENCE TRANSPARENCE moa MEA fe e Default Colors Default Colors Color Grade Scale Color Grade Scale Back E E ca 0s cmc ME int ck MER Limit Test Mathematics Time Base FFT Measure Channels Utility Time Base
53. AC Using resistive divider probes you can increase the input impedance up to 5 kiloohms and using an active probe you can increase the input impedance up to 10 megaohms External Prescaler Connect an external trigger source to the PRESCALE TRIGGER INPUT SMA female The External Prescaler trigger source is a prescaled trigger Use it when the trigger Signal is in the frequency range 1 GHz to 10 GHz Internal Clock With the Internal Clock source you can trigger the instrument from the precise internal clock The frequency of the internal clock can be changed by the INTERNAL RATE control Use this source as a TDR clock rate Changing trigger sources while the instrument is running causes newly acquired data to overwrite existing waveforms that are on the display However if the instrument is stopped changing the trigger sources does not change the display until the instrument starts running again Clock Recovery PicoScope 9201 only Connect an external trigger source to the CLOCK RECOVERY TRIGGER INPUT SMA female when the Clock Recovery trigger source is selected This trigger source is a clock recovery trigger Use it when the trigger signal is an NRZ data pattern with any data rate between 12 3 Gb s and 2 7 Gb s 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 359 Menu 5 16 2 INTERNAL RATE The INTERNAL RATE spin box allows you to vary the repetition rate of the internal clock from 16 ns us to 2 ms If fin
54. Diagram C off i NRZ RZ Bit kate st 5400 Mbs Main O Intensified f Delayed 67 pedi Current Total Mesas Minimum Maximum Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a d Ea f Ext Dir mo Neg Ext HF cock ES The Levels Crossings and Eye Boundaries of the NRZ Eye Window ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 74 RZ Clicking the RZ radio button in the Measure menu starts the instrument calculating the One Level Zero Level Left Crossing and Right Crossing for RZ types of signal After the calculations are finished the Eye Window which has a red color will appear RZ Return to zero A type of signal coding that ensures in any one bit period that the signal is turned on for the first half of a logical one pulse and turned off or nearly off for the second half of the logical one pulse As with NRZ coding the signal is turned off or nearly off for the entire duration of a logical zero pulse Pico Techni PicoScope 9000 PC Samp Oscilloscope 12 GHz _ ioj xi Eye Diagram l 146 5 Goals SHz 746 5 Gsals Persistence External Direct ve Diagram ott RI Bit Rate E Ems SOLPCE bode i Main Intensified f Delayed SCALE B 67 pedir Current Total Meas Minimum Maximum Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a Be f Ext Dir a Pos Ne f Ext HF 3 C intck Ld The Levels Crossings and
55. Eye Boundaries of RZ Eye Window Off Clicking the Off radio button stops running the test The Eye Window which has a red color disappears The Eye Boundaries provide the time boundaries within which signal parameters for eye diagrams are measured 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 75 Menu Measurements Results The instrument displays the results of eye diagram measurements in the Measurement Area of the GUI These values are displayed on tabs Current Total Meas Minima Maximum 5 GBits 2065 2507 GBits 25 Bits An example of the Eye Diagram Measure tab The tabs only appear as the selected measurements are performed For example if you perform a Bit Rate measurement on channel 1 only this tab will appear on the display The measurement database and the graticule display will clear when you perform the following events Switch between operating modes in the Display menu Change vertical and horizontal scale and position e Click on the Clear Display button The Eye Diagram Measure tab displays a maximum of four measurements at one time The measurements are listed in the order in which they were performed The Measure tab displays the following measurement statistics for each measurement Current the current value measured in the measurement database Total Meas the total number of acquired measurement cycles Minimum the minimum current value measured in the measurement databa
56. Harriz Kalser Dezz el The window type defines the bandwidth and shape of the equivalent filter associated with the FFT processing The PicoScope 9000 provides a rectangular FFT window which does not taper the time domain data and five tapering FFT windows of different shapes The six supported FFT window functions are Rectangular window Hamming window Hann window Flattop window Blackman Harris window Kaiser Bessel window Remember that windows work by weighting points in the middle of the waveform record higher than those at the ends of the record Each time domain FFT windowing function corresponds to a filter in the frequency domain Each frequency domain filter has a high central lobe or passband whose width determines how well adjacent frequency components can be resolved The height of the side lobes surrounding the central lobe determines how much leakage can occur Equations for the FFT Windows Four windows used in the PicoScope 9000 Hamming Hann Flattop and Blackman Harris are derived from a cosine series The window type is obtained by substituting the correct coefficients for the cosine terms into the following equation Pre gt la cosl Z 32 5 where n is the window data area a is the array of window coefficients N is the window length m is the window order is the index to the window coefficient array and n is the index to the window data array n 0 to N 1 The table
57. Jitter P p Fall Jv Jitter P p Rise T Jitter RMS Fall jw Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Con t off Est HF DELTA DELAY a Els Ej T e P ue f Int Clk Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics TA Ce Ext Dit ls Pos C Mec RZ Jitter P p Rise and RZ Jitter RMS Rise definition To compute jitter peak to peak the standard deviation is measured at a 50 level of the left measurable rising edge The measurement window is kept extremely small so that the width at the 50 level is not influenced by the slope of the waveform The histograms are then analysed to determine the amount of RMS jitter which is defined as lo standard deviation from the histogram mean The RZ peak to peak jitter is the full width of the histogram at the eye 50 level RZ Jitter P p Rise 60 crossing The RZ RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation from the histogram mean at the eye crossing point RZ Jitter RMS Rise 16 crossing 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 129 241 9 ps9000 en Menu RZ Negative Crossing RZ Negative Crossing is a measure of the time of a negative crossing defined as the mean of the histogram of the data sampled at the 50 reference level Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display
58. LIMIT variables 183 Window Limits control 182 IEC 61010 1 2001 5 IEEE measurement points 300 Infinite persistence 49 Initialization 327 Input range maximum 4 INTERNAL RATE variable 359 Interval Trigger 395 ITU G 703 masks list 207 K Kaiser Bessel window 166 175 L LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN variables 313 LEFT MARGIN variable 308 Left Threshold and Right Threshold menus 308 Legal information 6 Liability 6 Limit Test 16 Line voltages 4 Load button 324 Low Voltage Directive 5 LOWER THRESHOLD variable 160 M M1 POSITION and M2 POSITION variables 194 M1 Source and M2 Source menus 193 Main Menu 198 Mains voltages 4 Margins menu 307 Margins Mode menu 307 Marker menu 187 Motion control 195 Reference control 196 Set Reference button 197 specifications 15 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 420 Type controls 190 Mask Alignment option 204 Margins control 203 Mask Test 18 menu 199 Run Until menu 232 Select Action menu 233 Test option 231 Mathematics 17 CONSTANT variable 239 Display menu 236 menu 234 Operand menus 239 Operator menu 237 Select menu 236 SMOOTH LENGTH variable Maximum input range 4 Measure Display menu menu 241 Source menu 246 specifications 16 X Frequency parameter X Parameters menu 247 X Period parameter 248 Method menu 303 Minimum PC requirements 3 Mission critical applications 6 Multi valued signal mode 24 N Negative Crossing para
59. M1 M4 display memories To save current front panel setups for later recall if Waveform File O Database File File Mame Manual C Auto Load from Disk o Memory emi C M3 ma Uma To save or recall your acquired waveforms to or from the M1 M4 waveform Recall Setup Recall Factory ps9000 en 317 5 13 1 5 13 2 5 13 3 ps9000 en Menu Waveform Memory Waveform Memory hii TE Dm P ms The instrument allows you to save your acquired waveforms to any of the instrument s internal drives You can recall these waveforms at a later time and display them on the instrument s display screen The Waveform Memory allows you to save or recall a waveform into one of the waveform memories M1 M4 intended for display When you recall a waveform from memory it is displayed in the default color for that memory number However you can change the default color in the Display Color menu The default colors are Mi red M2 yellow gray M3 violet M4 gray The waveform memories are non volatile so the data is not lost if you turn off the power or set the instrument to the default settings The M1 M4 memories contain a single waveform record including the horizontal and vertical scaling parameters Therefore you can make parametric measurements on stored waveforms or use them as operands in a function You can also recall the waveform for future comparison or analysis save it to disk or
60. Menu Operator _ Misa can select any of the math functions as a math operator to act on the operand or operands To see the resultant waveform click the j Operator drop down list box and than select a function Subtract Multiply A waveform math operator is a math function that requires either one or Divide two sources The operators that involve two waveform sources are Add ae Subtract Multiply and Divide Exponent el Exponent 10 The operators that involve one waveform source are Invert Absolute Logarithm e Exponent e Exponent 10 Logarithm e Logarithm 10 Logarithm 10 Differentiate Integrate Inverse FFT Int erpolation Linear Int Differentiate erpolation Sin x x Smoothing and Trend Integrate Inverse FFT Int Linear Int Sint Smoothing Trend Descriptions of all the math operators Add Adds point by point operand 1 and operand 2 voltage values You can use Add to look at the common mode component of differential waveforms Subtract Subtracts point by point operand 2 from operand 1 You can use Subtract to make a differential measurement or to compare two waveforms Multiply Multiplies point by point operand 1 and operand 2 Use Multiply to make electrical power measurements Divide Divides point by point operand 1 by operand 2 voltage values You can use Divide to measure the ratio of any two signals for example the output voltage divided by the input voltage o
61. Parameters Parameters Timing Parameters Amplitude Paramete Period 7 Maximum TF Frequency FF Minimum Pos Width Peak Peak Neg Width Top Rise Time TM Base Fall Time Amplitude Fos Duty Cycle T middle Neg Duty Cycle Ml iissr Pos Crossing T de RMS Neg Crossing Burst Width Cycles FM Timegthtaximum Timegehtinimurm Mises Cycle ac RMS I Pos Jitter RMS Cycle Ares I Neg Jitter p p Pos Overshoot T Meg Jitter RMS Neg Overshoot C Parameters Statistics acRMs Area Cycle Mean Cycle de RMS 242 FT Parameters Measure Wal Chan Parameter FFT Freq Parameter FFT Freq FFT dFreq Timing Parameters If Delay 1R 1F Delay 1R 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1R nR Delay 1R nF Delay 1F nF Delay 1F nF Phase Deg Phase Rad Phase FFT Magnitude Para FFT Magnit FFT dhtagnit THD PEAK LEFT W Gain Gain dB efine Param efine Thresholds i Percent vertical Unit Division atistics Statistics Histogram C Min Mane User Defined UPPER THRESHOLD MIDDLE THRESHOLE LOWER THRESHOL z 10 50 90 C 20 50 80 C User Defined 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved argins FT Define Param ESA Method Waveform f Harmonic Marker f Peak LEFT MARGIN LEFT MARGIN Left Threshold
62. RZ Eye Parameters includes seventeen eye parameters A RZ Eye Paramete Area Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye width 36 Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing You can perform up to four simultaneous measurements on one displayed waveform The measurement algorithms for X RZ Eye Parameters will only work when an RZ eye diagram and not an NRZ eye diagram or a pulse Is present on the screen Eye measurements are based on statistical data that is acquired and stored in the measurement database The algorithms are dependent upon histogram means calculated from the measurement database Therefore if you want to perform eye measurements you must first produce an eye diagram by triggering the instrument with a synchronous clock signal Measurements made on an NRZ eye diagram or a pulse waveform while in the X RZ Eye Parameters menu will fail Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rize Time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 7 1 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved RZ Area RZ Area is a measure of the area under the curve for the RZ waveform within the full display window Area measured above ground Is positive area measured below ground is negative The RZ Area is determined as follows Ag 2 Re Area a gt FertPas s
63. Recall Mask Dialog You can recall a saved mask from any drive on the computer Saved masks have the extension pcm Save User Mask SAVE Clicking the Save User Mask button recalls the Windows Save Mask As Dialog You can save the mask to any drive on the computer Saved masks have the extension pcm 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 230 5 9 1 7 Save Mask as Std Clicking the Save Mask as Std button recalls the Windows Save Mask As Standard Eye Mask dialog Save Mask As Standard Eye Mask xp Mask Parameterz Mask Hame File Hame Noname Bit hate 1024 00 Mbps Margins Enable Select Standard SONET SDH ee HE Cancel Windows Save Mask As Standard Eye Mask Dialog To save the mask as a standard mask enter all needed information in the dialog then click OK 5 9 2 Erase Mask The Erase Mask function located on the first page of the Mask Test menu allows you to erase the mask that is under test To erase the mask click the Erase Mask button You will see the screen without the deleted mask 5 9 3 Compare with The Compare with menu determines which waveform the masks are compared against You can select from channel 1 or channel 2 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 231 5 9 4 ps9000 en Menu Test After selecting a mask you can enable mask counting and see the results of th
64. Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo E e E Print About 501 e E Persistence External Direct Time Base sample Time Base Unite Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate 51 8400 Mbs ALS Eye Diagram I Tai ye Parameters Area Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye idth Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise T Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise 4 Neg Crossing Iw Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Crossing ent Total Meas Dual Delayed ay Con t amp off cho EA 66 62 paveliy Et Dir e pos C Meg Ext HF BELT DELA y Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics 20 RZ Negative Crossing definition The RZ Negative Crossing is determined as follows RZ Negative Crossing TCrossNeg where TCrossNeg is the mean of the histogram of a negative crossing This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement systemto use a waveform database if available O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 130 5 4 7 10 RZ Positive Crossing e Pos Crossing RZ Positive Crossing is a measure of the time of a left positive crossing defined as the mean of the histogram of the data sampled at the 50 reference level
65. SCALE A F Delay 1F nR 5 medi Delay 1F nF FRES Phaze De sE i 1 nsii ase Ra TT Phase DELAY a E ETEM Paramete Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed H 16450 1 201ns 1323918 127ns j Con Fot Gain dB Back 5 meldiv m E f Pos O Meg BELT 4 DELAY a a a aie a os crock MOR ll Example of Delay measurement between the first rising edge on the reference source and the first rising edge on the second source The Margins menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Delay value will be performed only inside these margins The Delay value is affected by the Define Param 2 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 296 5 11 5 3 Phase e Phase Deg e Phase Rad e Phase Phase is the amount by which a waveform leads or lags another in time It is defined between the first rising edge on the reference source and the first rising edge on the second source The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Phase is determined as follows FTorosse
66. SaveRecall Marker FFT Measure Limit Test Mathematics Utility Trigger Acquisition Display Trigger Acquisition Save Recall Marker Zoom Mask Test TDR TDT Advance O Converter Zoom Mask Test TDR TDT Advance Histogram Eye Diagram Option Histogram Eye Diagram Option Channel 1 is superimposed on top Channel 2 is superimposed on top 5 3 7 4 TRANSPARENCY TRANSPARENCE You can change the transparency of several display elements selected from the Item menu They are Histogram Mask The TRANSPARENCY control increases or decreases the transparency effect t Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz lol xj Clear Display I Run Stop Single utoscale Detaut Setup Undo Print About 2 zr 25 als 1 2 ers ice xte Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz o loj xj Clear Display I Run Stop Single utoscale Detaut Setup Undo Print About 12 GHz 25 GSa 25 Pe ce xte eci Channels 4 Display Channels 4 i Display l Channel 1 Color Channel 1 Color 7 item item Hist fe chi Ch2 Hist Ad Ec E Set colr fe On Off Set On Top gitar eee Set On Top TRANSPARENCE TRANSPARENCE rel mS me EA Default Colors Default Colors Current Color Grade Scale Color Grade Scale Back More Back
67. Select the function you want to define F1 to F4 Select the operator and source s you want to use in the function If the sources you have selected are active the scope is triggered and you will see the display update as you configure the function When a function is calculated it can be displayed on the screen evaluated with the PicoScope 9000 measurement features stored in memory or to disk or used as the source for another function All math operators such as invert subtract multiply and divide are post processing algorithms so functions are calculated only after their sources have been acquired All waveform math functions operate on waveform data which is on the display Math operators allow vertical and horizontal scaling of the displayed function See the Zoom menu for details ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 236 5 10 1 Select F1 amp F3 ss The Select menu allows you to select function F1 to F4 Clicking the F1 F4 options selects one of the functions assigns the function soft keys to the selected function 5 10 2 Display E on O Off Clicking the On Off options turns the display for the selection on or off e changes the label from on to off or vice versa E You can display all four functions on the screen at the same time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 237 5 10 3 ps9000 en
68. Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 149 5 4 8 11 ps9000 en Menu RZ Noise P p One and RZ Noise mE Zero RZ Noise P p One is a measure of the maximum range of the data distribution sampled within a fixed RZ Eye Boundaries slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the One Level RZ Noise P p Zero is a measure of the maximum range of the data distribution Sampled within a fixed RZ Eye Boundaries slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the Zero Level Pico rechoelaag PicoScope 9000 PC Sami Oscilloscope 12 GHz a Ol xj E Print Help Eye Diagram als 12 GHz 1 493 TSalz Persistence External HF Time Base Sample ve Parameters Time Base i Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate Js A400 Wiis Main Intensified e Delayed SCALE A Y RZ Eye Paramete I AC RMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max Mean hic Min Iw Noise P p One Iw Moise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY fos Ext Dir g Pos t Hed f Ext HF 1485 pe E E Int Clk 50 3 RZ Noise P p One and RZ Noise P p Zero definition The RZ Noise P p
69. Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 357 Menu Triggering process Oscilloscopes respond to trigger signals in different ways depending on their architecture The PicoScope 9000 uses digital sampling oscilloscope technology to acquire and display wide bandwidth waveforms This type of instrument employs a triggering scheme referred to as equivalent time sampling The trigger circuit and sampler circuits operate in parallel The sampler samples the input signal at a specific rate The trigger circuit operates independently of the sampler circuit and a trigger event does not have to occur at the same time as a sample point Because the instrument knows when the trigger event happened in relation to the sampled data it knows where to place the sampled data on the display The triggering scheme is based up the following characteristics e An external trigger signal is required The instrument does not have the ability to synchronize directly to the signal being measured e The instrument must be armed and an input channel must be turned on in order to respond to a trigger Typically the instrument will be armed if it is placed in the Run mode The instrument also becomes armed if it is in Single acquisition mode The single acquisition mode occurs after the instrument is placed into Stop mode Click the Stop Single button repeatedly to toggle the instrument modes between stop and single acquisition e A Significant time delay occurs betwe
70. The Database File is useful for such database signals as eye diagrams and the pulse waveforms for noise and jitter measurements with histograms A histogram can also be saved with this mode You can recall saved database files at a later time display them on the instrument s screen with different display styles and perform histogram measurements and mask tests Source The Source menu allows you to choose the source of the waveform you intend to save to disk You can choose between channels functions spectrums and memories as the waveform source File Name f Manual f Auto The File Name menu sets how the oscilloscope creates the name of the file The PicoScope 9000 uses two modes Manual Auto Manual You enter the file name from the keyboard of the PC Auto 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 320 In this mode full information the file name consists of a base name a file number and one underline between them The length of file name is unlimited while the file number must have five digits The last digit in the file name is sequential For example the instrument can assign the file name abc_xxxxx cgs where xxxxx is a number from 1 to 99999 Each time you save a waveform the number in the file name is automatically incremented by one or by whatever is necessary to reach the next unused number This ensures that the waveform will always be saved to a new file and prote
71. The Stop Single 3 button The Autoscale button The Default Setup 3 button The Undo button The Copy button The Printi button The Helpl3 button ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 332 5 14 1 Clear Display Clear Display Clicking the Clear Display button erases all channel waveform data from the graticule area The following occurs when the display graticule is cleared e All channel waveform data is erased from the graticule area Functions spectrums and waveform memories are not erased from the display graticule when the clear display feature is executed All associated measurements and measurement statistics are reset averaging color grading mask test data limit test data and histogram results if enabled When the instrument is running If the instrument is running and is receiving triggers new waveform data is displayed on the next acquisition averaging is reset and persistence and color grading histograms the mask testing database and all measurements are recalculated When the instrument is stopped If the instrument is stopped the display remains cleared of waveform data until the trigger circuit is rearmed and the instrument is triggered Then the new data Is displayed and measurements are recalculated 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 333 Menu ps9000 en The Run button causes the instrum
72. The acquisition menu allows you to modify the way the instrument acquires the data from the input waveform by selecting the number of averages or envelopes detection interval and record length Two types of waveforms can be selected for acquiring single valued waveforms or multi valued waveforms Acquisition readout and icons The Acquisition readout at the top left of the display shows the state of the acquisition system ea oa Acquisition readout It shows the following data Equivalent sample rate for each of the channels If the Average mode is selected it shows the number of averages Avg N XXX e If the Envelope mode is selected it shows the number of acquisitions Env XXX The Acquisition icon at the top right of the display shows the type of waveform that is selected for acquiring The E icon shows acquisition for single valued waveforms when digital feedback is used The e icon shows acquisition for multi valued waveforms when digital feedback is not used 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 23 ps9000 en Menu System controls You can control the acquisition process at any time by clicking on of the System Controls buttons Run Stop Single or Clear Display For more details see System Controls Using the System Controls you control whether the oscilloscope is running or stopped The Run button ME causes the instrument to resume acquiri
73. a minimum rate equal to twice the input signal frequency for accurate representation Signals sampled at a rate lower than this minimum the Nyquist Rate will show up as low frequency signals due to insufficient sample points Such a signal is called an alias The phenomenon is called aliasing Alias frequency A false lower frequency component that appears in analog data that is reconstructed from original data digitized at an insufficiently high sampling rate Aliasing An invalid low frequency waveform a false representation of a signal or an aliased waveform may be displayed by a digitising scope if a high frequency waveform is sampled at too low a sample rate The waveform displayed on the oscilloscope may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Aliasing is a condition that occurs when an oscilloscope digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal A waveform is aliased when it is sampled at a frequency that is less than two times the highest frequency component of the waveform For the best waveform fidelity the sample rate should be at least four times the highest frequency component of the waveform Alternate Mode A display mode of operation in which the oscilloscope completes tracing one channel before beginning to trace another channel Amplitude 1 The magnitude of a quantity or strength of a signal In electronics amplitude usually refers to either voltage or power
74. a narrow portion of voltage and observing a horizontal histogram that measures the jitter on an edge 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 177 ps9000 en Menu When the histogram is turned on the instrument begins to build its measurement database Then the following events occur e The histogram is displayed as a series of lines on the display graticule e The histogram data is analysed e The results of the histogram are displayed on the Measurement Area of the display The histogram is displayed as a series of horizontal or vertical lines depending on the axis selected in the Axis menu Each line is the width of one pixel on the display graticule Each line is carefully positioned on the display graticule within the histogram window and appears above the waveforms Therefore the source waveform may not be viewed through the histogram waveform The measurement database continues to build until the instrument stops acquiring data or the histogram The measurement database Is active in the persistence display style or color graded display style To avoid erroneous data reset the measurement database by pressing the Clear Display button Changing the vertical scale offset time base scale delay and trigger settings will not reset the measurement database Histogram measurement results You will see the histogram statistics listed in the Measurement Area of the GUI These values are displayed on tabs
75. allowable full scale signal input or output that yields a Specified performance level Real Time Sampling A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope collects as many samples as it can as the Signal occurs In real time sampling mode all the data points that make up a waveform come from a single trigger event unless you have enabled averaging The real time Sampling mode is typically used on events that occur either once or infrequently to Capture single shot or transient events Recall Setup or Load Setup Recall Setup is a quick and easy way to reconfigure the scope to a previous configuration The scope s configuration or setup includes timebase scale s div position vertical scale V div offset trigger source and level as well as all the other settings Reconstruction Reconstruction sometimes called interpolation fills in information between acquired Sample points using digital signal processing techniques Join the dots involves a simple linear interpolation while reconstruction usually refers to more advanced techniques such as sin x filters that will increase the resolution accuracy and repeatability of time interval measurements Record Length Record length is the number of waveform samples stored in the waveform memory The greater the memory depth the greater the amount of sampled data that is available for analysis or measurements Increasing the memory depth decreases the display update rate This is cal
76. and PC are properly earth grounded to prevent build up of static charge Repair of damage due to misuse is not covered under the warranty The Channels menu allows you to set all controls for vertical setups of all live channel hannel 1 hannel 1 cont waveforms Channels Channels Ch f cha button of the main menu The controls for each channel are Independent When you select the Channels menu either the SCALE OFFSET DESKEW or ATTENUATION control is highlighted in the Same color as the selected channel indicating that the function is active 2cquire Gn of External Scale Sie C Narrow f vol O watt Ampere C Unknown DESKEVY At Acc ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 36 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 Channel Select Many of the controls of the PicoScope 9000 especially the channel controls operate on the selected channel The instrument applies all actions that only affect one channel at a time such as applying changes to the vertical control settings to the selected channel Clicking the Ch1 or the Ch2 radio buttons Toggles it between channels 1 and 2 Assigns the function keys to the selected channel Channel Display on off There are two ways to add selected channels to the display and remove them again e Use the On or Off radio buttons on the Channels Display menu Use t
77. architecture a window refers to the magnified section of a lower resolution main waveform The window waveform is acquired with a smaller equivalent time sample interval than the main waveform Window Functions Used to modify the spectrum of a truncated waveform prior to Fourier analysis Alternately window functions determine the selectivity filter shape in a Fourier transform spectrum analyzer 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 417 6 24 6 25 6 26 ps9000 en Glossary Windows OS The underlying operating system on which this instrument runs X XY Display Mode XY is a display mode that converts the scope from a volts versus time display to a volts versus volts display of two input channels functions or waveform memories The XY display plots the voltage values of two inputs with one input s voltage values displayed horizontally and the second input s voltage values plotted vertically This is a useful display mode for evaluating phase relations between two waveforms XY format A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records point by point It is useful for studying phase relationships between two waveforms Y YT format The conventional oscilloscope display format It shows the voltage of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis Z Z axis Another name for the brightness of the trace at a given location Zero
78. automatically set the measurement systemto use a waveform database if available ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 6 12 NRZ Noise RMS One and NRZ Noise RMS Zero 108 NRZ Noise RMS is a measurement of the unit standard deviation of the amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High logical 1 or Low logical 0 levels Pico Techn aug PicoScope 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz Eye Diagram ve Parameters Y MRS Eye Paramet DT AC RMS Avg Power FF Avg Power der FF Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Max Mean T mid F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Iw Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level DA T paidiv Ext Dir Pos Neg z ae f Ext HF TEN Int Clk 50 Print Help Time Base O x i Bit Period Bit Rate E A400 Wiis z blode i Main C Intensified e Delayed Dual Delayed Con t Off DELTA DELAY os NRZ Noise RMS One definition 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 109 Menu Pico Technology Pic
79. built in information system on the instrument This changes the pointer into a context sensitive help icon like this Pi You can then click any control to open the manual at the relevant page Right click it to open the PicoScope 9000 Help manual or the About and Instrument Info windows 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 343 5 15 ps9000 en Menu Time Base Menu The Time Base menu allows you to control the horizontal display through the Main Intensified Delayed or Dual Delayed timebases and through the TIME DIV and DELAY functions Time Base The common timebase parameters specify a common horizontal acquisition window that is applied to both channels in parallel These parameters are Time Base tf Time Bit Period Bit kate 51 8400 Wbs Main Intensified f Delayed e The trigger signal that you input and set the trigger system to recognize determines the point relative to the input waveform that triggers the oscilloscope The horizontal position you set determines the horizontal delay from the trigger point to the first sample point in the acquisition window The horizontal scale you set and the requirement that all waveforms fit within the 10 horizontal division display determines the horizontal duration of the window relative to any waveform allowing you to scale it to contain a waveform edge a cycle or several cycles The record length along wi
80. change the scale unit value to read watts the unit value of the signal at the diode input e The maximum and minimum vertical scale settings change by a factor specified by the attenuation value entered Offset minimum and maximum values change by a factor specified by the attenuation value entered O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 45 Menu 5 2 11 Attenuation Units You can enter attenuation or gain characteristics of an external device when configuring a channel for external scaling The Attenuation Units function lets you select how you want the attenuation factor represented Click the Ratio or Decibel radio buttons to choose either ratio or decibel The formula for calculating decibels is 20 log Vout Vin or 10 log Pout Pin Decibels versus voltage ratio dB Voltage Ratio 3 dB 1 41 6 dB 2 00 10 dB 3 16 20 dB 10 40 dB 100 60 dB 1000 120 dB 1 000 000 80 dB 0 0001 Changing the channel attenuation factor does not attenuate the input signal it only changes the database for generating prompts on the display and calculating the results of the automated waveform measurements If the input signal must be attenuated use external attenuators External gain is implied when you enter negative decibel values or ratios of less than 1 1 in the ATTENUATION variable The default attenuation value Is 1 1 ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 46
81. channel to channel skew measurement by placing the XM1 marker on one channel and the XM2 marker on another channel Manual Y Markers The M1 POSITION variable moves the YM1 marker vertically and the M2 POSITION variable moves the YM2 marker vertically The position of each marker is displayed in the same color as the markers You can make voltage measurements on the signal by placing the Y markers on the Signal The difference between the markers is the voltage measurement or dYM dYM YM2 YM1 If YM1 is more positive than YM2 dYM will be a negative number You can also make a Channel to channel voltage measurement by placing the YM1 marker on one channel and the YM2 marker on another channel Waveform XY Markers The X marker is controlled by the MI POSITION variable and the marker is controlled by the M2 POSITION variable The position of each marker is displayed in the same color as the markers Each XY marker has an YM position and XM position Vertical measurements are made with the YM positions and dYM is the difference between the YM positions see dYM YM2 YM1 Timing measurements are made with the XM positions and dXM is the difference between the XM positions see dXM XM2 XM1 Notice 1 dXM If you are using the markers to measure the period of a signal then 1 dXM is the frequency of the signal Also notice dAYM dXM If you are measuring such parameters as the rise or fall of an impulse with the XY markers
82. coax 155 52 Mbps F karans U2 Alignment Jk Cancel The list of industry standard electrical ANSI T1 102 masks 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 209 Menu 5 9 1 1 8 Other Masks Uther Clicking Other opens the list of two additional industry standard Any of these masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveform to a specific industry Standard listed above ANSI 71 102 Ethernet Fiber Channel ITU G 703 Uther SONET SDH lnfiniB and 2 5 Gbps A LI E Far 3 125 Gbps AUIE Near 3 125 Gbps F karans Ol Alignment DOF Cancel The list of other industry standard masks ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 210 5 9 1 2 User defined Masks The Mask Test menu contains a mask editing feature that allows you to create your own masks These masks may be created using one of three methods By using a reference waveform method Automask Masks are constructed by adding a DELTA X and DELTA Y tolerance around a reference waveform This method is simple to use though not as flexible as the polygon method By using a polygon method for creating a unique new mask Using this method polygons are created to mask off failure regions of the graticule Up to eight polygons can be positioned in the graticule area each with 3 to 512 sides Very complex masks can be constructed by placing polygons within polygons Similar to
83. dB and Hz for FFT functions Mask A form of waveshape limit test that defines a maximum deviation equal to a uniform tolerance on each measured point in a waveform A mask template consists of numbered shaded regions on the instrument display screen The input waveform must remain within these regions in order to comply with industry standards The waveforms that intrude into these regions are mask violations Mask Test A test process used to verify that waveforms generated by a test device conform to industry standards Mathematics The mathematics functions are mathematical operations such as Add Subtract Multiply and Integrate that can be performed on input waveforms stored waveform memories or even other functions There are four functions F1 to F4 which can be set up in the MATHEMATICS 24 menu When the function is set up and turned on a post processing calculation is done and the resulting waveform is displayed Math Waveform A waveform defined by a combination of one or more operands channel waveforms reference waveforms and automatic measurement scalars Math waveforms may also contain math operators and functions Maximum Amplitude voltage measurement of the maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Maximum Input Voltage The maximum voltage that can be applied to an input channel without damaging the input circuitry Mean Amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean
84. does not affect waveforms saved in memories or waveform functions You can move the trace of the selected channel up or down in one of four ways Use the OFFSET spin box Use the Ch1 and Ch2 offset spin boxes of the Permanent Controls Area Use the Pop up Keypad 2 for some specific settings Use a channel Ground Reference Indicator If fine mode is off the offset can be changed in 25 mV steps When fine mode Is on you can change the offset in 1 mV steps The OFFSET changes automatically if the attenuation factor is changed The units the offset voltage is displayed in depend on the unit of measure selected with the Scale menu The choices for units are volts watts amperes or unknown The OFFSET changes automatically if the display graticule mode single dual or quad or the attenuation factor is changed Each channel has a channel Ground Reference Indicator located to the left of the graticule area The Ground Reference Indicator shows you where zero volts is for each channel O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 41 5 2 6 ps9000 en Menu Channel Bandwidth Full C Narrow Bandwidth is the range of frequencies that an oscilloscope can acquire and display accurately that is with less than 3 dB attenuation You can use the Bandwidth function to select either full or narrow bandwidth The channel bandwidth setting affects the width of the sampling pulse used by the instrument The
85. en Menu PERSISTENCE TIME REFRESH TIME PERSISTENCE TIME PERSISTENCE TIME The PERSISTENCE TIME variable works when the Variable Persistence display is selected in the Style 4 menu Persistence time is the amount of time for which a waveform sample appears on the display In the Variable Persistence display style a waveform sample point is displayed from 100 ms to 20 s The default setting is 2 s This mode most closely simulates the phosphorescent persistence of an analog scope Use variable persistence to view infrequent events and rapidly changing waveforms and watch the evolution of the waveform REFRESH TIME The REFRESH TIME variable works with both the Variable Gray Scaling and the Variable Color Grading display styles Refresh time is a control of how often the screen is updated with new data The range for refresh time is 1 to 200 s Reset All Click the Reset All button to return all traces setups to their default persistence settings Screen The Screen button gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to define the display area in different ways 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 60 5 3 6 1 Format ON TAR E Dual YT 4 The Format menu determines how the instrument draws the waveforms on the display Six formats are used in the PicoScope 9000 YT The YT format is the normal time on the horizontal axis versus voltage on
86. excellent troubleshooting aid for finding cross talk problems finding distortion problems in analog waveforms caused by non linear amplifiers adjusting filter circuits designed to filter out certain harmonics in a waveform testing impulse responses of systems identifying and locating noise and interference sources The FFT display shows the amplitude for each frequency component in your waveform on the vertical axis and frequency on the horizontal axis The figure below illustrates what an FFT does The FFT transforms a time record of N samples into a frequency record of N points from O Hz to Fs where Fs is the sampling frequency The resolution or the spacing between the points in the frequency record is Fs N 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 163 ps9000 en Menu a Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display StopSingle Auto cale Setup Unda E Print About Sectors External Direct HORIZ SCALE 5 nsidiv m ol Pos Neg rors C int ck IC The 1 GHz sine wave signal shown in both the Time Domain and the Frequency Domain The frequency Fs 2 is a unique frequency referred to as the Nyquist frequency At the Nyquist frequency there are exactly two samples on every cycle of the input signal Signals above the Nyquist frequency become aliased which means that they appear as signals of a lower frequency because there are not
87. eye are first located Then a vertically thin measurement window is placed horizontally through the crossing points The data within this measurement window is analysed This measurement window is created to be extremely small so that the width of the crossing points is not affected by the rise time and fall time of the waveform Once the bit period has been determined the inverse value is calculated to determine the bit rate NRZ Bit Rate 1 Bit Time Also see NRZ Bit Time 80 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 80 5 4 5 3 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved NRZ Bit Time NRZ Bit Time is a measure of the horizontal opening of an eye diagram at the crossing points of the eye Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display un StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Eye Diagram e a E eE ae Time Base ve Parameters Time Base A NRZ Eve Paramet Units E Area f Time Bit Rate Bit Period fw Bit Time Fersistence External Direct Bit kate Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycDist Js A400 Wiis Mode Main O Intensified F DutCyeDist s f Delayed Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time 67 pedi DELA gt E Dual Delayed Minima
88. eye boundary while EYE BOUNDARY 2 allows you to set the percentage time for the right eye boundary ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 160 5 4 11 2 Thresholds 5 4 11 3 10 30 C 2056 80 0 User Defined The Thresholds menu sets the upper middle and lower measurement points that the eye diagram measurements use for calculating the timing measurement results For example rise time is measured from the lower threshold to the upper threshold while a RZ Pulse Width measurement is made between two middle thresholds Thresholds are not visible The three threshold choices are the standard measurement points 10 90 e 20 80 User Defined The UPPER THRESHOLD and LOWER THRESHOLD variables are displayed when User Defined is selected Middle threshold is fixed at the 50 level 10 90 and 20 80 These are two standard pulse measurement thresholds for all measurements These Standard thresholds are calculated as a percentage of the One Zero Level value while the One Level and Zero Level values are calculated from the eye diagram that is on the display 10 90 means Lower threshold 10 Upper threshold 90 Use these thresholds for typical eye diagrams 20 80 means Lower threshold 20 Upper threshold 80 Use these thresholds for eye diagrams with excessive ringing or overshoot Make sure that the eye diagram is expanded vertically and horiz
89. increase the system sample rate An example is the use of two transient recorders with inputs in parallel but complementary clocks to allow operation at twice the maximum rate of a single unit Internal clock A trigger source that is synchronized to the internal clock with a selectable repetition rate It is most often used with TDR to synchronize the generation of TDR step pulses with subsequent acquisition Interpolation Signal Processing Generally speaking a connect the dots processing technique to estimate what a fast waveform looks like based on only a few sampled points More specifically Interpolation refers to the way the oscilloscope calculates values for record points when the oscilloscope cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single trigger event That condition occurs when the oscilloscope is limited to real time sampling and the timebase is set to a value that exceeds the effective sample rate of the oscilloscope The oscilloscope can have two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Integrate The capability of an oscilloscope to display an integral math waveform The integral math waveform is computed from
90. is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among other peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 20 and RIGHT MARGIN 3 variables When the Peak is selected in the Method 30 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 313 variable You can choose a peak by using the PEAK 1 and PEAK 2 variables in the Define param menu FFT Magnitude The FFT Magnitude measures the magnitude value of a peak in the FFT spectrum as defined by the Define param 3 menu When the Harmonic is selected in the Methodl3 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among another peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 3 and RIGHT MARGIN 3 variables When the Peak is selected in the Method 3 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 313 variable You can choose a peak by using the PEAK 1 variable in the Define param 2 menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 311 5 11 7 4 5 11 7 5 Menu FFT Delta Magnitude The FFT Delta Magnitude measures the magnitude difference between two peaks in the FFT spectrum as defined by peak numbers the Define param 3 menu When the Harmonic is selected in the Method menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among another peaks and located within
91. load it from a disk Source Waveform Memory The Source menu allows you to choose the source of the waveform you intend to save into one of the waveform memories M1 M4 You can choose between channels functions spectrums and memories as the waveform sources Save Waveform Clicking the Save Waveform button copies the selected waveform to one of the selected waveform memories M1 M4 Save Waveform saves only the current acquired data from the signal Therefore the recalled waveform will be displayed as a single trace This method of saving the waveform is not the preferred process if you want to save a waveform that is using the measurement database for example saving a persistence or color graded trace or an eye diagram and you want to recall the entire waveform Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform or an active waveform memory Display the waveform in the timebase with which you want to Save it 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 318 5 13 4 to Memory Clicking to Memory selects which of the available waveform memory locations the instrument saves the waveform to When a waveform is saved to a memory it overwrites any data that was previously stored in that memory If the Waveform Memory menu for that memory is on then the display is also updated 5 13 5 Disk The D
92. margin testing discussed above this method allows testing of waveform failure rates to varying tolerances because failures are listed individually for each polygon By using a polygon method for modifying an existing mask This method involves the use of a reference waveform 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 211 Menu 5 9 1 3 Automask Clicking the Automask button opens a menu for using the reference waveform method An example of the method for a noisy impulse is shown in the figure below Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz 5 i Oo xj Clear Display Run Default Setup Undo I Copy ae Print Help StopSingle Auto cale GHz as Persistence Mask Test z z le aie External Direct Time Base Time Base f Time Bit Period Bit kate st S400 Wiis bode i Main C Intensified ir Delayed E Divizion Current Build Sutomask Dual Delayed ie Off DELTA DELAY os om cil ra a A A Dr we AS C AID E pz Prescaler dis Bl aie h ar O ntck oy D An example of Automask for a noisy impulse 5 9 1 3 1 Source C gt The Source function selects the channel function memory or spectrum that the mask is scaled to 5 9 1 3 2 Units The Units function allows you to define DELTA X and DELTA Y in divisions or current source settings Cu
93. menu 5 17 2 Scaling Clicking the Scaling button opens a second level menu that let you control vertical and horizontal magnification and positioning without affecting the channels and timebase scaling controls 5 17 2 1 Vertical Scale Type Vertical ScaleType The Vertical Scale Type menu allows you to set the scale of the vertical display Vertical units can be either linear or logarithmic Linear Sets the display to the current source value Usually this is volts but it may also be watts or amperes Logarithmic Sets the display of the results to dB Use the VERT POSITION 36 to set what vertical position in the magnitude spectrum will be zero dB The following equation applies dB 20log E 10 a where X is a complex data point in the spectrum and Xref is the reference value equal to 1 V ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 368 5 17 2 2 5 17 2 3 5 17 2 4 VERTICAL SCALE WERTICAL SCALE Magnitude The VERTICAL SCALE function uses software expansion to set the vertical scaling of the selected waveform lt does not affect the hardware settings in the instrument only the appearance of the waveform The scaling units are mV per division or dB per division For example if the vertical scale is set to 10 dB div and a peak Is two divisions high you know that the amplitude of the frequency peak is 20 dB When scaling is set to O dBV the di
94. moving the waveform up on the display Likewise applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up moving the waveform down on the display Set the vertical offset to display the features of interest on your waveform and avoid clipping y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy e Print About Channels 1 121 als External Direct Time Base hannel 1 Time Base chi cha Time 7 Bit Period On Of Persistence Bit kate Js A400 Wiis hi Acquire ff On 200 Ente cli a Ea f Ott Main Intensified Delayed i B E 2 naidi SALE B 2 naidi DELAT fos Dual Delayed Con f Off Kig DESKEN Alt Acq Dz DELTA DELAY fos A 2 nsidiy Ext Dir ep r GD Pos Meg Ext HF os cno MO Sine wave signal with different offsets O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 40 Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped that is the data is limited to the minimum and or maximum boundaries of the vertical acquisition window This limiting can cause inaccuracies in amplitude related measurements The OFFSET control affects the vertical acquisition window for selected Input channel It
95. of correction coefficients for different FFT windows indicates the values to substitute into equation to obtain the various windows 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 169 ps9000 en Correction coefficients for different FFT windows Menu Coefficients RectangularHammin Hann Flattop Blackman Kaiser g Harris Bessel M 0 1 1 2 3 3 a0 1 0 0 543478 0 5 0 281 0 35875 0 40243 al 0 0 0 456522 0 5 0 521 0 48829 0 49804 a2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 198 0 14128 0 09831 a3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01168 0 00122 Highest side lobe 13 dB 43 dB 32 dB 94 dB 69 dB 3 dB Bandwidth in0 89 1 3 1 44 1 92 1 72 bins Scallop loss 3 96 dB 1 78 dB 1 42 dB 0 81 dB 1 02 dB Zero Phase 50 50 50 50 50 Reference For the Rectangular window n 1 The best window for a given application depends on various factors Most measurements require the use of a window such as the Hanning or Flattop windows which are the appropriate windows for typical frequency analysis measurements Choosing between different windows involves a trade off between frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy For harmonic analysis of continuous time signals the best window choice depends on the signal characteristics and on the particular characteristics that are of most interest The use of Blackman Harris Kaiser Bessel Hanning or Hamming windows typically makes harmonics observation easier The rectangular window can be typically used for impulse response testing sin
96. of its center frequency and thus it can be said that there are n 2 frequency bins The distance delta f in Hz between the center frequencies of two neighboring bins is always 1 T where T is the duration of the time domain record in seconds The nominal width of bin is equal to delta f FFT Frequency Range The range of frequencies computed and displayed in an FFT is O Hz to the Nyquist frequency FFT Frequency Resolution In a narrow sense the frequency resolution is equal to the bin width delta f That is if the input signal changes its frequency by delta f the corresponding spectrum peak will be displaced by delta f For smaller changes of frequency only the shape of the peak will change However the effective frequency resolution i e the ability to resolve two signals whose frequencies are almost the same is further limited by the use of window functions The ENBW value of all windows other than the rectangular is greater than delta f i e greater than the bin width FFT Number of Points FFT is computed over the number of points Transform Size whose upper bound is the source number of points FFT generates spectrums having n 2 output points FFT Phase The time comparison in degrees or radians of a signal harmonic and the twiddle factor of the same frequency FFT Windows The FFT window can be set to rectangular Hamming Nicolson Hanning flattop or Blackman Harris A rectangular window is useful for tra
97. other Pixel 1 The fundamental picture element in a digital image 2 The coordinate unit used to define the horizontal location of a pixel in an image Pixel is an acronym for picture element Pigtail A fiber optic cable that has a connector installed on one end Pop up menu A menu that displays when you right click an application element such as a channel or its icon a measurement or other readout Usually provides quick access to settings related to the object clicked Position Position moves the waveform horizontally on the display Real time digitizing scopes allow you to view events that happened before the trigger event A negative position value is time before the trigger event and a positive position value is time after the trigger event Some scopes refer to position as delay In some scopes position also refers to a control that moves the waveform vertically on the Y axis of the display In this series of scopes however vertical movement is controlled by the offset in the Channel 357 menu Positive Duty Cycle A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive Overshoot Amplitude voltage measurement Positive Width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points the rising edge middle reference point default 50 and the falling edge middle reference point default 50 on a positive pulse Posttri
98. pa diw D Ext Dir i Pas FT Neg CAIB Ext HF co MENS moa NRZ Eye Amplitude definition Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the centre of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from the upper and lower halves of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines the mean values of the logic 1 and logic O levels The eye amplitude is determined as follows NRZ Eye Amplitude One Level Zero Level ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 100 5 4 6 5 NRZEye died and NRZ Eye Height dB 4 Eye Height dB NRZ Eye Height is a measurement of the vertical opening of an eye diagram An ideal eye opening would be measured from the one level to the zero level However noise on the eye will cause the eye to close The eye height measurement determines eye closure due to noise Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz a Oj xj Clear Display StopiSingle I Autoscale A Setup Undo I Copy ee Print Help Eye Diagram 1 z 1 49 IS Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y MRZ Eye Paramet f Ti
99. plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed Differentiate Calculates the discrete derivative of the vertical value of the waveform data points of operand 1 You can use Differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed This may be used to measure for example the slew rate of an operational amplifier Integrate Calculates the integral of the vertical values of the waveform data points of operand 1 The results provide the vertical plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed This function can be used to calculate the energy of a pulse in volt seconds or measure the area under a waveform Inverse FFT Calculates the time domain function from its frequency domain data spectrum Linear Interpolation Draws a line between consecutive waveform data points It gives an analog look to a digitized waveform For example you can see steep edges on waveforms such as square waves Sin x x Interpolation Uses a sin x x digital filter that improves the reconstruction of the waveform The reconstruction is done by adding data points between the acquired data points This function improves accuracy of measurements It is important for waveforms that can be bandlimited to of the current equivalent sample rate Smoothing This allows reduction of unwanted noise and jitter on the signal with a simple moving average filter N point smoothing can be don
100. reduces noise until a system limitation of approximately 120 uV RMS is reached 2 mV div to 500 mV div full scale is 8 divisions Adjustable in a 1 2 5 10 sequence Also adjustable in 0 5 fine increments 12 of full vertical scale 2 mV Adjustable from 1 V to 1 V in 25 mV increments coarse Also adjustable in fine increments of 1 mV ps9000 en 11 4 2 ps9000 en ADC Vertical Resolution Maximum operating input voltage Maximum Safe Input Voltage Nominal Input Impedance Input connectors Deskew The difference in delay between channels Attenuation Range Units Scale Channel to channel isolation Timebase Horizontal Timebases Scale Factors Main Timebase Delayed Timebases Delta Time Interval Accuracy Typical Timing Accuracy Variable Delay Time offset relative to trigger Minimum Delay Minimum time offset relative to trigger Display Units Time Interval Resolution Specifications amp Characteristics 16 bits 125 uV LSB without averaging Up to 16 bits with averaging With Digital Feedback 1 V p p at 1 V range Without Digital Feedback 300 mV relative to channel offset 16 dBm or 2 V dc peak ac 50 1 U SMA F Can be nulled out with 1 ps resolution to compensate for differences in input cables or probe length Up to 100 ns of skew can be nulled out Attenuation factors may be entered to scale the oscilloscope for external attenuators connected to t
101. reference source and the first falling edge on the second source e we Delay 1F 1R is the delay between the first falling edge on the reference source and the first rising edge on the second source Jw Delay 1F 1F o Delay 1F 1F is the delay between the first falling edge on the reference source and the first falling edge on the second source e Delay 1R nRis the delay between the first rising edge on the reference source and the last rising edge on the second source mjii Delay 1R nF is the delay between the first rising edge on the reference source and the last falling edge on the second source i Delay 1F nR is the delay between the first falling edge on the reference source and the last rising edge on the second source e Delay 1F nF is the delay between the first falling edge on the reference source and the last falling edge on the second source O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 295 Menu Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy i Print About Measure 12 GHz 10 12 GHz E ectars External Direct Time Base Wal Chan Parameter Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate E A400 Wiis Timing Parameters Iw Delay 1R 1R Delay 1R 1F I E Delay 1F 1R 2 hain Delay 1F 1F z a Delay 1R 0k F Delay 1F nF
102. resistive divider probes you can increase input impedance up to 5 kQ and using an active probe you can increase input impedance up to 10 MQ Channel Coupling The samplers used in the PicoScope 9000 provide only straight DC coupling to sampling circuits with no protection The PicoScope 9000 specifies a maximum vertical non destructive range that limits signals to small level 2 V DC peak AC or 16 dBm See Channel Vertical Specification and Characteristics 10 for exact limits Do not exceed the limit even momentarily as the input channel may be damaged The PicoScope 9000 also specifies a maximum operating input voltage dynamic range that if exceeded could cause acquisition and measurement errors due to non linearity This limit it equal to 1 V p p at 1 V range when digital feedback is used and 300 mV relative to channel offset without digital feedback Do not exceed this limit Also see Channel Vertical Specification and Characteristics for exact limits For removing the DC component of a particular channel s waveform to view AC waveforms with large DC offsets use external wide bandwidth HF blocking capacitors Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits just described O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 44 5 2 10 Channel External Scale The External Scale functions allow you to set up a channel of the instr
103. rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 344 5 15 1 Units The Units function lets you set the instrument timebase in basic time units or in bit period data rate units Bit period units provide an easy and intuitive way to display digital communication signals Instead of having to compute the time interval required to display two bits or eyes you can simply set the scale to two bits Time Basic time units Allows you to set the scale units to seconds per division s div and the position units to seconds s The default value for basic time units is 10 ns div Bit Period Bit units Allows you to select from a list of standard optical and digital telecommunications rates When selected the timebase scale units are set to bits per division and the delay units to bits In this mode the instrument internally performs the calculation to convert the number of bits displayed on the screen to the time per division For example if you wanted to convert x bits per division to time per division you would have to compute the following Y bits screen Bit period 1 bit rate Time screen Y bits screen x bit period Time division 0 1 time screen O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 345 5 15 2 Bit Rate Menu The Bit Rate allows the time base to be configured for a variety of standard optical and electrical telecommunications rates If you are measuring a signal with one of these stand
104. second histogram is composed of data points from the lower half of the eye zero level The instrument analyses the histograms and determines the histogram means and standard deviations The noise is defined as 16 standard deviation of the histogram at the one and zero levels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 116 The RZ Signal to Noise is determined as follows NRZ_oigral io Noise Ratio Kone Vero a m SEFA This measurement does not remove the effect of noise generated by the instrument If the noise on the signal being tested is of a magnitude similar to that of the instrument or smaller the signal to noise measurement error will be significant 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 117 5 4 6 18 ps9000 en Menu NRZ Zero Level e Zero Level NRZ Zero Level is a measure of the mean value of the logical O of an eye diagram Pico Techni PicoScope 9000 PC Sarna Oscilloscope 12 GHz e Ol x o GORY Print Hep Eye Diagram 193 Hz 1 49 WS Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Y NRZ Eye Paramet DT ac RMS TF Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB MT Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Max Mean hic F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One
105. store the instantaneous value of a signal Sometimes called sampling bridge 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 408 Sampling loop The circuits that provide the main signal path through the input sampling gate amplifiers forward gain attenuator memory gate memory feedback attenuator and back to the sampling gate also called feedback loop Sampling Oscilloscope An oscilloscope using sampling along with the means for building a coherent display of the samples taken Saturation The saturation of a color is the purity of the color or the absence of white A 100 saturated color has no white component A 0 saturated color is pure white Save Setup The scope s configuration or setup includes the timebase scale s div position vertical scale V div offset trigger source and level as well as all the other settings Using setups makes it quick and easy to reconfigure the scope to a previous configuration Scale Vertical or Horizontal Vertical scale is an instrument control that controls the Y axis or volts or other unit per division for the selected channel This control allows you to adjust the sensitivity of the instrument Horizontal scale is an instrument control that controls the X axis or time per division of displayed waveforms Horizontal scale is referred to as sweep speed in some instruments Scan Mode See Roll or Scan model 0 Screen The surface o
106. the average voltage with respect to the ground reference 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved in ps9000 en 179 Menu 5 6 1 Axis The Axis function turns the display of the histogram off or orients the histogram vertically or horizontally Off Removes the histogram and histogram value from display Vertical Places the histogram at the left side of the graticule which allows for voltage measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E Oj xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About Histogram 12 1 External Direct Time Base Autoscale 2 i i Persistence istogram Time Base Time 7 Bit Period O oft Vertical Horizontal w on Off dode window SEALE B 2 naiv DELAY 10 ns Dual Delayed Con off Run Until f Stop Single E Waveforms C Samples E OP VV EPGR NM Ss DELTA DELA 15m ff Ext Dir Et HF E l cinck MER gt ls Pos C Mec An example of the vertical histogram display ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 180 Horizontal Places the histogram at the bottom of the graticule area which allows for timing measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E Ol xj Clear Display Sto
107. the vertical axis format The entire display area is one screen and any displayed waveforms are superimposed on top of each other Dual YT The Dual YT format is the normal time on the horizontal axis versus voltage on the vertical axis format but with the display area divided into two equal screens Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i E lol xj Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz ES al xj Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo Print About Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Print About Channels 2 GHz 25 GSa 12 GHz 25 GSa Persistence nal Di Display Channels 12 GHz 25 GSa s 2 G 25 GSa Persistence nal Di Display Channel 1 sE il Screen Channel 1 ee Screen ETT Format cht ch2 e YT Cm Ch2 C Dual YT Dual YT Display C Quad YT Display C Quad YT fon Off C xY on Off on Te OO YT KY Raine C YT XY e co C Dual YT XY Eon Cot Dual YT XY Wavetorm Place on Graticule Place on Graticule ej C3 H 3 ES E CI Chi y Ch v Ch2 Y Ch2 Y Grid Axes Grid Axes C Frame Off C Framel Off Back Back ExtDir e e ExtDir C Pos Ne Pos Neg y CExtHF 2 T CAH v C Int Clk y C Int Clk Acquisition Meas
108. the Clear Display button to reset the averaging process Note that averaging is particularly useful for single valued waveforms such as pulses Multi valued waveforms such as eye diagrams are not improved with averaging because the eye collapses to the average value between logic level one and logic level zero ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 28 Two Average modes are available in the PicoScope 9000 Stable Average mode Multiple Average mode Stable Average Stable averaging lets you use the following algorithm A A a fy ET iz 0 f E where n Is the current acquisition s number A is the current acquisition s cumulative average A n is the previous acquisition s cumulative average e is the newly acquired sample s value k is the number of averages As the number of acquisitions increases the number of averages k increases and the size of the correction term 27 decreases Although the display becomes less noisy after each acquisition the first acquisition has the greatest effect and succeeding acquisitions have less effect as the correction term becomes smaller For example a change that occurs during the second acquisition shows up on the screen much sooner than one that occurs during the sixteenth Whenever you adjust a control that affects the display the scope starts a new averaging sequence to ensure that you will see the chan
109. the acquired waveform Interval Trigger Selects an interval between two edges of the same slope The trigger can be generated on the second edge if it occurs within the selected interval or after the selected interval The timing for the interval is initialized and restarted whenever the selected edge occurs J Jitter Jitter is any frequency or phase related spurious variation of a waveform from its ideal It consists of short term fluctuations in the output of a circuit or instrument that are independent of the input It appears on a waveform edge before or after the trigger point as a wide smeared edge 1 Jitter is the measure of the time variances of the rising and falling edges of an eye diagram as these edges affect the crossing points of the eye 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 396 2 Jitter is a measure of the time variances of the rising or falling edges of a pulse waveform at the middle threshold JPEG or jpg The JPEG file format or jpg is a graphics file format that can be imported into other applications for documentation purposes It can be greatly compressed but because this compression is lossy it can result in reduced image quality This format is a good choice where file size is a more important factor than image quality 6 11 K Kick out A signal usually unwanted from the internal circuitry that comes out of an input connector Kilohertz kHz 10
110. the falling edge of your eye diagram is steep increase the timebase horizontal scale on the display so that the falling edge covers at least half a graticule division The instrument will be able to discern the data at the threshold levels producing more accurate results O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 88 5 4 5 9 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved NRZ Frequency m Frequency NRZ Frequency is defined as half of the inverse of the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points i e the reciprocal of the Period stream It would be the frequency of a digital signal of a 0 1 0 1 Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy CFS Print About Eye Diagram E 12 GHz 746 3 Goal External Direct Time Base ve Parameters XA RRZ Eye Paramet Area Bit Rate Bit Time Crossing Time Cycle Area DutcyeDist DutcycDist Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time e Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Persistence sample DELAY a Ea Current Total Meas a my fae 11 a Dual Delayed COn ft off DELTA DELAY os cho Beno a f Ext Dir oo gt Neg f Ata i Ext HF CHS nco E Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics
111. the waveform is on the display it may reduce the repeatability of you measurements A good rule of thumb is to have two divisions of top and two divisions of base User Defined For waveform records or portions of waveform records on which you want to make custom measurements or define thresholds in units of volts percents or divisions you can use the User Defined setting By using units of Volts you can fix the thresholds and compare different waveform records using exactly the same fixed threshold points 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 305 Menu 5 11 6 5 Defined Thresholds holds Clicking the Defined Thresholds button opens the second level menu that allows you select defined threshold options efine Thresholds Percent i Vertical Unit CO Division ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 306 5 11 6 5 1 Units You can set the unit of measure for upper middle and lower thresholds to Percent Vertical Unit or Division Percent This is calculated from the top base values and you can set the maximum percentage up to 200 in 1 coarse or 0 1 fine increments Volt This lets you set the thresholds to particular voltage values regardless of the top base values For example for a vertical scale of 200 mV div you can set the voltage values from 797 mV to 797 mV in approximately 25 mV coarse or 1 56 mV fine incr
112. time difference between the 30 points of the crossing point histograms relative to the time between adjacent crossing points bit period The eye width can then be expressed in percent of the bit period Eye Width measurement NRZ ByeWidth Y Sams Tema Bees Feos g y a E Ta 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 86 5 4 5 8 NRZ Fall Time e Fall Time NRZ Fall Time is a measure of the mean transition time of the data on the downward slope of an eye diagram The data crosses through the following three thresholds the upper middle and lower thresholds as well as through the eye crossing points Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy CFS Print About Eye Diagram 1 E 12 GHz 746 5 Gsals Persistence External Direct Time Base sample ve Parameters Time Base Xx NRZ Eye Paramet FT Area f Time T Bit Rate Bit Period Bit Time Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycbist DutcycDist Eye Width Eye Width fw Fall Time F Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Bit kate Js 6400 Mbs Main O Intensified f Delayed Dual Delayed Con ot off i Ext HF DELTA DELA a Os e ae H cme ME m f Ext Dir oo gt Neg NRZ Fa
113. trigger at the precise source level you want without calculating the drop across the pad The trigger level attenuation factor is used to establish a database for generating the LEVEL prompts on the display The attenuation factor is from 0 000 1 1 to 1 000 000 1 or from 80 dB to 120 dB 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 366 5 17 Zoom Menu orn In addition to channel scaling and a delayed timebase the PicoScope 9000 includes graphical zoom capability for rescaling the vertical and horizontal components of waveforms simultaneously You can use the Zoom menu to change the vertical and horizontal scales and positions for waveform memories or waveform math functions and spectrums that are currently displayed Also the instrument will convert your time domain waveform into a frequency domain Spectrum using an FFT similar to the way that an RF spectrum analyzer displays in different complex scales SL ALE Suppression M DC e Phase SUPPRESS LEVEL 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 367 Menu 5 17 1 Source E gt The Source menu selects the source trace for displaying with different complex scales and for vertical and horizontal scaling and positioning You may set the source to spectrums 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 Live waveforms from channels cannot be selected as sources in the Zoom
114. up the instrument to view signals or someone else has used the scope before you You may also use the default settings to troubleshoot unexpected instrument behaviour Default Factory Setup Channels Select Display SCALE OFFSET Bandwidth DESKEW Attenuation Units Timebase Units Mode SCALE A TRIGGER Source Mode LEVEL Slope HOLDOFF Hysteresis Attenuation Units ACQUISITION Fit Acquisition To Sampling Mode Mode RECORD LENGTH Chl On for both channels 200mvV div for both channels O V for both channels Full for both channels O s for both channels Off for both channels Time Main 10 ns div External Direct Freerun OV Positive 10 us Normal Off Single valued signal Simultaneous Sample 512 points for both channels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 328 PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide DISPLAY Trace Mode Style PERSISTENCE TIME Format Graticule Default Colors SAVE RECALL to Memory Disk File Type File Name to Memory MARKER Type MEASURE Display Define Parameter Method Thresholds Margins Mode LEFT MARGIN RIGHT MARGIN Left Threshold Right Threshold LIMIT TEST Off MATHEMATICS Select Display Operator Operand 1 Operand 2 FFT Select Display Source Window ZOOM Off HISTOGRAM Axis Source MASK TEST Compare with All Locked Variable Persistence 2S YT Grid Default colors legend M
115. usable by a printer Hertz Hz The unit of frequency One hertz is equal to one cycle per second HF Reject HF Reject removes the high frequency portion of the triggering signal Thus only low frequency components are passed on to the triggering system to start an acquisition High frequency rejection attenuates signals above tens of kHz HF Sync Reduces the trigger rate by including a frequency divider in the trigger path enabling the input trigger rate to exceed the maximum for repetitive signals High The value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot High pass filter A circuit that attenuates low frequency components in an analog signal Histogram A graphical statistical representation of data such that the data is divided into intervals or bins The intervals or bins are then plotted on a bar chart where the height is proportional to the number of data points contained in each interval or bin The distribution of acquired data is displayed within a user definable window Holdoff by Events Selects a minimum number of events between triggers An event is generated when the trigger source meets its trigger conditions A trigger is generated when the trigger condition is met after the selected number of events from the last trigger The hold off by events is initialized and started on each trigger 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 39
116. usually the 10 point 2 Fall time is a measure of the mean one level to zero level transition time of the data of an eye diagram The data crosses through the upper middle and lower thresholds as well as through the NRZ eye crossing points False display A sampling display that allows faulty or ambiguous interpretation usually caused by insufficient sample density or improper triggering also known as aliasing 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 390 Feedthrough An unwanted signal that passes a closed gate or disabled input FFT Fast Fourier Transform The Fast Fourier Transform is a mathematical algorithm that takes the sample points of a waveform in the time domain and computes the frequency components The FFT function enables the oscilloscope to transform a waveform from a display of its amplitude against time to one that plots the amplitudes of the various discrete frequencies the waveform contains Some uses for the FFT capability are measuring harmonic content and distortion in systems analysing vibration testing the impulse response of filters and identifying noise sources in digital logic circuits FFT Frequency Bins A Fast Fourier Transform corresponds to analyzing the input signal with a bank of n 2 filters all having the same shape and width and centered at n 2 discrete frequencies Each filter collects the signal energy that falls into the immediate neighborhood
117. window is placed horizontally through the 50 levels and the data within this measurement window is analysed This measurement window is created to be extremely small so that the measurement is not affected by the rise time and fall time of the waveform The RZ eye width is determined using the time difference between the 30 standard deviation points of the 50 level histograms RE _ Bye Width pay 7 30 T aes 7 30 The RZ eye width can also be expressed as the ratio of the 30 time difference between edges to the bit time bit period of the eye pulses gg nun Z ST meso 70 Re Ayelhidih _ BIET PHE 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 125 5 4 7 6 ps9000 en Menu RZ Fall Time e Fall Time RZ Fall Time is a measure of the mean transition time of the data on the downward slope of an RZ eye diagram The data crosses through the following three thresholds the upper middle and lower thresholds Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display lo StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About Eye Diagram 1 1 Sala 26 Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base amp RZ Eye Paramete T Bit Rate C Bit Period 7 Bit Time Bit Rate Eye width Eye idth fw Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise T
118. x a gt CN CC CEN gt ratico 7 Grid Axes Grid Axes C Frame Off Frame Off Back Back EE E ERA n RENE lt lt C EIDE poe C neg E Ext HF i C Ext HF Os cick ES 2 Cmok Acquisition Display Save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics Acquisition Measure Limit Test Mathematics Histogram Mask Test Eye Diagram TDR TDT Utility Histogram Utility Advance YT XY Display Format Dual YT XY Display Format ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 62 2 0 00 2 5 3 6 3 5 3 6 4 Waveform With the Waveform function you can set the waveform which will be placed on the graticule selected with the Place on Graticule menu The waveform source can be selected from channels 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 spectrums 1 and 2 Any waveform selected with the Waveform function is placed on the graticule chosen with the Place on Graticule menu Place on Graticule Place on Graticule Place on Graticule With the Place on Graticule menu you can place a waveform selected by the Waveform function on any possible graticule You can place any waveform selected as source to any graticule For example you can place the M1 waveform memory on the fourth graticule or the F1 function on the first graticule X and Y The X control selects the waveform source related to the horizontal X axis You can se
119. 0 Series User s Guide 192 XY Markers The XYM1 and XYM2 are two waveform markers Their displays are and X Each marker is in effect both a horizontal and vertical marker Neither of these markers can be moved off the waveform The XY markers track the waveform data in memory rather than on the displayed waveform Because the waveform data in memory has a much greater resolution than the display the measurements you make with the XY markers are much more precise than measurements made with the manual markers The XY markers track the time as changes of the source signal This allows you to make accurate delay measurements without having both markers on the display Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Detank Setup Undo Copy ae Print About Channels 2 SHz 250 Persistence External Direct Marker e chi cho amp on off Acquire on or 100 m di OFFSET E l Bandwidth Full Narrow f Independent Paired Reference Con tf Off DESKEVY Alt Acq os Sel Reterente EM Et pos neg i Ext HF E cno MO Customized measurement with the Y Markers 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 193 Menu 5 7 2 M1 Source and M2 Source CAMI a gt You may set the source for each marker Channels 1 and 2 Functions 1 through 4 Waveform memories 1 t
120. 00 hertz a unit of frequency 6 12 L Leakage In the power spectrum of a sine wave with an integral number of periods in the rectangular time window that is where the source frequency equals one of the bin frequencies the spectrum contains a sharp component whose value accurately reflects the source waveform s amplitude For intermediate input frequencies this spectral component has a lower and broader peak The broadening of the base of the peak stretching out into many neighboring bins is termed leakage It is due to the relatively high sidelobes of the filter associated with each frequency bin The filter sidelobes and the resulting leakage are reduced when one of the available window functions is applied The best reduction is provided by the Blackman Harris and Flattop windows However this reduction is offset by a broadening of the main lobe of the filter LF Low Frequency LF Rejection LF Rejection removes the low frequency portion of the signal Thus only high frequency components are passed on to the channel or triggering system for acquisition Low frequency rejection attenuates signals below the tens of kHz Limit Test Comparison of an input signal or math waveform to a template waveform When performing a limit test the oscilloscope looks for waveforms that fall outside the limits defined by the template waveform The oscilloscope can be programmed to generate a hardcopy beep or stop and wait for input fr
121. 1 Waveform File Manual M1 Off Off Histogram 10 50 90 Marker Os 100 s Middle Middle F1 Off Add Ch1 Ch2 S1 Off Ch1 Rectangular Off Chl Chl 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 329 Menu EYE DIAGRAM Measure Off Source Chl Define Parameter EYE BOUNDARY 1 40 EYE BOUNDARY 2 60 Thresholds 20 80 5 13 6 4 Recall Power Off Clicking the Recall Power Off button returns the instrument to the last setting before the power supply was last switched off ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 330 5 13 6 5 Save Setup The Save Setup button stores the present front panel setup to a selected setup memory To save a current setup for later use you can use any available drive Use the standard Windows Setup Files dialog box You can create subdirectories new setup files or overwrite existing setup files from this dialog box The PicoScope 9000 uses the file extension set for setup files Enter a useful comment about each setup you save Write the comment so that it explains the purpose of the saved file when that file is later accessed When you save a setup all settings including measurements markers horizontal and vertical control settings trigger configuration color scheme and math functions are saved to the disk file you have selected The number of setups you can save is limited only by the avail
122. 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 To define the signal histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the eye window boundaries One histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram one level and the second histogram is composed of data points from the lower half of the eye zero level The instrument analyses the histograms and determines the histogram means and standard deviations The noise is defined as lo standard deviation from the histogram means for the one and zero levels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 155 5 4 8 17 ps9000 en Menu RZ Zero Level I Zero Level RZ Zero Level is a measure of the mean value of the logical O at a time position found directly below the peak of the eye diagram logical 1 Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Oj x Clear Display Fun StopSingle Auto cale Default Setup Unido i Copy E Print Help Eye Diagram 1 g3 sE 1 49 aS Persistence External HF Time Base Time Base Time C Bit Period ve Parameters Y RZ Eye Paramete Macame T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE FF ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean T mid F
123. 4 6 9 Holdoff by Time Holdoff time is the amount of time that the scope waits before rearming the trigger circuitry By using different holdoff times complex waveform triggering can be Stabilised Horizontal Acquisition Window A common time window or range that is applied to all channels in parallel to determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record The trigger and horizontal controls determine the duration of this window and its placement in the incoming signal Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters of a waveform The oscilloscope displays the value of the cursors with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars Horizontal Reference 1 The trigger point corresponds to the horizontal reference point when the horizontal position is set to zero Reference represents the point from which the delay offset is calculated 2 The point about which waveforms are expanded or contracted horizontally when horizontal scale adjustments are made The horizontal reference point remains anchored as the rest of the waveform grows or shrinks around it Horizontal Scale Horizontal scale is an instrument control that controls the X axis or time per division of displayed waveforms Referred to aS sweep speed in some instruments IEEE 488 2 See GPIB 2 Impulse An electromagnetic pulse of short duration shorter than one cycle at th
124. 50 90 e 20 50 80 User Defined By default the PicoScope 9000 uses the IEEE thresholds of 10 50 and 90 percent for pulse measurements A rising or falling edge is only recognized after passing through all three thresholds You can specify your own thresholds rather than using the IEEE Standard 10 50 and 90 percent levels but this can dramatically change measurement results Note how the rise and fall times will be faster for the same waveform using the 80 20 criteria instead of the 90 10 criteria You may rely on the scope to automatically set top and base or redefine those levels yourself and use units of voltage instead of percent The UPPER THRESHOLD MIDDLE THRESHOLD and LOWER THRESHOLD variables are displayed only when the User Defined is selected in the Thresholds menu 10 50 90 and 20 50 80 These are two IEEE standard pulse measurement thresholds for all measurements These standard thresholds are calculated as a percentage of the top base values and the top base values are calculated from the waveform that is on the display 10 50 90 means Lower threshold threshold 90 10 Middle threshold 50 Upper 20 50 80 means Lower threshold threshold 80 20 Middle threshold 50 Upper Make sure that the waveform is expanded vertically and horizontally so that the instrument can accurately determine the top and base values of the waveform However if too much of the top and base of
125. 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Oj x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About 12 GHz 1 12 GHz 1 Gaalz Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Measure Parameterz Timing Parameters Period fw Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Bit kate E A400 Wiis y bode C Main C Intensified f Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p E Current Total ma Minimum Meg Jitter RMS ene 4 90 MHz 206 4 91 MHz Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA BELAY a ue 53 Est HF ET EtDir a pf NES T reco ME Frequency definition Because the detected edges can be either rising or falling the frequency is determined as follows Frequency 1 Period 1 Tcross3 Tcross1 where Tcross3 and Tcrossi are the times of the first two consecutive crossings on the Same slope at the mid reference level If more than one period can be found within the margins the scope measures the average frequency value The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of frequency value will be performed only inside these margins
126. 9000 en 27 Menu One drawback of the Sample mode is that it can be fooled by aliasing because the bandwidth of the data is proportional to the timebase scale settings As the Nyquist Theorem predicts the bandwidth of the data drops as you slow the timebase The default mode is Sample which is useful for acquiring fast signals Average mode Pressing one of two Average radio buttons Stable Average or Multiple Average lets you acquire and display a waveform that is the combined result of several acquisitions The oscilloscope acquires data as in the Sample mode and then averages it according to the number of averages that you specify Each point in a record is numerically averaged with the same point in all other records This reduces the random noise of a displayed waveform and provides a cleaner display improves resolution of the displayed waveform and increases measurement repeatability all due to a more stable displayed waveform The noise sources can average to zero over time while the underlying waveform is preserved The effective resolution of the displayed waveform increases as more acquisitions are averaged together provided that the input waveform is repetitive and has a stable trigger point However averaging reduces the throughput of the instrument Also the waveform is less responsive to changes especially when you select a high number of averages The vertical resolution can be improved to 16 bits by using averages O Use
127. An example of the assignment of colors is shown in the table below Maximum in the table represents the maximum number of hits in any bin which for this algorithm must be at least 16 A sample assignment of colors to Hit Density Hit Density Default color Coor 50 100 50 to 100 White Set Color 25 to 50 Yellow Set Color 12 5 to 25 Rose Set Color 6 25 to 12 5 Light Blue Set Color 0 to 6 25 Green Set Color 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 69 Deal fad ps9000 en Click Set Color to recall the Windows Color Dialog Color Basic colors m colors PETTTTTTET as a TERRA EE EEE EE A EOE EE SEE EE NAAA Define Custom Colors gt Lancel Default Colo rs Menu Hue jaz Red 255 Sat 240 Green 204 Lum 120 Blue Jo Add to Custom Colors Windows Color Dialog Clicking the Default Colors button returns all five colors used in the color graded display to the factory default O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 70 5 4 Eye Diagram Menu The Eye Diagram menu allows you to perform eye diagram measurements Eye Diagram ye Define Parameter EYE BOUNDARY 1 fe on ot i Hormal f Window Exponential WAVEFORMS Statistics 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 71 Eye Diagram
128. Autoscale key automatically adjusts the vertical channels the horizontal scale factors and the trigger level for a display appropriate to the signals applied to the inputs The Autoscale feature requires a repetitive signal with a frequency greater than 1 kHz duty cycle greater than 1 amplitudes greater than 50 mV p p vertical and 200 mV p p trigger Autoscale is operative only for relatively stable input signals X Marker vertical bars measure time Y Marker horizontal bars measure volts XY Markers waveform markers x and Absolute Delta Volts Time Frequency Slope Volts T ime Independent both markers can be adjusted independently Paired both markers can be adjusted together 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 4 11 4 12 Ratiometric measurements Measure Automated Measurements Automatic Parametric Amplitude Measurements Timing Measurements Dual Channel Measurements FFT Measurements Measurement Statistics Method of Top Base Definition Thresholds Margins Measurement Mode Limit Test Limit Test On failure actions 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 16 Provide ratiometric measurements between measured and reference values These measurements give results in such ratiometric units as dB and degrees Up to ten simultaneous measurements or four Statistics measurements are Supported at th
129. B General Purpose Interface Bus or IEEE 488 bus is an interconnect bus and protocol that allows multiple test and measurement instruments to be linked together in a network under the control of a computer GPIB transfers data and commands with eight parallel data lines and several control and handshake lines Also called HP IB Graphics Interchange format or gif Graphics interchange format or gif is a standard graphics format used to store bit mapped graphic files that can be imported into other applications for documentation purposes You can save the gif file to the internal hard disk or an external memory device It is a compressed 256 color file format Graticule or Grid The graticule or grid is the enclosed area where the waveform is displayed on a scope Tick marks on the frame or axis of the graticule or horizontal and vertical lines within the graticule are a scaling aid for making visual measurements Gray Scale Waveform Persistence The gray scale waveform persistence mode displays the sampled data points for an endless period of time This persistence mode uses one hue that varies in saturation and luminosity to represent the number density of data counts acquired on a pixel time and amplitude display coordinate of the display graticule Every time a display is acquired on a display coordinate the counter for that coordinate is incremented Each level of saturation and luminosity used for the gray scale mode represen
130. Con t off Est HF DELTA DELA a Os a ah ae crc ME f Ext Dir yo Neg NRZ Bit Time definition NRZ Bit Time can be determined as NRZ Bit Time Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross2 and Tcross1 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive eye crossings Right Crossing and Left Crossing This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 81 Menu 5 4 5 4 NRZ Crossing Time NRZ Crossing Time is a measure of the horizontal position of the leftmost eye Crossing Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display un StopiSingle Autosca Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ie Print About Eye Diagram 1 2 GH Ss 12 GHz 74 val Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Units Time C Bit Period le z T4635 Goals Bit kate st 400 Wiis gt hlade C Main Intensified fe Delayed fw Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycDist DutcycDist Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time 67 pedi DELA gt E Dual Delayed Con i off i Ext HF DELTA DELA a Os a a ae crc MO f Ext Dir yo Neg NRZ Crossing Time definition Data is sampled on a horizontal slice at the eye crossing and the m
131. Cycle Area Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Persistence Minimum Maximum Ae Maximum definition EM gt EX oo IC External Direct Mean le ExtDir yg Pos Meg i Ext HF 10 x Time Base Time Baze Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate E A400 hibs Main O Intensified amp Delayed The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of maximum value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 276 5 11 4 2 Minimum Minimum is the voltage or power of the absolute minimum level of the measurement region The minimum level is taken directly from the histogram data The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Techno cdi 9000 PC Sari Oscilloscope 12 GHz A Ol xj o GORY e Prit About Measure G E El 2 les als Persistence External Direct Time Base Parameters Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate s1 s400 mbis 400 Wiis s1 s400 mbis h Amplitude Paramete Maximum fw hinimum FT Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean
132. DC voltage level present in a circuit DC Offset This term may imply that the shift is intentional for example adjustable by a control DC Overload An overload signal of long duration compared to the normal input pulse width DC RMS The DC RMS measurement is the typical method of making an rms root mean square voltage measurement O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 385 ps9000 en Glossary Dead Time In digital scopes the dead time is the time from the end of one data acquisition to the rearm of the trigger circuitry for the next acquisition Better update rate in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a significant event Decibel dB A logarithmic measure of the ratio of two signal levels dB 20 log Voltage A Voltage 5 or dB 10 log Power Power Variants on the decibel dB used in spectrum analysis and network analysis measurements are dBmV absolute voltage level referred to 1 mV dBuV absolute votalge level referred to 1 uV dBm absolute power level referred to 1 mW dBc level difference referred to a carrier level c dBc Hz level difference referred to carrier level calculated for a measurement bandwidth of 1 Hz Spectrum and network analysis Delay Delay or position moves the waveform horizontally on the display By adjusting the delay variable it is possible to view events that happen before negative delay value or after positive delay val
133. DT AC RMS D Avg Power TF Avg Power der FF Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Max Mean hic Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS SiN Ratio SIN Ratio dB Zero Level Bit kate st A400 Wiis bode C Main C Intensified f Delayed i Ext Dir rola Neg f Ext HF CES nalas NRZ Negative Overshoot definition The NRZ Negative Overshoot is determined as follows zero Y min MARZ MegaaveCverstioat xod ane frero where Vmin is the signal minimum and Vone and Vzero are the logical 1 and O levels Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 6 11 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d NRZ Noise P p One and NRZ Noise P p Zero i Noise Pop One fw Noise Pop Zero NRZ Noise P p One is a measurement of the maximum range of the amplitude variance samp
134. ERAS File name Joname Places Save as type Setup File set Cancel E Windows Setup Files dialog box Remember that the PicoScope 9000 uses the file extension set for setup files Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the recalled setup If you do not want to lose your current setup save it to its own setup file for later recall before you recall the new setup Remember to always copy important settings and waveforms to an external drive If your original files are damaged or lost you can restore the files from the backup drive 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 327 5 13 6 2 lA ps9000 en Initialization Menu Initialization allows you to return the instrument to one of its default settings The default settings place the instrument in a known operating condition This known operating condition is used as a starting point in the service procedures You may find it helpful to use this known operating condition when someone else has used the scope before you or as a starting point when setting up the instrument to view signals Three initialization settings are e Factory Last Power Off Default Recall Factory Clicking the Recall Factory button returns the instrument to the manufacturer s default setting This places the oscilloscope in a known operating condition You may find it helpful to use the default factory settings when initially setting
135. ES OF FAILED WF hi E When the Failed Wfms option on the Run Until menu is selected the OF FAILED WFM variable sets the number of failed waveforms After this number is reached acquisition stops When the Failed Samples option on the Run Until menu is selected the OF FAILED SMPL variable sets the number of failed samples After this number is reached acquisition stops When the Waveforms option on the Run Until menu is selected the OF WAVEFORMS variable sets the number of waveforms After this number is reached acquisition stops When the Samples option of the Run Until menu is selected the 4 OF SAMPLES variable sets the number of samples After this number is reached acquisition stops Select Action v Deep Save One of two actions can be selected Beep Beep produces an audio tone when any failure occurs Save Save recalls the Windows Save Waveform As Dialog that allows you to select the type of format you want to save the waveform as You can select one of three types of waveform formats Binary format with wfm extension e Text format with txt extension Both formats with wfm and txt extensions When a mask test is started all waveforms that have data points sampled in the mask regions and margin regions failures are stored into the memory in the directory Mask Test Files 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 234 5 10 Mathematics M
136. EVY AK Acq External Direct Acquisition Acq Chl amp Che Fit Acquistion To bain Menu Single valued si C Mutti valued siar E Simultaneous Alternate Chennel Att Model fe chi chez f Sample Stable Average C Multiple Average f Median Average C Min Max Envelop Max Envelope f Min Envelope f Peak Detect AVERAGE a a EJ RECORD LENGTH EE Ez ExtDir i Pos Meg Ext HF m C ntek CE Eo enterada Peri HA PL apli Leiler 1 Gr Average Acquisition Mode O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d fae Ten haga GOS Ea Min Max Envelope Acquisition Mode ps9000 en 33 ps9000 en Menu RECORD LENGTH The number of samples that form a trace is called the record length in points per waveform For example if the horizontal timebase scale is set up as 10 ns div the total displayed sweep time is 100 ns The greater the amount of sampled data that is available for analysis or measurements the greater the record length You can select record length with one of these methods By using the RECORD LENGTH spin box By using the Pop up Keypadl 37 to enter specific settings Record length can be selected from 32 to 4096 samples in multiples of two Record length with 32 samples Record length with 4096 samples Fast Fourier Transform algorithms require a record length that is a power o
137. Ext Dir ooog Neg CA Ext Dir E Pos Neg Ext HF C AIB EH a C Int Clk a C Int Clk Lal CB Mathematics Time Base FFT Measure Limit Test Channels Time Base Save Recall Marker FFT Trigger Acquisition Display Trigger Acquisition Display Save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics Zoom Mask Test TDR TDT Option O Converter Zoom Mask Test TDR TDT Option Utility Advance Utility Advance Histogram Eye Diagram Histogram Eye Diagram A histogram with 80 transparency A histogram with 20 transparency 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 67 Menu 5 3 7 5 Current Clicking the Current button returns the selected display element to the factory default color 5 3 7 6 All Clicking the All returns all display elements to the factory default colors ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 68 5 3 7 7 Color Grade Scale Clicking the Color Grade Scale button opens the Color Grade Scale menu with a list of five colors used in the color grade display 5 3 7 7 1 Color Grade Scale The Color Grade Scale menu defines the five colors used in the color grade display The algorithm used in the PicoScope 9000 depends on the maximum number of hits for any pixel in the display
138. GHz 1 493 Tals 12 GHz 1 493 Taals Persistence External HF n sample sample S Thi BACS DO eT 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 219 Menu 3 Click and hold the left mouse button on the new point then drag the mouse to move it to the desired position The vertical and horizontal coordinates of the new point change in the Status Area of the GUI when moving Release the mouse button when finished i _ 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz 12 GHz 1 493 Tals Persistence External HF mm sample sample 104160045 pf et ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 220 4 Click the Back button The scope returns to the high level menu and mask gets a new point 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz i I Persistence External HF sample le S Thi Bo 4S 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 221 Menu 5 9 1 4 2 Delete Point The Delete Point function deletes a point on a polygon of a Mask To delete a point 1 Click Edit Mask Click on the polygon you want to use and then click on the vertex you want delete The selected point is highlighted in yellow The vertical and horizontal coordinates of the selected point appear on the Status Area of the GUI 12 GHz 1 493 Tals 12 GHZ 1 493 Tals Persistence External HF Sample Sample pf eT E ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 222
139. HERE 2 E g lalo lalo Full Window Copy O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 340 EA nn So A A e Cines Espiar Fur F berrea e Pilm rar treet gt Eye Diagram re fre Congr a ower CORE m E EC prau E r E e a p ei EXA MEE A A e L E a ln HE O Gm E E E o EN Carrea Tre Mare Tagga AI Epia Sed mI Toon o wm birri TEn Eve Dagen wren Tre Dare Tagg Argini Tippin ed ini AA Lied Tet rear mI Ismi e Mark Te Eye Dayen Lite 1 Client Part Copy Invert Client Part Copy External Direct 12 GHz 600 9 GSa s 12 GHz 600 9 GSa s Persistence External Direct Sample Sample Freerun TE Oscilloscope Screen Copy Invert Oscilloscope Screen Copy 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 341 Menu 5 14 8 Print Print Print Printer Setup To print you must first have installed and configured a printer To print a hardcopy click the Print button Right click the button and then select the Printer Setup It opens the standard Windows Print Setup dialog box which allows you select printer options ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 342 PicoScope 9000 Help About The Help button has two functions e Click it to activate the context sensitive
140. ITIONS HOP ACMUISITIONS Sets the number of acquisitions After the selected number of acquisitions is met the acquisition is stopped 5 1 9 Action The Action menu allows you to specify what the instrument does after acquisition is stopped Two actions can be selected Beep The Beep provides an audio tone Save All W ms Clicking Save All Wfms opens the Windows Acquisition Limit Files dialog box which allows you to select the type of format you want to save the waveform as and also to enter a key file name You can select one of three types of waveform formats Binary format with wfm extension e Text format with txt extension e Both formats with wfm and txt extensions After the Run key is pressed the oscilloscope acquires the specified number of acquisitions All of them will be saved into the memory 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 35 Menu 5 2 Channels Menu e WARNING The input circuits can be damaged by electrostatic discharge Therefore avoid applying static discharges to the front panel input connectors Before connecting any coaxial cable to the connectors momentarily short the centre and outer conductors of the cable together Avoid touching the front panel input connectors without first touching the case of the instrument Personnel should be properly grounded and should touch the case of the instrument before touching any connector Be sure that the instrument
141. Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Total Meas Minima 69 Con t off Est HF DELTA DELAY ead as Ez Ed AAA Int Eik 250 mi i f Ext Dir Post Neg 100 my RZ Fall Time definition A histogram is first constructed to find the mean locations of the eye one level and zero level Histograms are then constructed at each of the three threshold levels for example the 20 50 and 80 points on the transition The instrument analyses each histogram to determine the histogram mean at which the data crosses the separate threshold levels Once the scanning of the waveform is complete and the instrument has identified the mean location for each threshold crossed then fall time can be computed RZ Fall Time Time at the Lower Threshold Crossing Time at the Upper Threshold Crossing The default setting for the threshold levels is the 20 to 80 points on the transition These levels give more consistent results for eyes with distortion at the top or bottom You can define the threshold settings that you want in the Define Parameters menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 126 If the fall time relative to the time division is a small value the data acquired at the threshold levels on the falling edge will not yield accurate measurement results The f
142. Level Zero Level is a measure of the mean value of the logical O of an eye diagram Zero phase reference point The point in the time domain record to which the phase values of the FFT are referenced Zoom Zoom allows you to analyse your waveform in more detail by expanding the waveform display either horizontally O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Index of acquisitions 34 OF FAILED SMPL variable 233 OF FAILED WFM variable 233 OF WAVEFORMS variable 233 OFSAMPLES variable 233 to Memory menu 318 324 89 336 EEC 5 Access 6 Acquisition 13 menu 20 Acquisition Mode menu 26 Action menu 34 Add Point button 217 Add Polygon button 224 Address 7 Aliasing 162 All color button 67 ANSI T1 102 masks list 208 Attenuation 46 units 45 Automask DELTA X variable 212 DELTA Y variable 212 function 211 source list 211 units option 211 Autoscale button 335 Average N control 31 B Beep 34 Bit Rate variable 345 Blackman Harris window 166 174 BS EN 61010 1 2001 5 Build Automask button 212 Burst Width parameter 266 Buttons 331 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 418 C CE notice 5 Channel Alt Mode 25 Channel Acquire menu 36 Channel Bandwidth menu 41 Channel Coupling 43 Channel DESKEW variable 42 Channel display menu 36 Channel external scale 44 Channel Input Impedance 43 Channel OFFSET variable 39 Channel SCALE variable 37 C
143. Mean Total Wima 219 9 mv E f Ext Dir mo Neg i Ext HF Os cno ES Cycle dc RMS definition Time Base O x Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate st 400 mb Main O Intensified Delayed 1 naidi Dual Delayed Con f off DELTA DELAY You can customize this measurement to be made either on one waveform cycle or across all data on the display The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Cycle dc RMS value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 289 5 11 4 14 Menu Cycle ac RMS Cycle ac RMS is the averaged root mean square voltage of one cycle of the waveform less the cycle mean value over the measurement region The average of the data values is taken of an integral number of periods The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either ac or dc RMS measurements See also ac RMS 2 Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz e oO x Clear Display Run topisingle Autoscale CORY a Print About Measure 1 12 GHz 506 Time Base Paramete
144. Meg T A ASB A na 1 P y Phase Spectrum of 500 MHz pulse waveform with deep suppression level ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 372 Real Displays the linear magnitude of the real part of the spectral magnitude only This is useful if you process the spectrum off line and transform it back into a time domain trace You could save the real spectrum into a waveform memory Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle utoscale Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About 12 GHz 11 1 I Vectors External Direct Time Base Time Base Unite i Time 7 Bit Period 7 yr GH Bit kate st S400 Wiis h d g Main Intensified Delayed ie Complex Signal e Complex Scale i Magnitude i Phase Real C Imaginary SCALEB 1 naidi BELA fos Dual Delayed fon off Suppression Dc e Phase SUPPRESS LEWEL 10 de DELTA DELAY os a 5 naidi e Ext Dir L f Ext HF rs E sl rs mw E 2 os H cme ME ls Pos C Meg 150 r Real part of the spectrum for 500 MHz pulse waveform 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 373 Menu Imaginary Displays the linear magnitude of the imaginary part of the spectral magnitude only This is useful if you process the spectrum
145. Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak M RMS Signal to Noise Jw Zero Level Bit kate 51 8400 Mbs hole f Main Intensified e Delayed SCALE A Dual Delayed fon tf off DELTA DELAY ds i Ext Dir epost Neg f Ext HF E Int Clk 50 SO m Os 6 5 ps RZ Zero Level definition The RZ Zero Level measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines the histogram mean The RZ Zero Level is determined as follows RZ Zero Level Histogram Mean 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 156 5 4 9 Statistics menu to open an eye diagram calculation Eye Diagram Click the Statistics statistical menu E oft Mode Normal f Window f Exponential 5 4 9 1 Statistics on off On Turns on statistical calculation of the eye diagram Off Turns off statistical calculation of the eye diagram
146. O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 132 5 4 7 12 RZ Pulse Symmetry RZ Pulse Symmetry measures to what extent the RZ pulse is symmetrical around the peak at the 50 reference level The pulse peak is the center of the interval sized to Eye Aperture which yields the maximum mean vertical value Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo IE Copy ee Print About Eye Diagram 1 1 als 2G Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Le 2 R Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye idth TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Bit kate Js 400 Wiis Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle e Pulse Symmetry F Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Total Meas Minima 269 39 56 Con t off Est HF DELTA DELAY ead as Ez Ed AAA Int Eik 250 mi i f Ext Dir Post Neg 100 my RZ Pulse Symmetry definition The RZ Pulse Symmetry is determined as follows 0 T peok T ases Re Pulse Syeunetry mo 00 r Fos EA where TRise50 and TFall50 are the time crossings of the RZ pulse of the 50 reference level and TPeak is the time coordinate of the pulse peak This measurement requir
147. Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SIN Ratio dB Zero Level in ensitied elayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY os MA Ext Dir Ext HF oa q 25 2a 0 03 r Int Clk 50 mw a ls Pos C Meg NRZ AC RMS definition The NRZ AC RMS is defined as follows ir Y PertPas s mean VertPos yl NRZ AC RMS gt N where s is the set of N samples s within the measured region When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 94 95 Menu 5 4 6 2 NRZ Crossing and NRZ Crossing Level MW crossing 9 M Crossing Level NRZ Crossing percentage is a measure of the location of the eye crossing points relative to the separation between the One Level Vone and the Zero Level Vzero Typically it is desirable to have the crossing points located midway between Vone and Vzero In this case the crossing percentage would be 50 according to the following formula NRZ Crossing percentage 100 Vcross Vzero Vone Vzero NRZ Crossing Level is the mean signal level at the eye crossing point NRZ Crossing Level mean VertPos s where s is the set of samples in a vertical slice at the eye crossing point Vcross is the more prevalent vertical location or amplitude of the crossing points A horizontal histogram over the entire display is used to determin
148. PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes have SMA oscilloscope connectors The inputs have an impedance of 50 Q so they are compatible with low impedance oscilloscope probes having different attenuations If your probe has a BNC connector use an SMA m BNC f adaptor Connector diagrams Front Panel 1 2 3 5 PicoScope 9211 PicoScope 9201 Input Channel 1 Input Channel 2 External Clock Recovery Trigger Input PicoScope 9211 only External Direct Trigger Input External Prescaled Trigger Input ul Bh WN e 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en ps9000 en Product Information Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 5 i j PicoScope 9211 PicoScope 9201 1 Cooling holes There is a low noise fan inside the unit that blows air through these holes Do not block the cooling holes or insert any objects through them as this could damage the unit or cause injury USB 2 0 port LAN port PicoScope 9211 only LAN Reset Switch PicoScope 9211 only Power socket for use with the AC adaptor supplied with the unit U UN O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 10 Specifications amp Characteristics The distinction between specifications characteristics typical performance and nominal values is as follows Specifications describe guaranteed performance over the temperature range 152C to 252C unless otherwise noted from
149. ST f Direct pos neg Prescaler a Pos A E Int clk Ov gt The Permanent Controls are located at the bottom of the display area They are permanent because they are the most common function that affect the waveform display They include the channel timebase and trigger toolbars The Permanent Controls are The Channel 1 and Channel 2 on off check boxes scale and offset settings e The time base modes the A and B time base scales and delay settings Trigger source slope and level settings Clicking the right mouse button on a selected variable displays a pop up numeric keypad 37 allowing you to set a precise value Each channel has a check box allowing you to turn that channel on or off and a set of controls allowing you to change the vertical scaling or offset Only channels that are on are shown in matching colors The right hand side of the permanent controls contains a limited number of trigger controls You can choose between Direct Prescaler and Int Clk source and between Positive and Negative trigger slope You can set a particular trigger level 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 13 Save Recall Menu save kecall 316 You can use any drive on the PicoScope 9000 s PC for the following save recall tasks O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d To save your acquired waveforms to a drive To load your saved waveforms from a drive to the
150. StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy ee Print About Channels gt Eie ale Color Grade External Direct Display hannel 1 isplay E AllLocked Per Trace f Chi che Trace El Dots E on Off Vectors Var Persistence Infin Persistence Var Gray Scalin Infin Gray Scalir ar Color Gradir Infin Color Gradi REFRESH a E Screen 2 cquire Eon Cor OFFSET 2 neldiv f Ext Dir Pos em g i Ext HF e E Color Graded Display Style You can use the color grade persistence mode to display waveforms that use the instrument measurement database This database consists of all data samples displayed on the screen The measurement database provides the data for the construction of histograms and performing mask tests If the color grade persistence style is left active for a long period of time the waveform will become saturated with the color that represents the highest density of data counts The Color Grade Scale menu displays the color levels and the range of counts the color represents Click the Color Grade Scale button to view the color levels Use gray scaling in the Eye Diagram and Mask Test menus The Eye Diagram and Mask Test measurement algorithms are based on the statistical accumulation of the data that the Gray Scaling mode uses internally The PicoScope 9000 has two color grading settings
151. T Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot lv RMS M SiN Ratio S N Ratio dB Zero Level Mole i Main C Intensified e Delayed SCALE B By pedi a EHEN Dual Delayed Con i off Ext Dir Pos O Hed f Ext HF EN C Int Clk 50 a NRZ RMS definition The RZ RMS is determined as follows it gt VertPos a 1 NRZ RMS E N over all N samples within the measured region i e one standard deviation of the amplitude i e RMS amplitude When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 115 5 4 6 17 ps9000 en Menu NRZ S N Ratio and NRZ S N Ratio dB M S N Ratio NRZ Signal to Noise is a ratio of the signal difference between one level and zero level relative to the noise present at both levels Signal to Noise is similar in construction to a Q factor measurement However noise levels contributed by the instrument cannot be removed and therefore a slightly pessimistic Q facto
152. Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 152 5 4 8 14 RZPeak Peak e Peak Peak RZ Peak Peak is a measure of the difference between the maximum and minimum vertical values of the waveform a Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display Stop sSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo E Te ose Print Help Eye Diagram 1 49 493 TSals Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters MT ac RMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level e Peak Peak RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level Bit Period Bit kate 1 5400 mes A400 Wiis 51 s400 mes de rc Main Intensified Cual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY RZ Peak Peak definition The RZ Peak Peak is determined as follows RZ Peak Peak Max Min where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 153 Menu 5 4 8 15 RZRMS A RZ RMS is a measure of the true root mean square of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScop
153. Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate E 6400 bbs y Mode i Main C Intensified ir Delayed M Dark Level Pa n Total Meas Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Os i Ext Dir fc eles Neg f Ext HF as a EHS ona NRZ Extinction Ratio definition The accuracy of the extinction ratio can be dominated by the accuracy with which the low level was measured This in turn can be significantly affected by any noise generated by the measurement system such as external converters DC offsets or electrical offsets in the instrument electronics When these offsets occur they add to the incoming signal This will change the values of the one and zero levels When the extinction ratio measurement is computed the result may appear much smaller or larger than the true value depending on the value of the offset TO minimize extinction ratio measurement errors due to offsets an extinction ratio calibration is recommended This procedure allows the instrument to identify any internal signals present and remove them during the extinction ratio calculations After the calibration is performed a more accurate extinction ratio measurement can be executed Thus the extinction ratio measurements can be defined in one of the three following formats 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 98 ME Berta Wise aS Meera Vario Pone Mofo ao zero Fidarkc
154. When all the points in the trace record have been sampled and digitized the trace is displayed 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 21 Menu For very slow trigger rates with traces that do not involve math functions or operations a partial trace will be displayed even before all data points are accumulated A trace remains on the display until it is replaced by a more recent acquisition or until you clear the trace Determining the sample interval The sample interval is the time difference represented between successive points on the trace record This is different from the sampling rate which is the actual time that it takes to sample and digitize the successive points in the trace record Since only one point is sampled and digitized after a trigger event the sampling rate is much slower than the sample interval To compute the sample interval divide the time period that the trace record displays by the number of points in the trace record For example if you are display a trace at 10 ns per division and if the trace has 500 points record length is equal to 512 points the sample interval is 10 ns multiplied by 10 divisions and divided by 500 points or 200 ps All traces on the main or intensified time bases have the same record length and horizontal size Similarly all traces on delayed or dual delayed time bases share the same record length and horizontal size This means that the PicoScope 9000
155. XT EtDir pr NE T reco ME Period definition Because the detected edges can be either rising or falling the period is determined as follows Period Tcross3 Tcross1 where Tcross3 and Tcrossi are the times of the first two consecutive crossings on the Same slope at the mid reference level If more than one period can be found within the margins the scope measures the average period The Margins 3 71 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of period value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 249 Menu Period value is affected by the Define Param 20 menu In the Defined Thresholds 2 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 250 5 11 3 2 Frequency Frequency is defined as the inverse of the period 1 period Period is a measure of the time between the mid threshold crossings of two consecutive edges of the same polarity The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology PicoScope
156. Y pardiv Y as mr Trigger Acquistion Vv E NRZ Minimum definition The NRZ minimum eye amplitude is determined as follows NRZ Minimum max VertPos s where s is the set of samples within the eye window Py 3 rot tem i Ext Dir fe poet Neg f Ext HF C Int Clk 50 Display Save Recal Limit Test Mathematics O x Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period EE al gt KE Cual Delayed Con Ot By pedi DELTA DELAY ds When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if avallable O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 105 5 4 6 10 ps9000 en Menu NRZ Negative Overshoot NRZ Negative Overshoot is a measure of the ratio of the minimum value of the measured signal to its amplitude expressed as a percentage The waveform is scanned for the minimum value within the eye window while the amplitude is measured in the Eye Aperture Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz 7 Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Copy E Print Help Eye Diagram 1 g3 Sse 12 GHz 1 493 Tsa Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Unite i Time Bit Period a 812 Y MRZ Eye Paramet
157. YM1 represents the solid line marker If YM1 is more positive than YM2 dYM will be a negative number O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide om 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved Type Cot X fe Y There are three types of markers X markers manual markers Y markers manual markers XY markers waveform markers Click the button for the marker type that you need Off Removes the markers and marker value from display X Markers 190 The X manual markers XM1 and XM2 markers are two vertical lines you can move horizontally The XM1 is displayed as a solid line and the XM2 is displayed as dashed line You can position the X markers anywhere on the display which allows you to make custom measurements The X markers track the time values as the timebase scale is changed which allows you to make accurate delay measurements The position readout is based on the scale factors of the source waveform Marker resolution is limited to the pixel resolution of the display Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Channels Persistence External Direct Clear Display Stop Single Autoscale oes Setup Undo I Copy eee hannel 1 Select f chi Cha on oC Off 2cquire f On Cor OFFSET ETA EtDir a pf i Est HF Print About os al Int Clk C
158. a pulse Is present on the screen Eye measurements are based on statistical data that is acquired and stored in the measurement database The algorithms are dependent upon histogram means calculated from the measurement database Therefore if you want to perform eye measurements it Is necessary that you first produce an eye diagram by triggering the instrument with a synchronous clock signal Measurements made on an RZ eye diagram or a pulse waveform while in the X NRZ Eye Parameters menu will fail Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS S N Ratio T S N Ratio del Zero Level O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 6 1 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d NRZACRMS e LC RMS NRZ AC RMS is a measure of the root mean square amplitude minus the DC component of the selected waveform Pico rechutlaua PicoScope 9000 PC Sampii Oscilloscope 12 GHz m Ol x Print About Eye Diagram 1 45 iS sie Is Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters i AC RMS TF Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB hax Mean hic T Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level
159. a waveform The DELTA DELAY spin box allows you to vary the position of the second delayed timebase relative to the position of the first delayed time base from 0 up to a maximum value of 10 divisions of the main timebase in one of three ways By using the DELTA DELAY spin box By using the corresponding spin box in the Permanent Controls Area 31 e By using the Pop up Keypad 2 If fine mode is off delta delay can be changed in a sequence of 0 5 major divisions of the main timebase When fine mode is on you can change the delay in a sequence of 0 001 major divisions of the main timebase The possible maximum value of the DELTA DELAY variable can be calculated from the following condition Maximum delay Maximum delta delay 10 x SCALE B 10 x SCALE A ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 354 5 16 Trigger Menu The scope trigger circuitry helps you locate the waveform you want to view The oscilloscope uses a reference signal to determine precisely when to acquire data from the signal The data can then be displayed as a function of time relative to the reference signal This reference signal is commonly referred to as a trigger The trigger event when synchronized to the input signal also defines the horizontal acquisition window By choosing the trigger event and adjusting the horizontal position delay between trigger event and the horizontal reference point you c
160. able space on the drive Each setup uses approximately 30 kbytes of disk space Ensure your setup files have the extension set If you do not specify an extension the oscilloscope supplies one automatically If you use a different extension the instrument may not recognize the file as a setup file therefore you may have trouble saving or finding the setup file To recall a setup you have previously saved use the Recall Setup button in the same menu Try to use the Save Setup button to save important setups Remember always to copy important settings and waveforms to an external disk If your original files are damaged or lost you can restore the files from the backup disk 5 13 6 6 Save as Default Clicking the Save as Default button stores the present front panel setup as the default setup You can recall the saved default setup by clicking the Default Setup button in the System Controls 3 area O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 331 Menu 5 14 System Controls Clear Display IE O Stop Sinale Autoscale Default Setup Using the System Controls you control whether the oscilloscope is running or stopped other buttons allow you to reset the oscilloscope to its default setup automatically configure the oscilloscope for the current signals Autoscale or erase the waveforms from the display The System Controls are The Clear Display 32 button The Run 3 button
161. able to make the mask before violations will occur while negative mask margins determine how much smaller you have to make the mask before violations no longer occur You can then use this information to determine by what margin the waveform begins to fail to comply with industry standards To turn on the mask margins check the Margins check box located on each opened list of industry standard masks After mask margins are enabled use the arrows to adjust the percentage of margin you want or use the Pop up Keypadl37 for quickly entering numeric data You can enter a value between 99 and 99 For example if you want to verify that the waveform can comply with a standard mask with a 20 margin set the margin value to 20 You can then increase the size of the margin by increasing the percentage until violations occur The instrument displays the mask margins in a different color than the mask As with a mask any acquired data point that falls inside a mask margin appears in red Two examples of positive and negative are shown on figures below Notice that positive margins appear outside the mask regions while negative margins appear inside the mask regions Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display ke StopiSingle Autoscale Copy E Print Help Mask Test 1 z 14 12 ae O L Persistence External HF Time Base sample 511160045 reate Maszk A
162. acdsee tsa ote sa ee ec erates 407 MOTA EA das 412 ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide V Par D O elects A EE N AE AEE E EA EAE ENEE eS 415 AA a A o o A A 415 DEW A A A E iaa 416 DA R A 417 A A RAR 417 TOTS AENA E SAA AAA A 417 lA tetien sacs estes aeaetosvadsanca nce E ES E I EA E TE 418 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 1 Welcome Thank you for buying a Pico Technology product vanea PicoScope 9211 The PicoScope 9000 Series of PC a as Sd Sampling Oscilloscopes from Pico Technology is a range of wide PicoScope 9201 bandwidth compact units designed to replace traditional bench top sampling oscilloscopes costing many times the price Here are some of the benefits provided by your new PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscope Portability Take the unit with you and plug it into any Windows PC Performance Electrical bandwidth 12 GHz or 8 GHz 10 ps div or faster time base with 5 TS s maximum equivalent sampling rate 200 fs shortest sampling interval up to 10 GHz trigger and fast USB 2 0 interface Powerful built in measurement capabilities High resolution cursors and automatic Pulse NRZ and RZ eye pattern measurements with statistics histograms automated mask test with predefine standard and custom masks waveform processing including FFT Applications Telecom Servi
163. ain traces Use the Measurel 2 f and Markerl187 menus for further spectral measurements of FFT waveforms FFT Resolution Amplitude Resolution Amplitude resolution is influenced by the windowing function used and the vertical adjustment of the time domain waveform For maximum amplitude resolution the time domain waveform should be adjusted so that it is centred vertically on the graticule and is tall as possible without going beyond the graticule above or below Frequency Range and Resolution The range and resolution of the frequency spectrum displayed by the PicoScope 9000 are determined by the sample rate and record length The sample interval is determined by the time base and record length You can increase the record length for better FFT resolution but all points must be on the display for them to be included in the FFT calculation The FFT calculation time will also increase because more waveform samples must be processed The FFT s resolution is expressed as follows FFT Resolution Equivalent Sample Rate Record Length The FFT frequency range before scaling will be from O Hz to one half of the sample rate Ensure that the sample rate is at least twice the highest anticipated frequency component of the waveform source you are measuring Otherwise the measurement results will exhibit aliasing and any measurements will be inaccurate The FFT s frequency range is expressed as follows FFT Frequency Range Equivalent Sampl
164. ak J Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level Bit kate st 400 Wiis hi Main Intensified e 0 e Delayed Total Meas Minima CA BY paldiy Est Dir f Pos O Neg CAIB f Ext HF as a LEEN ona NRZ Positive Overshoot definition The NRZ Positive Overshoot is determined as follows Y max Pone MARZ Fostvebvershoot a 00 Mane zero where Vmax is the signal maximum and Vone and Vzero are the logical 1 and O levels Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 114 5 4 6 16 NRZ RMS NRZ RMS is a measure of the true root mean square amplitude of the selected waveform within the eye window Pico Tecnnoicdi PicoScope 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz m Oj x Eye Diagram 493 T5alz Hz 1 493 Tas Persistence External HF ve Parameters Y NRZ Eye Paramet DT ac RMS TF Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB hax Mean hic
165. al currents into the Earth ECL Emitter coupled logic an unsaturated logic performed by emitter coupled transistors Usually ECL logic 1 1 6 V and logic 0 0 8 V Edge Triggering Edge triggering is the traditional scope triggering mode A trigger event is defined as a transitioning edge of a specified polarity slope crossing a specified voltage threshold level Effective Sample Rate In the equivalent time sampling mode a waveform record is built up by sequential or random repetitive samples taken from multiple trigger events This process allows samples in the waveform record to be spaced more closely together for repetitive waveforms As a result the waveforms appear to have been sampled at a much higher rate sometimes referred to as an effective sample rate The effective sample rate is calculated by the formula O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 388 Effective sample rate Record length Time length of the record This is the same as 1 time between the sample points Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The ability of electronic equipment to operate in an intended electromagnetic environment without degradation caused by interference and to operate in its electromagnetic environment without creating interference with other equipment EMI Electromagnetic interference caused by current or voltage induced into a signal conductor by an electromagnetic field Env
166. alling edge will appear very steep on the display screen If the falling edge of your eye diagram is steep increase the timebase horizontal scale on the display so that the falling edge covers at least half a graticule division The instrument will be able to discern the data at the threshold levels producing more accurate results O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 127 5 4 7 7 ps9000 en Menu RZ Jitter P p Fall and RZ Jitter RMS Fall RZ Jitter P p Fall and RZ Jitter RMS Fall are the measures of signal instability relative to its ideal position in time Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display un Stop Single A toov Print sbot Eye Diagram a ee Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Area Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Bit kate st A400 Wiis Eye width Main Fall Time Intensified f Delayed e Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Con t amp off iv E f Ext Dir a na Pos Ne f Ext HF E DELTA DELA a Os h Int Clk Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics RZ Jitter P p Fall and RZ Jitter RMS Fall definition
167. alue is 20 of the NRZ bit time ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 110 5 4 6 13 NRZ One Level Eye Diagram l z Hz 1 49 TE Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Time Bit Period Y NRZ Eye Paramet DT AC RMS TF Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB D Mas Mean hic F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero e One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SIN Ratio S N Ratio dB Zero Level Bit kate Js 5400 mb Main Intensified e Delayed Current Total Meas Minima CEDE pos Neg Ext HF EHEN Int Clk 50 NRZ One Level definition Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines histogram mean The One Level is determined as follows NRZ One Level Histogram Mean All data a
168. ameters Eye Diagram ye Parameters The list of Y RZ Eye Parameters includes twenty six eye parameters Two of the them Avg Power and Avg Power dBm can be used in optical models only Y RE Eye Paramete PT AC RMS Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FT ContrastRatio ce ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max FT Mean tied T Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak FMS Signal to Noise Zero Level You can perform up to four simultaneous measurements on one displayed waveforms The measurement algorithms for Y RZ Eye Parameters will only work when an RZ eye diagram and not an NRZ eye diagram or a pulse Is present on the screen Eye measurements are based on statistical data that is acquired and stored in the measurement database The algorithms depend upon histogram means calculated from the measurement database Therefore if you want to perform eye measurements it Is necessary that you first produce an eye diagram by triggering the instrument with a synchronous clock signal Measurements made on NRZ eye diagram or a pulse waveform while in the X RZ Eye Parameters menu will fail 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 137 Menu 5 4 8 1 RZACRMS e LC RMS RZ AC RMS is a measu
169. an RZ eye diagram or a pulse Is present on the screen Eye measurements are based on statistical data that is acquired and stored in the measurement database The algorithms are dependent upon histogram means calculated from the measurement database Therefore if you want to perform eye measurements it Is necessary that you first produce an eye diagram by triggering the instrument with a synchronous clock signal Measurements made on an RZ eye diagram or a pulse waveform while in the X NRZ Eye Parameters menu will fail 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 78 5 4 5 1 NRZ Area NRZ Area is a measure of the area under the curve for the NRZ waveform within the full display window The area measured above ground is positive the area measured below ground is negative The NRZ Area is determined as follows iv NRE Area gt FertPos s im over all N samples s in the measured region full display window of duration At Pico Techno cdi PicoScope 9000 PC Sar Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Print About Channels ll ts 46 Persistence External Direct Time Base hannel 1 Time Base i Chi che Time Bit Period on Off Bit kate 5400 mz Main O Intensified fe Delayed 2cquire f On O off n Total Meas Minima y 690 138 1 pz Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY
170. an acquisition mode that runs the sampler at a very high equivalent rate even though the timebase setting would dictate a slower sampling rate The oversampled data is processed so that a maximum and minimum pair is stored for each time bucket for display Using this mode will ensure that very fast extremes of a waveform such as glitches will be captured and displayed Period 1 The amount of time it takes a wave to complete one cycle Period equals 1 frequency 2 A full period is the time measured between the first and third 50 crossing points medial points of a cyclic waveform Periodic Jitter Periodic Jitter is one component of Deterministic Jitter Periodic Jitter is predictable and not data related and often has Sinusoidal Jitter SJ as a component 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 403 ps9000 en Glossary Persistence Persistence is a display mode in which old waveform data is left on the display for a specified period of time You can select persistence settings of variable or infinite There are different persistence modes avallable in the instrument Variable Infinite Gray Scaled and Color Graded Phase A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or lags the other in time Phase is expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one complete cycle of one of the waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the
171. ance Ground does not serve as a return path for the signal Balanced sampling gate A type of sampling gate arranged so that strobe currents are balanced to minimise kick out from the input connector of the sampler Bandwidth or BW 1 The bandwidth BW of the oscilloscope is the frequency range at which the channel input circuits attenuate the waveform by 3 dB 70 7 of maximum In modern specifications bandwidth refers to the highest frequency signal the oscilloscope can acquire with no more than 3 dB 0 707 attenuation of the original reference signal The PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope has a low frequency response that extends to DC 2 I1n normal use the frequency range over which the gain of an amplifier or other circuit does not vary by more than 3 dB 3 A range of frequencies over which a system works without degrading the original signal Bandwidth Full or Narrow When Narrow Bandwidth is enabled the high frequency noise of a waveform Is reduced When Narrow Bandwidth is enabled it is easier to view on noisy waveforms Bandwidth Limit or BW Limit The bandwidth limit is the instrument control that reduces the high frequency noise of a waveform by the use of a low pass filter in the channel or trigger path of the instrument Signals with high frequency content may be distorted when the bandwidth is limited Base Base is the statistically most prevalent voltage value below the waveform midpoint Base l
172. ard rates the scale and delay functions will coincide with this rate The following bit rates are standard selections when you select Bit Period 24 as the horizontal time base scale units Bit Rate 1 544 Mbit s 2 048 Mbit s 3 152 Mbit s 6 312 Mbit s 8 448 Mbit s 34 368 Mbit s 44 736 Mbit s 51 84 Mbit s 125 0 Mbit sl 132 813 Mbit s 139 264 Mbit s 155 52 Mbit s 265 625 Mbit s 466 56 Mbit s 531 25 Mbit s 622 08 Mbit s 933 12 Mbit s 1 0625 Gbit s 1 24416 Gbit s 1 250 Gbit s 1 86624 Gbit s 2 12500 Gbit s 2 48832 Gbit s 2 5000 Gbit s 2 66606 Gbit s 3 1250 Gbit s 3 1870 Gbit s 3 3200 Gbit s 9 95328 Gbit s 10 3125 Gbit s 10 51875 Gbit s 10 6642 Gbit s 10 709 Gbit s 11 0975 Gbit s 12 2495 Gbit s 19 90656 Gbit s 39 81312 Gbit s 42 65691 Gbit s 43 01841 Gbit s ps9000 en Standard DS1 PDH 2 048 Mb DS1C DS2 PDH 8 448 Mb PDH 34 4 Mb DS3 STMO OC1 FDDI FC133 DS4 PDH 139 Mb STM1 0C3 FC266 OC9 FC531 STM4 0C12 OC18 FC1063 OC24 Gb Ethernet OC36 STM16 0C48 2XGb Ethernet Infiniband FEC 2666 XAUI FC3187 12x Parallel Optics STM64 0C192 10Gb Ethernet 10GFC FEC 1066 FEC 1071 STM 64 0C 192 SuperFEC STM 128 0C 384 STM 256 0C 768 FEC 4266 FEC 4302 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 346 5 15 3 Time Base Mode The Mode menu provides Main Intensified Delayed or Dual Delayed timebase modes using time windowing The Time Bas
173. arithmic Sets the display of the histogram results to dB 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 185 Menu 5 6 6 2 Scale Mode Auto Manual The Scale Mode menu determines how much of the histogram is displayed on the screen Auto If the Axis menu is set to Horizontal the Auto sets the base of the histogram to the bottom of the graticule area and displays the histogram using half of the graticule height If the Axis menu is set to Vertical the Auto sets the base of the histogram to the left edge of the graticule area and displays the histogram using half of the graticule width Manual Manual lets you window in on the histogram by allowing you to change the scale and offset settings Depending on the setting of the Scale Type menu the scale value is in either percent of a division or dB By changing the scale you can zoom in or out on the histogram Offset allows you to pan across the histogram by moving the base of the histogram Depending on the setting of the Scale Type menu the offset value is also in either percent of peak or dB per division 5 6 6 3 SCALE Linear scale For the linear scale type the scale is the percentage of the peak per division For example on a horizontal histogram 20 places one fifth of the histogram in each of eight divisions with the top of the peak 100 at the middle of the display Logarithmic scale For the log scale type the scale is i
174. at each of the three threshold levels for example the 20 50 and 80 points on the transition The instrument analyses each histogram to determine the histogram mean at which the data crosses the separate threshold levels Once the scanning of the waveform is complete and the instrument has identified the mean location for each threshold crossed then fall time can be computed RZ Rise Time Time at the Upper Threshold Crossing Time at the Lower Threshold Crossing The default setting for the threshold levels is between the 20 and 80 points on the transition These levels give more consistent results for eyes with distortion at the top or bottom You can define the threshold settings that you want in the Define Parameters 1 menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 135 Menu If the rise time relative to the time per division is a small value the data acquired at the threshold levels on the falling edge will not yield accurate measurement results The rising edge will appear very steep on the display screen If the rising edge of your eye diagram is steep increase the timebase horizontal scale on the display so that the rising edge covers at least half a graticule division The instrument will be able to discern the data at the threshold levels producing more accurate results ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 136 5 4 0 Y RZ Eye Par
175. ata in single cycles Acquisition control also allows you to enable waveform averaging enveloping or peak detecting and record length points per waveform Acquisition Interval The time duration of the waveform record divided by the record length The oscilloscope displays one data point for every acquisition interval Acquisition System The acquisition system is a combination of hardware and firmware that converts an analog input waveform into discrete digital values and assembles the waveform samples into a waveform record Acquisition Time In a sample and hold or track and hold circuit the time required after the sample or track command for the output to slew through a full scale voltage change and settle to its final value within a specified error band AC RMS The AC RMS is a modified RMS root mean square measurement It removes the DC component of the waveform from the calculation of the RMS voltage ADC Analog to Digital Converter The ADC is the part of the hardware acquisition system in a sampling oscilloscope that converts the analog input waveform into discrete digital values which make up the waveform record Several characteristics of the ADC such as sample rate resolution accuracy and linearity directly relate to the oscilloscope s performance 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 378 Alias Nyquist s sampling theorem says that a signal must be sampled at
176. ata to both enhance desirable and to remove undesirable aspects of the data Digital to analog conversion The process that changes discrete values into a voltage or current Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a Set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitising comprises two steps sampling and quantization Display Update Rate In digital scopes the number of trigger events that the scope can capture and display is referred to as its update rate Unlike an analog scope digital scopes require time to move the sampled data to memory display the acquired data do any post processing math such as Amplitude or Frequency measurements and re arm the trigger circuitry for the next acquisition Technology advances have greatly improved the update rate in digital scopes Better update rate in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a Significant event Display window The time window represented within the horizontal limits of the graticule 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 387 6 5 ps9000 en Glossary Dithering Typically used when averaging signals which have low noise content to improve vertical resolution and decrease the effects of an ADC s non linearities The technique applies different offsets to each incoming waveform to ensure the signal is not always digitized by the same po
177. ation purposes Blind Time In digital scopes the blind time or dead time is the time from the end of one data acquisition to the beginning of the next acquisition Better update rate in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a significant event Blow by A display aberration caused by signal induced current through the sampling gate shunt capacitance The nature of the aberration depends on the circuit time constants Bode plots The amplitude and phase plots as a function of frequency are known as Bode plots The logarithmic amplitude thus defined is measured in dB Brightness The value associated with a pixel that represents a gray value between black and white O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 382 6 3 C CCD Charge Coupled Device An integrated circuit that allows the transfer of a variable amount of charge through a series of cells an analog shift register Channel A path through an arrangement of components modules and electrical or optical cabling or both along which signals can be sent Also an input used for signal acquisition The PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope has two input channels Channel Ground Reference Indicator The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to O V otherwise
178. ave entered Cir Clear Clears any numbers you have entered Backspace Use the backspace key to erase the character to the left of the insertion point Exp Exponent The number you enter after pressing this key is an exponent of 10 ps9000 en 377 6 1 ps9000 en Glossary Glossary A AC Alternating Current A signal in which the current and voltage vary in a repeating pattern over time AC Coupling AC coupling removes the DC component of the waveform from the channel input or the trigger path Only the AC portion of the waveform is displayed or used in the trigger path You can use AC coupling to view an AC waveform with greater sensitivity or to trigger on an AC waveform that is riding on a DC waveform Accuracy 1 The closeness of the indicated value to the true value 2 The percentage of error possible in transferring the signal through the vertical and horizontal channels Acquisition Acquisition is the process of sampling an analog input waveform digitising the samples and storing the samples in memory The stored values represent the waveform record which can be displayed as a waveform on the scope display analysed or transferred to a computer or a disk for further analysis The trigger marks time in that process The Acquisition control allows you to define the way the instrument acquires data from the input waveform You can set up the instrument to continuously acquire data or you Can acquire d
179. aveform will become saturated with the color of highest hits You can use the color graded persistence mode to display waveforms that use the instrument s measurement database This database consists of all data samples displayed on the screen The measurement database provides the data for the construction of histograms and the generation of mask tests Common Mode Range The maximum range usually voltage within which differential inputs can operate without a loss of accuracy O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 383 ps9000 en Glossary Common Mode Rejection Ratio How well the common mode voltage is cancelled at different frequencies 60 dB means that 1V of common mode voltage results in 1 mV at the oscilloscope input 20 x log 1 W 1 mV 60 dB Common Mode Signal Noise The signal usually noise that appears equally and in phase on each of the differential signal conductors to ground Comparator A circuit that compares two signals and changes a binary output when one signal exceeds the other Compensation Compensation is an adjustment process that maximizes the bandwidth of a probe by precisely adjusting the capacitor in the probe such that the input capacitance of the scope is canceled Probe compensation is typically accomplished by connecting the probe to a calibrator waveform built in the scope and performing a simple adjustment to the probe to make sure the displayed square wave is as sq
180. averaging 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 53 Menu D Waveform persistence is used only in the Display Area Use waveform persistence in the Eye Diagram and Mask Test menus The Eye Diagram and Mask Test measurement algorithms are based on the statistical accumulation of the data The PicoScope 9000 uses two persistence settings Variable Persistence Infinite Persistence Variable Persistence The Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform record points on screen and displays them for a specific time The oldest waveform data continuously fades from the display as new waveform records are acquired By selecting the Variable Persistence display style you can vary the persistence time from minimum of 100 ms to 20 s When the persistence is set to minimum all data points are kept on the display for 100 ms After 100 ms all the previous data points are erased from the display and new data points are written to the display As you increase the persistence time the previous data points are kept on the display depending on the persistence time you have selected Therefore the longer the persistence time the longer each data point is left on the display before it is erased from the display You can change the persistence time with the PERSISTENCE TIME variable A minimum persistence setting is used when the input signal is changing and you need Immediate feedback You can use the minimum persisten
181. c RMS definition dc RMS measurement is determined as follows de Riia where n is the number of waveform points on screen and not the memory depth and V i is the voltage at the th point on screen The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the dc RMS value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 284 5 11 4 10 ac RMS Y lac RMS ac RMS is the root mean square voltage of the waveform less the mean value over the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either ac or dc RMS measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz oO x Clear Display Run StopSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy eee Print About Measure 12 GHZ E e GHz 50 GSalz External Direct Time Base Y Parameters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Persistence Amplitude Paramete Maximum Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude T Middle Mean MT de RMS e ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle de RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot
182. cale for the function If two operands have different horizontal scale settings possibly when using a waveform memory as a operand the resulting function has the same horizontal scale as operand 1 Constant operands have the same time scale as the associated waveform operand e You can use each function as an operand for another function This allows you to construct equations with a large number of operators and operands If you select a math operator that uses more than one operand select the source 2 from the Operand 2 drop down list box When the Constant option is selected in the Operand 2 drop down list box the CONSTANT 2 variable becomes active 5 10 5 Constant EE EINE You can use the CONSTANT variable to control the value of operand 2 from 100 million to 100 million ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 240 5 10 6 SMOOTH LENGTH SMOOTH LENGTH The SMOOTH LENGTH variable defines the number of points N in the moving average filter used for the smoothing operator N point smoothing can be selected from 3 up to 51 points O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 241 5 11 ps9000 en Menu Measure Menu Measure With automatic measurements you just press a few buttons and the sampling oscilloscope does the calculations for you Because these measurements use the waveform record points directly they are more accu
183. can select one of two gain options Y Gain Gainis a gain expressed as an amplitude gain between the amplitudes of two waveforms Y Gain dB es Gain dB is a gain expressed in decibels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 299 Menu Pico Techni PicoScope 9000 PC Sana Oscilloscope 12 GHz 4 Oo xj GO Print About Measure 12 GH 1 Vectors External Direct Time Base Wal Chan Parameter Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate st 400 Wiis Timing Parameters Delay 1R 1R Delay 1R 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F nF Delay 1R 0F Delay 1F nF Delay 1F nF Phase Deg Phaze Rad Phase SCALE B 1 naidi Amplitude Paramete W Gain W Gain dB Gual Delayed A Minimum i z Con 0 DELTA DELAY ls Back ie A 2 nsidiv Ext Dir i Pos Neg Pad 0 Ext HF o Cnc A Example of gain measurement between two sine wave signals The Margins 307 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Gain value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 11 6 Define Parameters Measure efine Parar Statistics Histogram Mint Max User Defined 105 50
184. categories Signals that are repetitive The displayed waveforms are constructed from samples taken over multiple repetitions of the waveform A trigger signal synchronous with the data is needed to control the timing of the sampling process Signals that are not repetitive but are synchronous with a trigger signal The primary example of a non repetitive signal is the measurement of digital data streams or eye diagrams with the oscilloscope triggered by a synchronous clock signal ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 358 5 16 1 Source Ext Direct Ext Prescaler Internal Clock Clock Recovery O Advanced The source provides the signal that the trigger system monitors The Source function displays a list of the available trigger sources There are four sources that the PicoScope 9000can use for a trigger External Direct e External Prescaler Internal Clock Clock Recovery PicoScope 9201 only External Direct Connect an external trigger source to the DIRECT TRIGGER INPUT SMA female The External Direct trigger source is an edge trigger Use this mode when the trigger signal is in the frequency range DC to 1 GHz The DIRECT TRIGGER INPUT female connector is a DC coupled input with 50 Q input impedance CAUTION To avoid damage to the DIRECT TRIGGER INPUT of the scope make sure you do not exceed the maximum rated input voltage 2 V DC peak
185. ce and Manufacturing Digital System Design Semiconductor Characterization and Testing High Speed digital pulse measurements TDR characterization of circuit boards IC packages and cables o Flexibility Use it as a sampling oscilloscope spectrum analyzer communications Signal analyzer or time domain reflectometer Long term support Software upgrades are available to download from our website You can also call our technical specialists for support You can continue to use both of these services free of charge for the lifetime of the product Value for money You don t have to pay twice for all the features that you already have in your PC as the PicoScope 9000 Series sampling scope unit contains the Special hardware you need and nothing more Convenience The software makes full use of the large display storage user interface and networking built in to your PC 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 22 ps9000 en Introduction Introduction Overview The PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes are high bandwidth sampling oscilloscopes for use with personal computers They are fully USB 2 0 capable and backwards compatible with USB 1 1 You also can communicate with the PicoScope 9211 over the scope s built in LAN interface With the PicoScope 9000 software the PicoScope 9000 Series scopes can be used as a PC Sampling Oscilloscopes and PC Spectrum Analyzers For basic instructions on
186. ce mode to view the fastest display update rate For example if you are rapidly probing a source you may find that more persistence Is useful for observing long term changes in a signal or observing Signals with low repetition rates More persistence is useful when you are observing long term changes in the signal or low signal repetition rates If you are adjusting the amplitude or frequency of a signal source you may find that more persistence variable or infinite is useful for observing long term changes in a signal or observing signals with low repetition rates If you are adjusting signal parameters such as scale or delay you will find that minimum persistence is useful due to the fast update rate When the waveform acquisition is stopped the last acquired data points are left on the display If one of the following is changed when the instrument is in the variable persistence mode the displayed waveform is redrawn and any accumulated waveforms are cleared Clear Display button is pressed An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed The instrument is turned off ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 54 Infinite Persistence When you select the Infinite Persistence display style all the data points are kept on the display for an endless period of time or until you change some control Waveform data builds up as new data records are acquired Y
187. ce on the first page of the T Measure menu Click Define Param 30 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 313 5 11 8 1 5 11 8 2 5 11 8 3 5 11 8 4 ps9000 en Menu Method Two modes are used to define FFT peaks Harmonic Peak Harmonic A peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among other peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 20 and RIGHT MARGIN 2 8 variables F1 is a fundamental frequency of a peak 1 A frequency of n th harmonics is calculated as follows Fn n Fi Peak A peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 313 variable LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN variables limit a horizontal Spectrum window used for a peak 1 definition When Harmonic is selected in the Methodl 31 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among other peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN variables PEAK LEVEL The PEAK LEVEL defines the threshold that an FFT peak must cross to be considered a peak The default peak level is 20 dBmvV PEAK LEFT and PEAK RIGHT PEAK LEFT defines which of the peaks counting from the left of the display you want to start making FFT measurements on When Harmonic is selected in the Method 313 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among ot
188. ce the beginning points are usually zero and the data tapers to zero at the end of the record The beginning points are zero because the impulse is normally placed in the centre of the time domain record at the zero phase reference point Other windows can be used if desired If phase is not important the impulse can be placed at the beginning of the record For this case the window must be Rectangular 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 170 did dl Rectangular Window The rectangular window also referred to as the Uniform window is essentially no window because the samples are left unchanged All points in the record are multiplied by 1 In the frequency domain the filter shape is sin x x RECTANGULAR Time domain characteristics for rectangular window The rectangular window is useful for transient signals and signals where there are an integral number of cycles in the time record It is the best window to use when you want to examine the frequency spectrum of a non repetitive signal Also it can be typically used for impulse response testing since the beginning points are usually zero and the data tapers to zero at the end of the record The beginning points are zero because the impulse is normally placed in the centre of the time domain record at the zero phase reference point Other windows can be used if desired If phase is not important the impulse can be placed at the begi
189. ces exhibit when driven with a broadband noise signal Noise floor 1 The level below which no information can be obtained from a signal A signal that occurs below a noise floor is permanently lost 2 The minimum discernible signal that can be detected by a receiver Noise Reject Noise Reject is a trigger conditioning setting that makes the trigger circuitry less sensitive to noise You can use noise reject when triggering on noisy waveforms minimise the possibility of false triggering Basically noise reject increases the trigger hysteresis band so that noise on a waveform will not generate a trigger NOR An OR circuit except with a complementary negative true output Normalization Normalization is a TDR measurement technique that removes impedance discontinuities at the reference plane Characteristic impedance measurements are more accurate after the discontinuities are removed A waveform is derived in the normalization process and represents the systematic errors of the input signal This waveform is subtracted from the waveform of the device under test The subtracted result is then put through a digital filter to yield the response waveform Normal Trigger Mode A mode in which the oscilloscope does not acquire a waveform record unless a valid trigger event occurs It waits for a valid trigger event before acquiring waveform data Normal trigger mode or triggered requires that the trigger conditions be met before the a
190. cope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About 1 Sas 26 Eye Diagram 501 GHz 1 Persistence External Direct Time Base sample ve Parameters Time Base RZ Eye Paramete 7 Bit Rate Bit Period 7 Bit Time Bit Rate Eye width Eye idth TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise T Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Total Meas Minima Hz 316 25 Bitis Con i off i Ext HF DELTA DELAY ead as Ez q E Ul Int Eik 250 mi i Ext Dir Post Neg 100 my RZ Bit Rate definition To compute bit time period the 50 heights of consecutive eyes are first determined Then a vertically thin measurement window is placed horizontally through the 50 levels The data within this measurement window is analysed The measurement window is created to be extremely small so that the measurement is not affected by the fall or rise time of the waveforms Once the bit period has been determined the inverse value is calculated to determine the RZ bit rate 1 1 RZ BitRate _ ________ RZ _BitTime arcos Traces where TRightCross and TLeftCross are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive crossings on the rising slope at the mid reference l
191. corresponding maximum value in the roof record it is used to replace the previous value Whenever a given data point of the new waveform is smaller than the corresponding floor value it is used to replace the previous value Eye Diagram or Pattern Eye Diagrams are digital communication waveforms that consist of pseudo random patterns of ones and zeros which are best displayed as multivalued waveforms for analysis Eye diagrams are multivalued waveforms because each point on the time axis has several voltage values associated with it Single valued waveforms such as sine waves square waves and triangle waves have a single voltage value associated with each point on the time axis When analysing a digital communication waveform single valued displays are not very useful By using infinite persistence feature you can view eye diagrams Eye Height Eye height is a measure of the vertical opening of an eye diagram Eye Opening Factor Eye Opening Factor is a measure of the vertical opening of an RZ eye diagram A noise contribution of 10 is subtracted from from the logic mean levels Eye Width Eye width is a measure of the horizontal opening of an eye diagram Eye Window The eye window provides the time boundaries within which signal parameters for eye diagrams are measured F Fall Time 1 Fall time is the time interval on a falling edge of a waveform between an upper threshold usually the 90 point and a lower threshold
192. cquisition process terminates If the trigger conditions are not met new input data cannot be displayed The normal or triggered mode is the desired mode of triggering when you know the trigger conditions and want a stable trigger An alternative to the normal or triggered mode is the auto trigger mode which will force a trigger after a period of time if trigger conditions are not met O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 401 6 15 ps9000 en Glossary NRZ Non return to zero A type of signal coding that ensures that in any one bit period the signal is turned on for the entire duration of a logical one pulse and turned off or nearly off for the entire duration of a logical zero pulse Number of Points The FFT is computed over the number of points Transform Size whose upper bounds are the source number of points and by the maximum number of points selected in the menu The FFT generates spectrums of N 2 output points Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist frequency is equal to one half of the effective sampling frequency after decimation Af x N 2 Nyquist point The minimum sampling frequency as defined by the Nyquist Sampling Theorem which requires that a signal be sampled at a minimum rate equal to twice the input signal frequency for faithful reproduction Sampling below this frequency will lead to aliasing O Offset Offset moves the waveform vertically up or down on the Y axis of the display It
193. ct Spectrum 1 sl Os Display w on Of vectors Source WERT POSITION HORIZ SCALE al Chi PU Iw 400 miv Trigger f Ext Dir oo 8 Neg f Ext HF Os cno EES FFT having small amount of leakage A solution to the leakage problem is to force the waveform to zero at the beginning and end of the time record so that no transient is present when the time record is replicated This is done by multiplying the time record by a window function which produces its own effect in the frequency domain However the effect produced by the window function Is a big improvement over using no window function at all Windowing Process The process of windowing the data is shown below The FFT time domain record is multiplied point by point with the FFT window When the Hanning or Blackman Harris window is used the data point amplitudes taper to zero at the end of the record We pigor Lobe Width nes pre Frequency domai dorian data record EGOIT Tire dornah eco Multiplying the time domain data record by a window ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 168 When using windows be sure that the most interesting parts of the signal in the time domain record are positioned in the centre of the window so the tapering does not cause significant errors Types of FFT Window Rect angular 1 Hamming Hanning Flattop Blackman
194. cted file from a disk into one of the memories M1 M4 Clicking the Load button opens the Windows Load Waveform dialog box and allows you to select which subdirectory waveform and file format you want to recall Load Waveform Look ir E Waveform Files de 4 o E My Recent E Zero wfr Documents a a Deskto p E My Documents y AE File name Places Files of type Binary format wr Cancel dh J Windows Waveform Files dialog box You can select one of three types of waveform formats Binary format with wfm extension e Text format with txt extension Both formats with wfm and txt extensions You can also specify in the to Memory menu to which one of the four waveform memories M1 M4 you want to load the file 5 13 5 6 to Memory The to Memory menu selects which of the available memory locations the instrument loads the saved file into O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 325 Menu 5 13 6 Setup ps9000 en TO save a current setup for later use you can use any drive available to the PicoScope 9000 s PC When you save a setup all of PicoScope 9000 s settings including measurements markers horizontal and vertical control settings trigger configuration color scheme and math functions are saved The Setup menu allows you to save and recall setups You can use the setup memories when you want to Save a series
195. cts you from inadvertently overwriting an existing file O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 321 Menu 5 13 5 4 Save The Save button stores the selected waveformto a disk Clicking the Save button performs one of the following 1 Waveform File is selected in the File Typel3 menu while Manual is selected in the File Namel si menu Clicking the Save button opens the Windows Load Waveform dialog box which allows you select the type of format you want to save the waveform as ci Es Look ir E Waveform Files de Soo Wm awf My Recent E Zero Weer Documents Deskto p My Documents pr My Computer ale AE File name Places Files of type Binary format wr Cancel re Windows Load Waveform dialog box You can select one of three types of waveform format Binary format with wfm extension e Text format with txt extension e Both formats with wfm and txt extensions The Waveform Files dialog box also allows you to create subdirectories rename waveform files or overwrite existing waveform files The Save feature saves only the current acquired data from the signal Therefore the recalled waveform will be displayed as a single trace This method of saving the waveform is not the preferred process if you want to save a waveform that is using the measurement database for example saving persistence or color graded traces or eye diagrams a
196. d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 402 Overshoot Negative A time domain parameter in waveform measurements equal to the base value of a waveform minus the minimum sample value expressed as a percentage of the amplitude Overshoot Positive A time domain parameter in waveform measurements equal to the maximum sample value minus the top value expressed as a percentage of the amplitude The top value is the most probable state determined from a statistical distribution of data point values in the waveform 6 16 P Pass Fail Testing Post acquisition testing of a waveform against a reference mask or of waveform parameters against reference values Pattern Dependency Pattern dependency is the behavior of a waveform as it is influenced by the preceding data pattern For example a logic level one that follows a logic level zero may have a different amplitude than a logic level one that follows a previously generated logic level one Pattern Triggering Pattern triggering qualifies the trigger event by having the scope search for a pattern using the selected channel inputs You can define the pattern as a combination of highs lows or don t care levels Input channel voltages above the selected voltage level are highs while voltages below the selected voltage level are lows Peak to Peak Amplitude voltage measurement of the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude Peak Detect Peak detect is
197. d Con t off DELTA DELAY Pos NRZ Mean definition The NRZ mean is determined as follows 1 iv ARE Mean mear VeriPos s za PeriPosls i l over all samples s within the eye window When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 103 Menu 5 4 6 8 NRZMid NRZ Mid is a measure of the middle level between the Max and Min vertical values of the eye window Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy a Print Help 49 i z 1 453 fs Eye Diagram SS Time Base ve Parameters Time Base f Time Bi Period 49 iz 1 49 Persistence Y AR Eye Paramet DT AC RMS Avg Power Avg Power der Crossing alt Rale Crossing Level st 8400 Mbs Ext Ratio dB Est Ratio Ext Ratio Mode 7 Eye Amplitude Main Eye Height C Intensified Eye Height dB Delayed hax Mean I hic T Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level 67 pedir gt KE Cual Delayed Con t off Current Total eas Minima
198. d The rate at which the sweep moves across the display The sweep speed is expressed in units of time per division for example 1 ns div 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 412 6 20 T Test Template A general form of waveshape limit test which defines an arbitrary limit or non uniform tolerance on each measured point in a waveform Text Verbose An ASCII text file format that uses alphanumeric characters to represent the voltage values of a waveform This format includes header information about the waveform and when it was acquired The text file formats are a convenient method for transferring waveforms to other computer applications Threshold The voltage or current level at which a circuit will respond to a signal at its input Also referred to as trigger level Throughput Throughput is the rate at which the scope can acquire display and make measurements on a waveform The faster the throughput of a scope the more waveforms per second that it can process Faster throughput in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a significant event TIFF or tif TIFF or tif is a high quality graphics file format that can be imported into other applications for documentation purposes Widely supported across platforms PC Mac UNIX its better quality makes it a format of choice for master copies but results in larger file sizes Time Base Oscilloscope ci
199. dary 2 Histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the eye window boundaries One histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram one level and the second histogram is composed of data points from the lower half of the eye zero level The instrument analyses the histograms and determines the histogram means 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 141 ps9000 en Menu The accuracy of the extinction ratio measurement can be affected by offsets including the dark level generated within the instrument electronics typically following the photodiode When these offsets occur they add to the incoming signal This will change the values of the one and zero levels When the extinction ratio measurement is computed the result may appear much smaller or larger than the true value depending on the value of the offset To minimize extinction ratio measurement errors due to offsets an extinction ratio calibration is recommended This procedure allows the instrument to identify any internal signals present and remove them during the extinction ratio calculations After the calibration is performed a more accurate extinction ratio measurement can be executed With a valid extinction ratio calibration the extinction ratio measurement is computed and can be displayed in one of the three following formats CneLevelleve center DarkLevel Ke _ amp xtinc
200. dth Full Narrow DESKEN Alt Acq Screen E A BE E Et e posf Neg C ASB Ext HF V Eg z Ca os Int Clk ov Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics ad y a Y Dot Display Style O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 51 ps9000 en Menu Vector display The Vector function draws a straight line through the data points on the display This is also known as Connect Waveform Dots The Vector style gives an analogue look to a digitized waveform and makes it possible to see steep edges on waveforms such as square waves If you use the Vector style the approximate unaliased oscilloscope bandwidth is Bandwidth Equivalent Sample Rate 10 In this configuration a waveform can alias if its highest frequency component exceeds 1 10 the sample rate On waveforms where there are only a few dots representing the acquired data points such as when the record length is small you may find it easier to have a sense of what the waveform looks like It is not recommended to view eye diagrams when Vectors Style is enabled For this reason do not use the Vectors Style in the Eye Diagram and Mask Test menus Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz oO x Clear Display Run Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy a Print About Channels ae 3 12 GHZ 2 Test Exte
201. e Same time 39 automatic measurements available Maximum Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude Middle Mean DC RMS AC RMS Area Cycle Middle Cycle Mean Cycle DC RMS Cycle AC RMS Cycle Area Positive Overshoot Negative Overshoot Period Frequency Positive Width Negative Width Rise Time Fall Time Positive Duty Cycle Negative Duty Cycle Positive Crossing Negative Crossing Burst Width Cycles Time at Maximum Time at Minimum Delay Gain FFT Magnitude FFT Delta Magnitude THD FFT Frequency FFT Delta Frequency Display minimum maximum mean and standard deviation on any displayed waveform measurements Histogram Min Max or User Defined in absolute voltage Settable in percentage voltage or divisions Standard thresholds are 10 50 90 or 20 50 80 Any region of the waveform may be isolated for measurement using vertical bars Repetitive or Single shot Signals can be tested by up to ten automatic parametric measurements and compared to user defined test boundaries Failure tolerances can be selected independently for each of the parametric tests Limit test can be set to run continuously for a user selected number of waveforms or for a defined number of failures Beep Save failed waveformto disk or Stop acquisition ps9000 en 17 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 ps9000 en Mathematics Waveform Math Math Operators Operands FFT FFT Frequency Span Frequency Resolut
202. e count To enable mask counting click the On button in the Test menu If mask testing is on you can read the results listed in the Measurement Area of the GUI These values are displayed on tabs Notice that any acquired data point that falls inside a mask or a mask margin appears in red The Mask Test tab displays the relevant test results Pico Techno ddi PicoScope 9000 PC Samping Oscilloscope 12 GHz 3 Oj x Mask Test 1 493 T gt als iz 1 4935 TSals Persistence External HF le 57111600485 ask Test Create Mask 7 Bit Period Erase Mask Bit Rate A400 Wiis y ai Main Intensified f Delayed Compare with f Chi O che Con t Off Dual Delayed Con t off Direct Prescaler C Int Clk 50 E An example of Mask Test O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 232 5 7 5 Run Until Action The Run Until Action button gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to specify the following functions e When the instrument should stop running the mask test What the instrument does with the test data after each failure of the mask test or after the mask test is complete Did 1 Run Until Stop Single f Failed Vvime Failed Samples D Waveforms Samples The five choices are Run the test until the Stop Single button is pressed Run until a set number of failed waveforms occur Run until a set number of failed sample
203. e 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy OE Print Help Eye Diagram es ESE Ele SS Time Base ve Parameters Persistence MT AC RMS FF Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak Iv RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level in ensitied elayed 01 Ta Dual Delayed Con i off DELTA DELAY RZ RMS definition The RZ RMS is determined as follows N Y VeriPosts Y RZ RMS 125 N which is the RMS amplitude over all N samples s within the measured region eye window or one standard deviation of the amplitude When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 154 5 4 8 16 RZ Signal to Noise RZ Signal to Noise is a measure of the ratio of the signal difference between one level and zero level relative to the noise present at both levels Signal to noise is similar in construction to a Q factor measureme
204. e Domain Transmission TDT TDT is a measurement technique that measures both attenuation and propagation delay of your device under test TDT requires that you connect an electrical channel to the output of your device under test The instrument sends a fast step signal into your device The output from the device is then sent into the electrical channel and back into the instrument Time Maximum Time Maximum is a measure of the time of the first occurrence of the first data sample with the maximum signal level Time Maximum Time Minimum is a measure of the time at which the first data sample with the minimum signal level first occurs Time Qualified Time Qualified triggering generates a trigger when the trigger source meets its trigger condition after entering or exiting the pattern The trigger can occur even if the pattern disappears before the trigger meets its trigger conditions Tolerance Mask A form of waveshape limit test that defines a maximum deviation equal to a uniform tolerance on each measured point in a waveform Top Top is the statistically most prevalent voltage value above the waveform midpoint Total harmonic distortion THD See Harmonic Distortion Total Jitter Jitter is the measure of the time variances of the rising and falling edges of an eye diagram as these edges affect the crossing points of the eye Total Jitter represents the combined effects of all components of jitter Deterministic Jitter a
205. e Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak W Top Base Amplitude middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Bit kate E A400 Wiis vode Main Intensified Delayed SCALE B 200 psidiv DELAT 2502 Dual Delayed Con f Off DELTA DELAY 500 psiciv Et e pos neg i Ext HF ans cno ES Top definition The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Top value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 279 Menu 5 11 4 5 Base Base is the voltage of the statistical minimum level Use the Method 3 and Thresholdsi30 menus to customise the measurement threshold levels Base may be equal to Minimum for many waveforms such as triangle waveforms The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz S Oo x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy AE Print About Measure 1 1G 12 1 uO External Direct Time Base Parameters Unite Time 7 Bit Period
206. e Rate 2 FFT Aliasing Aliasing occurs when the input signal includes components at frequencies higher than the Nyquist frequency These frequency components appear in the FFT waveform display as peaks at lower frequency The higher frequency components are reflected around the Nyquist frequency For example a frequency component 1 GHz above the Nyquist frequency will appear as a peak 1 GHz below the Nyquist frequency in the FFT waveform display You can eliminate aliasing by setting the equivalent sampling rate to be at least twice the highest frequency in the input signal Increasing the record length or decreasing the timebase scale will increase the equivalent sampling rate 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 165 5 5 2 5 3 3 J24 ps9000 en Menu Select F si s2 The Select menu allows you to select either FFT S1 or S2 Clicking the S1 S2 radio buttons selects FFTs S1 or S2 and assigns the function softkeys to the selected FFT Display Eon off The Display function turns the FFT functions on or off When FFT is on a new waveform is displayed on the screen corresponding to the FFT magnitude function This FFT waveform is displayed in the color used to represent the S1 spectrum Source The Source function determines which signals the instrument uses to generate the FFT function As source of the FFT function you can select any of the following e channels 1 and 2 fu
207. e designed for performing measurements on circuits that are not directly connected to the mains line power Any attempt to connect the oscilloscope to mains line voltages will cause irreparable damage to the instrument possible damage to other equipment and a likelihood of personal injury or death The PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes must not be directly connected to the mains line power Failure to heed this warning may lead to injury or death Safety grounding The PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes connect directly to the ground of your computer through the USB cable provided This connection is intended only to minimise interference and therefore you must not rely on it as a protective safety ground Do not connect the grounded connectors on the front panel to any source other than ground If in doubt use a meter to check that there is no significant AC or DC voltage between the oscilloscope s ground socket and point to which you intend to connect it Failure to check may cause damage to your computer or injury to yourself and others Repairs The oscilloscope contains no user serviceable parts Repair or calibration of the oscilloscope requires specialised test equipment and must only be performed by Pico Technology Cooling fan The unit contains a low noise cooling fan that expels air through the holes in the back of the unit shown in the Connections section Do not block thes
208. e highest frequency being considered Infinite Persistence Infinite persistence is a display mode in which acquired waveforms are displayed indefinitely In the usual display modes waveforms are overwritten with each acquisition but when infinite persistence is selected old waveforms are not erased and Sample points accumulate on the display like a storage scope You can use infinite persistence to measure worst case timing jitter on a waveform Other applications include display of eye diagrams telecommunications or detection of metastable states in logic designs Initialization A process of setting the instrument to a completely known default condition Integral Linearity A term often used inappropriately to mean integral non linearity 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 395 6 10 ps9000 en Glossary Integral Non Linearity Deviation of ADC response from an appropriate straight line fit The specification is sometimes defined as maximum deviation expressed as a fraction of full scale More recent ADCs have a specification expressed as a percent of reading plus a constant Integrate The capability of an oscilloscope to display an integral math waveform The integral math waveform is computed from the acquired waveform One use of integral waveforms is for measuring power and energy Interleaved Clocking Supplying clock pulses of equal frequency to parallel circuits or instruments in order to
209. e holes as this might cause the unit to overheat Do not insert anything in the holes as this could damage the unit or cause injury Cleaning and decontamination Remove all connections from the unit Clean the external surfaces of the oscilloscope with a soft damp cloth Do not use chemical cleaners Make sure that the instrument is completely dry before using again O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 2 4 23 2 6 ps9000 en Introduction Safety symbols The following symbols appear on the front panel of the PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscope Symbol 1 Caution risk of electric shock connections if you do not take correct precautions Ensure that you read in detail all safety documentation associated with the product before using it This symbol indicates that a safety hazard exists on the indicated Symbol 2 Equipotentiality This symbol indicates that the indicated connectors are all at the same potential i e are shorted together You must therefore take necessary precautions to avoid applying a potential across the indicated terminals as this may result in a large current causing damage to the product and connected equipment FCC notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
210. e measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico rechnelaas escape 9000 PC Sarna Oscilloscope 12 GHz E 5 Oj x Measure 2 GHz 2 GHz Persistence External Direct Time Base A Parameters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing 4 Neg Crossing Burst width Bit kate 5400 mz y F Main Intensified f Delayed Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Current Total Wima Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed 4 241 ne Con i off al f Ext Dir e Pos Ne i Ext HF 5 OC intck IC Negative Crossing definition Negative crossing is determined as follows Negative Crossing Tcross where Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first negative crossing The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of negative crossing value will be performed only inside these margins Negative crossing value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 30 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology Al
211. e mode is off the repetition rate can be set to 16 ns 24 ns 32 ns 40 ns 80 ns 160 ns or 200 ns and then changed in a 1 2 5 sequence When fine mode is on you can change the repetition rate in 8 ns increments INTERNAL RATE is used only when the Internal Clock 2 source is selected ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 360 5 16 3 Mode Freerun Triggered The trigger modes control the behaviour of the instrument when not triggered The Mode menu lets you select between Freerun and Triggered modes The Mode menu is active when the External Direct External HF or Clock Recovery sources are selected in the Source menu Freerun With the Freerun mode the trigger circuit is armed and the instrument waits for up to 400 us for a trigger occur If a trigger does not occur within 400 us the instrument triggers itself and the data that is acquired with the trigger is displayed on the screen Use the Freerun mode when you are unsure how to setup the trigger menu to trigger the instrument or for DC trigger signals This mode forces the instrument to trigger giving you glimpses of the signal which then allows you to set up the instrument to display the signal For waveforms whose period is greater than 400 us the Freerun mode should not be used because the scope s 400 us timeout will always occur before your waveform trigger For waveforms whose period is lower than 400 u
212. e the time location of the crossing points Narrow vertical histograms are then used to determine the vertical location of Vcross The mean derived from the horizontal and vertical histogram results in Vcross Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz f z Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy e Print Help Eye Diagram 1 z 12 GHz 1 49 aS Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y NRZ Eye Paramet Ac RMS f Time Avg Power Bit Period TF Avg Power der Crossing Bit Rale J Crossing Level st 8400 Mhs 7 Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio ds FP Eye Amplitude Main I Eye Height Intensified T Eye Height dB Z Delayed bax T Mean F Mig D Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio T SN Ratio dB Zero Level Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY os A BY paidi Ext Dir f Pos Meg f AJB f Ext HF ENN a gt co REN ono Example of eye diagram with low Crossing Level value ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 96 Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are
213. e to the same value with somewhat improved amplitude accuracy over the rectangular window ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 172 5 5 5 3 Hann Window The Hann or Hanning or cosine window is bell shaped window and it looks like the first half of a sine wave The Hann window multiplies the points in the centre of the record by 1 and multiplies the points at the start and the end of the record by zero It decreases the amount of energy spillover into adjacent frequency bins increasing the amount of amplitude accuracy at the expense of decreasing the frequency resolution because of wider lobe widths The shape of Hann window is a compromise between amplitude accuracy and frequency resolution Time domain characteristics for Hann window The Hann window is useful for frequency resolution and general purpose use Even though the overall shape of the time domain signal has changed the frequency content remains basically the same The spectral line associated with the sinusoid Spreads out a small amount in the frequency domain It is good for resolving two frequencies that are close together or for making frequency measurements The Hann window also improves amplitude accuracy The Hann window compared to other common windows provides good frequency resolution at the expense of somewhat less amplitude accuracy 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 173 Menu
214. e windowing function is similar to the delayed or dual delayed sweep on traditional oscilloscopes because it turns on an expanded time base This expanded time base allows you to pinpoint and to horizontally expand a portion or two portions of the signal for a more detailed or high resolution analysis It can also help you to make custom automatic measurements Automatic measurements are made on the first occurrence of the event on the display The windowing feature allows you to isolate individual events on the display for the automatic measurements Windowing includes several steps Select main time base scale SCALE A Select one or two intensified time bases Select the dimension SCALE B and position DELAY of the delayed time base or the Dual Delayed time base DELTA DELAY on the main time base trace Click the Delayed or Dual Delayed timebase Delayed or Dual Delayed On y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz oO xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop nae Print About Channels tE WS PRE 3 Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period hannel 1 Select f chi Cha on Off Bit kate sr A400 Wiis Mode f fain Intensified Delayed AGGIE ff On 101 5 T off SCALE A 10 paidir SEALE B 2 naidi
215. e with up to a 51 point filter The number of points N can be selected by the SMOOTH LENGTH 24 variable Trend Trend represents the evolution of timing parameters as line graphs whose vertical axes are the value of the parameter and horizontal axes the order in which the values were acquired The information obtained from applying timing parameters can then be analysed using the trend O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 239 Menu 5 10 4 Operand 1 8 Operand 2 The instrument performs math functions on the source s operands you select The math operator is performed either on operand 1 or on operand 1 and operand 2 The number of operands used depends on the math operator you select For example Add requires two operands while Invert requires only one operand The Operand 1 or Operand 2 menus let you select from channels functions waveform memories spectrums constants You should be aware of some conditions of the math function menu e If the operand waveforms have different record length the function uses the shortest record length The instrument finds the nearest point in the longer waveform record that corresponds to the current point in the shorter record It then performs math functions on those points and skips non corresponding points in the longer record e If two operands have the same timebase scale the resulting function has the same timebase scale which results in the proper time s
216. ean of the horizontal histogram returns the crossing time NRZ Crossing Time can be determined as NRZ Crossing Time Tcross1 Tdelay This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 82 dd NRZ Cycle Area a Cycle Area NRZ Cycle Area is a measure of the area under the curve for the first NRZ bit time within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative The NRZ Cycle Area is determined as follows iv NRE CyeleArea gt VertPosls Mel over all N samples S1 N thin the measured region eye window of duration At between Left Crossings and Right Crossings Neither slope nor direction is settable Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Clear Display StopiSingle A Autoscale Default Setup i Undo Copy E Print About Eye Diagram iss GHz 146 3 GSalz Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters A NRZ Eve Paramet FT Area Bit Rate Bit Time Crossing Time e Cycle Area DutCycDist DutcycDist s Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Bit Period Bit kate
217. easurements are calculated Eye measurements are made in a fashion similar to many of the automatic measurements built into the instruments such as Rise and Fall Time Peak Peak and Frequency Up to four parametric measurements can be active whenever valid data exists These measurements can include any of the eye measurements under the X Eye Parameters and Y Eye Parameters menus Eye measurements can be performed on a persistence or color graded database O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 73 Menu 5 4 1 Measure Of MRZ RZ NRZ Clicking the NRZ radio button in the Measure menu starts the instrument calculating the One Level Zero Level Left Crossing and Right Crossing for NRZ types of signal After the calculations are finished the Eye Window which has a red color will appear NRZ Non return to zero A type of signal coding that ensures in any one bit period that the signal is turned on for the entire duration of a logical one pulse and turned off or nearly off for the entire duration of a logical zero pulse Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz a g Oo xj Clear Display Default Setup Undo I Copy E Print About Run 1 Z rt Persistence e Pe StopSingle Auto cale Ale ale 12 GHz 746 3 GSal External Direct Time Base Time Base Units Time 7 Bit Period Eye Diagram ve
218. ed StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Measure ine 126 00 GSal Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Iw Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a as 53 Est HF EX EtDir a pf NES T reco ME Positive Duty Cycle definition Positive Duty Cycle is determined as follows Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period 100 If more than one positive duty cycle can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of all positive duty cycles The positive duty cycle will not be measured until the period and positive pulse width complete the transition through all three levels The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of positive duty cycle value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 261 Menu Positive duty cycle value is affected by the Define Param 20 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you
219. ed using Pico products Copyright Pico Technology claims the copyright of and retains the rights to all material software documents etc contained in this release You may copy and distribute the entire release in its original state but must not copy individual items within the release other than for backup purposes Liability Pico Technology and its agents shall not be liable for any loss damage or injury howsoever caused related to the use of Pico Technology equipment or software unless excluded by statute Fitness for purpose As no two applications are the same Pico Technology cannot guarantee that its equipment or software is suitable for a given application It is your responsibility therefore to ensure that the product is suitable for your application Mission critical applications This software is intended for use on a computer that may be running other software products For this reason one of the conditions of the licence is that it excludes use in mission critical applications for example life support systems Viruses This software was continuously monitored for viruses during production but you are responsible for virus checking the software once it Is installed Support If you are dissatisfied with the performance of this software please contact our technical support staff who will try to fix the problem within a reasonable time If you are still dissatisfied please return the product and software
220. eform channel memory and function can be placed on a specified graticule YT only XY only or both YT XY You may choose a default color selection or select your own color set Different colors are used for displaying selected items background channels functions waveform memories FFTs TDR TDTs and histograms ps9000 en 15 4 9 4 10 Save Recall Management File extensions Operating System Waveform Save Recall Save Recall to Disk Save Recall Setups Autoscale Marker Marker Type Marker Measurements Marker Modes Specifications amp Characteristics Store and recall setups waveforms and screen images to any drive on your PC Storage capacity is limited only by disk space Waveform files wfm for binary format txt for text format Data base files cgs Setup files set Microsoft Windows XP or Vista Up to four waveforms may be stored into the waveform memories M1 M4 and then recalled for display You can Save or recall your acquired waveforms to or from any drive on the PC To save a waveform use the standard Windows Save as dialog box From this dialog box you can create subdirectories and waveform files or overwrite existing waveform files You can load into one of Waveform Memories a file with a waveform you have previously saved and then recall it for display The instrument can store complete setups in the memory and then recall them Pressing the
221. elope An acquisition mode in which the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that shows the signal s highest and lowest points acquired over many acquisitions Equivalent Time The time scale represented in the display of a sampling oscilloscope operating in the equivalent time sampling mode Equivalent Time Sampling A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope constructs a picture of a repetitive signal by capturing a little bit of information from each repetition Thus building the display takes longer than the time represented in the display In equivalent time sampling mode a waveform record is built up by sequential or random repetitive samples taken from multiple trigger events This process allows samples in the waveform record to be spaced more closely together for repetitive waveforms As a result the waveforms appear to have been sampled at a much higher rate sometimes referred to as an effective sample rate In random equivalent time sampling an internal clock is used that runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The oscilloscope takes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger Error detection Checking for errors in data transmission A calculation is made on the data being sent and the r
222. ements determined by the voltage range you are in Setting Units to Volt simplifies the threshold detection algorithm The result is that the measurement throughput of the instrument is increased because the instrument does not have to calculate the voltage thresholds Division This lets you set the thresholds to particular voltage values regardless of the top base values For example you can set the voltage values from 3 97 to 3 97 divisions in 125 milli divisions coarse or 7 8 milli divisions fine increments 5 11 6 5 2 UPPER MIDDLE and LOWER THRES HOLD LOWER THRESHOL The UPPER THRESHOLD MIDDLE THRESHOLD and LOWER THRESHOLD variables are displayed only when User Defined is selected in the Thresholds 3 menu All variables can be selected for the either Percent Volt or Division The upper threshold value is always greater than the value of the middle threshold and the middle threshold value is always greater than the value of the lower threshold The instrument will not allow a threshold to cross over the adjacent threshold 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 307 5 11 6 6 5 11 6 6 1 ps9000 en Margins Measure argins Waveform Marker LEFT MARGIN E E Let Threshold Upper Middle O Lower RIGHT MARGIN o 5 Right Threshold Upper Mictdlle C Lower Mode Menu The Margins menu sets left and right horiz
223. emote waveforms The variable is active when Exponential is selected in the Models menu WEIGHT can be varied from 8 to 8192 in multiples of two 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 303 5 11 6 2 5 11 6 3 ps9000 en Menu Method C User Defined The Method menu sets the Top and Base vertical reference thresholds for amplitude measurements It also sets the values from which the upper middle and lower thresholds are calculated The Top and Base variables are displayed when the User Defined method is selected The three selections under the Method menu allow the user to choose the method for determining the Top and Base of the waveform Histogram The instrument calculates the top and base using the IEEE standards with a voltage histogram of the waveform that is on the display The instrument finds the most prevalent top and base voltage values Make sure there is enough of the signal displayed on the screen so that the instrument can accurately determine the top and base values of the waveform However if too much of the top and base of the waveform are on the display it may reduce the number of sample points on the edge of interest which may reduce the repeatability of your measurements A good rule of thumb is to have two divisions of top and two divisions of base Min Max The absolute maximum positive peak of the targeted waveform is used as the Top and the absolute minimum negative peak of
224. en the time the instrument responds to a trigger and when the instrument is armed and able to respond to another trigger This delay is called the rearm or setup and hold time and is on the order of 5 us Therefore many trigger events can occur and are not responded to by the instrument while the rearming process takes place e A displayed waveform consists of several sampled points A trigger event edge is required for each sampled point For example if the number of points making up a waveform trace is 512 then the instrument would have to respond to at least 512 trigger edges A minimum time delay occurs between the time a trigger is received and when the data is actually sampled This delay is on the order of 40 ns Therefore the signal at the trigger point time 0 is usually not seen unless the data is delayed through cable lengths or delay lines relative to the trigger signal The delay between the trigger event and the sample point can be longer than 40 ns You can change the amount of delay in the Time Basel 2 menu Upon the next trigger event a sample point is acquired at a small time increment in addition to the initial delay of 40 ns Each additional trigger event yields sample points delayed by sequentially greater amounts of time Therefore after many triggers the input waveform is reconstructed on the display screen The types of signals that can be viewed with these triggering requirements are divided into the following
225. ence C war Gray Scalin Infin Gray Scalir var Color Graciir Infin Color Gradi Menu The Style menu determines how the data is displayed There are eight choices for drawing waveforms Dots Vectors Variable Persistence Infinite Persistence Variable Gray Scaling Infinite Gray Scaling Variable color Grading Infinite color Grading 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 50 Dots display The Dots style displays waveforms without persistence each new waveform record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel Data points are plotted on the display as fast as possible When the waveform record length is small the throughput of the instrument is fast enough that you can use the Vector style without noticing much decrease in throughput Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Clear Display Run StoprSingle Autoscale COR ca Prit About Channels 12 GHz 12 Iaio 125 fs External Direct Display hannel 1 isplay Trace Mode All Locked Per Trace f amp Chi che Trace chi E Dots Vectors Var Persistence Infin Persistence C Var Gray Scalin Intin Gray Scalir E war Color Gradir Infin Color Gradi REFRESH TIME 203 ul Rezet All Display w on C Off Acquire f On 100 midis C off OFFSET oy a 5 1 Bandwi
226. ene en enn nnnnnnos 190 gt MTSource a d M2 Source di A A er er AA A 193 IMI POSITION and MI POSITION strain ainan NEEE ii 194 4 Motion ERRE AAA EE REA REAA Aci erent 125 a A a E E A E N A RA AAA AAA ASA AAA AA 196 6 Set Reference Mencieni ana aanne E EEA E cae ced tas AAN LAN ANENE EA E ALE E E 197 Mai Meniere a N N A aa 198 NHMas ETE tina il lia eos 199 Create UC ao ror AAA AAA AAA AA 200 ZEfaseMaslo nine E AAA RAE A AA AAA AS S 230 3 Compare With mmmnnnnnnn eee re earn nn rare rare nano 230 i ie Co ee SA Coe OTe etc 231 5 Run Until Action eeeeeereeereereereerereereererseresrereeresrereeresreseerereneerennenrerenressereenesnererereereereseerenseneenennensereenenserent 232 10 Mathematics Menine A A T nO Te 234 Select eo ore OA RIAS TEE E E ire 236 2 DY a 236 3 Operator _vrvvssssesessesesssseseceesesesseseensnesessensseesesssseseseensnesesnsssssensseseeseseessseseesssssessessensseensseseeeneseeneseanenesns 237 4 Operand 1 amp Operand 2 eerererertereertertereertrtesrereeseesrereereestereereereereereereesterteressteseereerenreererereenesresseeseenentes 239 DConstant Seeon A A A A Ol AAA 239 6 SMOOTH LENG eea AS Ra A ap US came aa amass 240 TM Mr as 241 IDII ES a 244 Source jj AORT A EEA AAA A AA AAA 246 3 X Parameters vs A AAN AA ANA DANA AAA ad 247 AY Parimeteros tii A EA O AER AA AAA A a Ea E aa 274 5 DijaleChannel Parameters 0 00 AAA AAA AAA 293 6 Define Parametets iiie eene e A AR AA AAA AA AA AAN AAA sn 300 7 FFT Parameters
227. enough sample points on each cycle of the signal to determine the correct frequency It turns out that the points above Fs 2 are mirror images of the points below Fs 2 They are not displayed because they do not provide any additional information Therefore N time samples results in N 2 displayed frequency points You can use the FFT capability to display both the magnitude and the phase or the real and the imaginary parts of the frequency components of the signal using a linear or decibel vertical scale Use the Zoom menu for further magnification and spanning of the FFT and for selecting the Complex Scale of the display You can perform an FFT on any waveform The record length of the waveform can be up to 4096 points Because the PicoScope 9000 performs FFT calculations ona complex trace record you should use the shortest record length that provides adequate resolution as FFT waveforms update slowly at long record length The PicoScope 9000 offers a choice of six FFT windowing functions which modify the time domain data to minimize leakage of energy across frequency components 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 164 The five automated measurements FFT Magnitude FFT Delta Magnitude THD Total Harmonic Distortion FFT Frequency and FFT Delta Frequency are intended for FFT waveforms You can also use the markers to make magnitude and phase measurements on frequency dom
228. ent to resume acquiring data If the instrument is stopped it starts acquiring data on the next trigger event If the instrument is already in the run mode it continues to acquire data on successive trigger events If pressing the Run button does not cause waveform data to display on the screen try the following Make sure a signal is connected to one of the channel and the display for that channel is turned on Make sure the offset does not have the trace clipped off the display Check the trigger setup conditions to make sure the trigger conditions are valid for the signal Set the trigger mode to Freerun Freerun forces the instrument to trigger which may allow you to see enough of the signal so that you can set up the front panel properly Click the Autoscale button O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 334 5 14 3 Stop Single The Stop Single button causes the oscilloscope to stop acquiring data or to perform a single waveform acquisition You can stop acquisition if you want to freeze the displayed waveform s for closer analysis or measurement Each subsequent press of the Stop Single button rearms the trigger circuit A complete acquisition cycle is performed and any measurements are recalculated If all of the channels are turned off or if a trigger event is not found the instrument will not acquire any data O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 335
229. enu Mathematics Waveform analysis Once you have acquired or taken measurements on waveforms the oscilloscope can mathematically combine them to create a waveform that Supports your data analysis task For example you can define math waveforms mathematically x You can also differentiate or integrate a single waveform The PicoScope 9000 supports mathematical combination and functional transformation of the waveforms that it acquires The figure below shows this concept Source operand Math function Rath function Yaveform Cht operator Diude waveform 1 ler Functional transformation of an acquired waveform Create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms you can derive the data view that your application requires Mathematics The Mathematics Menu The Mathematics menu allows you to define up to four functions Each function consists of a math operator and either one or two operands A function is calculated on data adjusted by the calibration factor from a selected source s and a new waveform called a function is generated by the computation You can place markers on functions make measurements on functions or store functions to waveform memories O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 235 Menu 10 x Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Set
230. equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense For safety and maintenance information see the safety warning 4 CE notice The PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes meet the intent of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC and are designed to the EN61326 1 1997 Class B Emissions and Immunity standard The oscilloscopes also meet the intent of the Low Voltage Directive and are designed to the BS EN 61010 1 2001 IEC 61010 1 2001 safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use standard 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 6 Zid Legal information The material contained in this release is licensed not sold Pico Technology grants a licence to the person who installs this software subject to the conditions listed below Access The licensee agrees to allow access to this software only to persons who have been informed of these conditions and agree to abide by them Usage The software in this release is for use only with Pico products or with data collect
231. er the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Defaut Setup Undo copy Print About Clear Display Run StopSingle Auto cale Measure a anne ae Parameters Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude F middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Bit kate st 400 Wiis hoc Main Intensified Delayed ie T B SCALE A SCALE B 200 psidiv DELAY Sns Dual Delayed Con f Off KIG Kig DELTA DELAY os a fe A 1 n idiv Ext Dir Pos C Meg 0 AIB f Ext HF 5n8 Int Clk ov B Middle definition Middle is determined as follows Middle Maximum Minimum 2 where Maximum is the voltage or power of the absolute maximum value of the waveform and Minimum the voltage or power of the absolute minimum value of the waveform The Margins 3 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic
232. erated within the instrument electronics typically following the photodiode When these offsets occur they add to the incoming signal This will change the values of the one and zero levels When the contrast ratio measurement is computed the result may appear much smaller or larger than the true value depending on the value of the offset To minimize contrast ratio measurement errors due to offsets an extinction ratio calibration is recommended This procedure allows the instrument to identify any internal signals present and remove them during the contrast ratio calculations After the calibration is performed a more accurate contrast ratio measurement can be executed With a valid extinction ratio calibration the contrast ratio measurement can be computed and displayed in one of the three following formats NREZ_ ContrasiRatio _ VUnebevel Markbevet CreLevellbebweer _ peaks DarkLevel NEZ _ ContrasiRatio dB ij Pa Oue level between peaks DarkLevel Cnehevellbetveen peaks DarkLevel CreLevel Darkievel MARZ _ Contrasifatio 0 100 where One Level One level histogram mean at eye window One Level between peaks Histogram mean calculated from subtraction of zero level histogram from the between peaks histogram O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 140 54 80 33 RZ Extinction Ratio dB RZ Extinction Ratio and RZ Extinction Ratio M EtRatio de j M Ex
233. ermined as follows Kea ByeAeigki CneLeve l 30 2eroLeve 30 aero zeroLeve aT y Bh ieee AME ED aie oe 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 144 5 4 8 6 RZ Eye Opening 4 Eye Opening RZ Eye Opening Factor is similar to eye height It measures the actual eye opening relative to an ideal noise free eye While the eye height measurement uses 30 for the noise contribution the eye opening measurement uses 1o Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ae Print Help Eye Diagram 12 GHz 14 Sas 2 GHz 1 49 ais Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y RZ Eye Paramete Units f Time L Ai Bit Period Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB fw Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak T RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level 51 8400 Mihis Dual Delayed Con ft Off DELTA DELAY a B EA i Ext Dir E poet Neg f Ext HF E C Int Clk 50 150 m az O y 145 5 pz Trigger Acquistion Display Save Fecall Limit Test Mathematics
234. es the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 133 Menu 5 4 7 13 RZ Pulse Width ps9000 en RZ Pulse Width is the time measured between histogram means of the 50 rising and 50 falling edges of an RZ eye diagram Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy oe Print About Eye Diagram 12 GHz 1 501 3 12 GHz 1 501 TSass Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters sample Area 7 Bit Rate Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye Width 36 FF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise 7 Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Time Base Unite Time 7 Bit Period Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry e Pulse width Rise Time Dual Delayed Minima Con 0 f AJB f Ext HF DELTA DELA a os e 4 n 4c 150 16 ps Int Clk Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics CA 66 52 paveliv Edit post Neg RZ Pulse Width definition The pulse width is determined as follows RZ Pulse Width TFall50 TRise50 where TFall50 and TRise50 are the time crossings of the RZ pulse at the 50 reference le
235. esceesceenssesesanesanesaneeneey 119 8 Y RZ Eye Parameters oeseeeeeerertertertertertertesterterrestestesrertestesrereestestereereestessereereestereereereereeresrenseeresreseeseerestet 136 9 Statistics Soiano ra Iane nuon iei KE EAEE EREE EE AEEA EREE REEN EEEE KORENE EN 156 10 View Define Parameters sia a a KAANEL A A EEE Aad 158 11 D fine Parameters 25058 eee A A A A eat cad aaa PAOS ee 159 EFFET M en errn a a wien ao tee Sadia a ae wae ence eee vec aenateeene 161 VPET Basics muni os 162 2Sel ct Ee eee A AAA AAA Re eens 165 3 Display eeeeeresresresresreresresresesressesesressessesestestestessestestesneseeseessereeseertestereereeseeseerensteneeseereseesesresseenentt 165 AE ource gt gt PARA ASA AA ARI ANDA 165 5 FFI Window Seicis mieness gaani aE A EE ANE A AAA AA 166 6 Histogram Menu sesssessessessesseeseesecsseeneesecesceseesecesceseasceneevecssceseenressceseeseessceseenteseeseessceseeneens 176 Gis RdA RED E E AAA 179 Caure Sann TEA IA lada 180 Histograma rancios 181 AMode aonr NE EAN A EAEE EE NE KES 181 EWindow Cain sla see DSW SS R TAE AEA AAA EEE E REAREN E a EAA eie 182 ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide HI 6 Scale mind SAA AS ASA A AAA 184 TRunUbntil rra AAA AAA AAA AAA 186 8 OF WAVEFORMS and OF SAMPLES 0 000oooorronocoooonccnnnnononocccnnnnononooconnnnononocononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananananonos 186 7 Marker Mentiras aia 187 1Type n
236. eserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 338 5 14 6 Undo Unda Undo Reda You may find situations where you have unintentionally selected an unnecessary control When this happens you can use the Undo button to return the oscilloscope to the previous settings The depth of undo steps can be up to 100 If you later decide you didn t want to undo an action right click the button and select Redo 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 339 5 14 7 ps9000 en Menu Copy Full Screen Full Window Client Part Invert Client Part Oscilloscope Screen Invert Oscilloscope Screen Clicking the Copy button copies different programming windows into the Windows Clipboard From there you can paste copied information into such Windows programs as Word Corel Draw Paint Brush Photoshop and so on Use the Copy function when preparing documentation based on usage of the PicoScope 9000 Right click the button to get six options Full Screen Full Window Client Part Invert Client Part Oscilloscope Screen Invert Oscilloscope Screen fuat au id Orem t ag mam reta Y ranet rere Ay rusrcoa mue ru moe Sy Li did Jm ute 650 04 48e4E 08 eure Full Screen Copy Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Default Setup Undo pieje Channels ol Pos Neg Ext HF Crece ES 2 o
237. ested in ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 176 5 6 Histogram Menu A histogram is a probability distribution that shows the distribution of acquired data from a source within a user definable histogram window The information gathered by the histogram is used to perform statistical analysis on the source You can display the histogram either vertically for voltage measurements or horizontally for timing measurements Histogram Histogram Histogram Histogram ode ndo Scale istogram wo i E Linear Vertical Independed FC Logarithmic Horizontal k Absolute C Percent The Histogram menu Histograms are derived from the instrument measurement database The measurement database consists of all data samples displayed on the display graticule Every time a display sample point is acquired on a display coordinate the counter for that coordinate is incremented As the total count increases the range of hits also increases The maximum count for each counter is 63 488 If the histogram is left on for a very long time the database will become saturated The two most common uses for histograms are measuring and characterizing noise or jitter on displayed waveforms Noise is measured by sizing the histogram window to a narrow portion of time and observing a vertical histogram that measures the noise on an edge Jitter is measured by sizing the histogram window to
238. esults are sent along with it The receiving station then performs the same calculation and compares its results with those sent Each data signal conforms to specific rules of construction so that departures from this construction in the received signals can be detected Any data detected as being in error is either deleted from the data delivered to the destination with or without an indication that such deletion has taken place or delivered to the destination together with an indication that it is in error Error rate The ratio of the number of data units in error to the total number of data units O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 389 6 6 ps9000 en Glossary Extinction Ratio Extinction ratio is the ratio of the one level and the zero level of an eye diagram This measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the eye window Histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the eye window One histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram one level The second histogram is composed of data points from the lower half of the eye zero level The instrument analyses the histograms and determines the histogram means Extrema The computation of a waveform envelope by repeated comparison of successive waveforms of all maximum points roof and all minimum points floor Whenever a given data point of the new waveform exceeds the
239. evel See also RZ Bit Timel 12 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 122 De tala RZ Bit Time J Bit Time The RZ Bit Time is a measure of the time interval between two consecutive rising edges The crossing times are computed as the mean of the histogram of the data slice at the mid reference level Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About Eye Diagram 1 1 Sas 2G Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Lie 2 R Bit Rate fw Bit Time Cycle Area Eye width Eye idth TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Bit kate Js 400 Wiis Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Con t off Est HF DELTA DELAY ead as Ez Ed AAA Int Eik 250 mi i f Ext Dir Post Neg 100 my RZ Bit Time definition The RZ Bit Time is determined as follows Re Bitfime T agross 7 T retchess where TRightCross and TLeftCross are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive crossings on the rising slope at the mid reference level This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement i
240. f Acquire f On off OFFSET 0w a j Bandwidth Full Narrow DESKE Alt Acq Ll Ela SALE E 500 psdiv gt DELAY Os ab gt Dual Delayed Con Dor DELTA DELAY Os EE Et pos neg i Ext HF os C Int Clk o B D nue Ll Ww ay Horizontal scaling of a waveform SCALE A controls horizontal scaling of the waveform You can set the main timebase scale from 10 ps div to 2 ms div in one of three ways By using the SCALE A spin box By using the corresponding spin box in the Permanent Controls Area 31 By using the Pop up Keypad 2 to quickly enter numeric data for the timebase scale using the mouse If fine mode is off the main timebase scaling is in a 1 2 5 10 sequence When fine mode is on you can adjust the main timebase scaling in 0 1 increments or smaller O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 349 Menu 5 15 5 SCALE B The SCALE B function is similar to the time div knob of the delayed timebase on a traditional oscilloscope Adjusting the delayed timebase scale control expands and compresses the displayed waveform horizontally SCALE B allows you to simultaneously control the time scale of both delayed timebases from 10 ps div to 2 ms div in one of three ways By using the SCALE B spin box By using corresponding spin box in the Permanent Controls Area 3 By using t
241. f an amplifier circuit Invert Inverts the voltage values point by point of the waveform on operand 1 You can use Invert to compare the input and output of an inverting amplifier Absolute The Absolute value function makes positive all vertical values of the waveform data points on operand 1 The results provide the vertical plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed Exponent e The natural logarithm base e is raised to an exponent equal to the vertical value of a waveform data point of operand 1 Exponent e exponentiates each point of the waveform The results provide the vertical plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 238 Exponent 10 The base 10 Is raised to an exponent equal to the vertical value of a waveform data point of operand 1 Exponent 10 exponentiates each point of the waveform The results provide the vertical plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed Logarithm e Takes the natural logarithm base e of the vertical value of each waveform data points of operand 1 The natural logarithm results provide the vertical plot data for a waveform The horizontal scale is not changed Logarithm 10 The Logarithm 10 function converts the absolute vertical values in the waveform record to common logarithms of base 10 of operand 1 The results provide the vertical
242. f the CRT or LCD upon which the visible pattern is produced the display area Screen Update Rate The number of times per second that the screen information is renewed The quicker the rate the better the feel of the DSO controls Sequential sampling A sampling process where samples are taken at successively later times relative to the trigger recognition point Sensitivity 1 The minimum signal input capable of causing an output signal with the desired characteristics 2 The ratio of the magnitude of the instrument response to the input magnitude e g a voltage ADC has a sensitivity that is usually measured in counts mV Often sensitivity is referred to the input and is therefore stated as the inverse Sequential equivalent time sampling A type of equivalent time sampling in which one sample is taken per acquisition with each sample skewed incrementally with respect to an external trigger event This instrument acquires using sequential equivalent time sampling O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 409 ps9000 en Glossary Settling Time Settling time is the time it takes for a waveform to settle to within some user defined percentage of its steady state value following a rising or falling edge Shot Noise Noise caused by current fluctuations due to the discrete nature of charge carriers and random emission of charged particles from an emitter Many refer to shot noise loosely when speaki
243. f times a signal repeats in one second measured in hertz cycles per second The frequency equals 1 period Frequency Bins The FFT algorithm takes a discrete source waveform defined over N points and computes N complex Fourier coefficients which are interpreted as harmonic components of the input signal For a real source waveform imaginary part equals 0 there are only N 2 independent harmonic components Frequency Domain Signals displayed with frequency along the X axis and magnitude along the Y axis Frequency Range The range of frequencies computed and displayed is O Hz displayed at the left hand edge of the screen to the Nyquist frequency at the rightmost edge of the trace Frequency Resolution In a simple sense the frequency resolution is equal to the bin width delta f That is if the input signal changes its frequency by delta f the corresponding spectrum peak will be displaced by delta f For smaller changes of frequency only the shape of the peak will change However the effective frequency resolution that is the ability to resolve two signals whose frequencies are almost the same is further limited by the use of window functions Frequency standard A precise frequency generator such as a rubidium cesium or hydrogen maser whose output is used as a frequency Functions Functions are mathematical operations such as Add Subtract and Multiply that can be performed on input waveforms stored wavefo
244. f two The 4096 point record length is provided as a convenience and the visual truncation is a natural result When Alternate Sampling Mode is selected the record length is set independently for each channel Remember that equivalent sample rate and record length work together If you combine a small record length memory depth with a high equivalent sample rate you will have a very fast throughput display update rate but very little data in the channel memory Because more data points need to be acquired a waveform with a long record length takes longer to construct than one with a short record length However a long record length produces a waveform with higher horizontal resolution and so a trade off exists between throughput and resolution You can set both the main record length and the delayed record length using the variables All traces on the main timebase have the same record length Delayed traces similarly share identical record lengths O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 34 5 1 7 Run Until f Stop Single Butt Acquisitions The Run Until menu allows you to determine when the acquisition of data stops Stop Single Button You must press the Stop Single key to stop the acquisition of data Acquisitions After the number of acquisitions are met the acquisition is stopped The number of acquisitions can be specified in the OF ACQUISITIONS menu 5 1 8 OF ACQUIS
245. faut Setup Undo Copy ae Print Help Eye Diagram 12 GHz 1 493 Tsa z 12 GHz 1 493 E E Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Y RZ Eye Paramete MT AC RMS D Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Iw Eye Height Jw Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak M RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level C Bit Period Bit kate 51 8400 Mbfs Mode Main O Intensified e Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY os yt O 6 5 ps RZ Eye High definition RZ Eye High measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 In order to make an accurate RZ eye height measurement histograms are constructed to characterize both the one and zero levels and their noise levels within the eye window boundaries The one and zero levels are the relative means of the histograms The noise is measured through the histograms as three standard deviations from both the one level and zero level into the eye opening The eye height is det
246. ference Voltage The difference in electric potential expressed in volts between two points W Waveform A graphic representation of a voltage varying over time Waveform database A collection of sequentially acquired waveforms Waveform interval The time interval between record points as displayed Waveform markers The marker mode that presents two cursors that you position to measure both the time and amplitude parameters of a waveform record The instrument displays the times of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time difference between the cursors The instrument also displays the amplitude values of both cursors with respect to the waveform ground and between the cursors Waveform Memory A waveform memory is a convenient non volatile waveform storage area It contains a single waveform record along with the vertical and horizontal scaling factors for that waveform Waveform Point A digital value that represents the voltage of a signal at a specific point in time Waveform points are calculated from sample points and stored in memory Waveform Record The collection of acquired data in a waveform Waveform types Waveform types of the source to be measured can be Pulse NRZ and RZ Each waveform type has a measurement category Amplitude Timing or Area that can be selected Window In general the period of time acquired in a waveform is called a window In instruments with dual timebase
247. feross PRasellee ____ 361 Period Phraser ad see ee ea Period 0 feross2 Perosl 5 pgo Period where Tcross2 is a horizontal crossing on the first rising edge of the second source Tcross1 is a horizontal crossing on the first rising edge of the first reference source and Period is a period value You can select one of three phase options de m Phase Deg is a phase expressed in degrees where 360 constitutes one waveform cycle e Phaze Rad Phase Rad is a phase expressed in radians where one waveform cycle 360 corresponds to 26 radians IW Phase 2 OS i Phase is a phase expressed as a percentage of one waveform cycle 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 297 Menu Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detautt Setup Undo I Copy i Print About Measure 12 GHz 2 MEE Ge eas Time Base Wal Chan Parameter Time Base f Time Bit Period z 15 fa Vectors mannana A NO anna Bit kate E A400 fills blode f Main C Intensified Delayed F Delay 1R 1R Delay 1R 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F nF Delay 1R nF Delay 1F nF Delay 1F nF e Phase Deg e Phaze Rad Iw Phase SCALE A 2 naidi STALE B 1 naidi BELA al ES ka Ampitude Paramete otal Wima Minimu
248. ft margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either positive and negative overshoot measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz e oO x Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Measure Parameters Amplitude Paramete Maximum D Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area e Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Dual Delayed Con f off DELTA DELAY a a EA Chi cha E T 2 E E gt 2 A Pos Neg AIB m s oy cna MOR Positive Overshoot definition Positive Overshoot definition Positive overshoot determined when the waveform edge is rising upward slope is computed as follows Positive Overshoot Maximum Top Amplitude x 100 where Maximum is the signal maximum Top is the signal top value and Amplitude is the signal amplitude The Margins 32 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Positive Overshoot value will be performed only inside these margins O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 292 5 11 4 17 Negative Overshoot Negative Overshoot is defined as a maximum distortion that follows a ne
249. g ongoing acquisitions You can select different Complex Scale Magnitude Phase Magnitude Phase Real Imaginary and Real Imaginary Zoom provides a vertical dynamic range of 10 million divisions or 1 million screens Zoom provides a horizontal dynamic range of 640 divisions or 64 screens Vertical or Horizontal 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Histogram Measurement Set Histogram Window 4 17 Eye Diagram Eye Diagram NRZ Measurement Set RZ Measurement Set 4 18 Mask Test Mask Test Mask Creation Standard Mask SONET SDH 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 18 Both vertical and horizontal histograms with periodically updated measurements allow statistical distributions to be analysed over any region of the signal Scale Offset Hits in Box Peak Hits Pk Pk Median Mean Standard Deviation Mean 1 Std Dev Mean 2 Std Dev Mean 3 Std Dev The histogram window determines which part of the database is used to plot the histogram You can set the size of the histogram window to be any size that you want within the horizontal and vertical scaling limits of the scope The PicoScope 9000 can automatically characterise an NRZ and RZ eye pattern Measurements are based upon statistical analysis of the waveform AC RMS Area Bit Rate Bit Time Crossing Crossing Level Crossing Time Cycle Area Duty Cycle Distortion s
250. gative waveform edge transition This distortion occurs after the edge crosses through the waveform threshold levels The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either positive and negative overshoot measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l oO x Clear Display Run StopSingle Measure 1 z l Time Base Time Base Parameters Time Bit Period Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude T middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Iw Neg Overshoot Dual Delayed Con f off DELTA DELAY a a EA Total Wima Minimum 402 14 ch ch2 P div E 2 Ea 2 A Pos Neg AiB yt 7 a ae a En GAE rs UU rca MEN Negative Overshoot definition Negative Overshoot determined if the waveform edge is falling is computed as follows Negative Overshoot Base Minimum Amplitude x 100 where Minimum is the signal minimum Base is the signal base value and Amplitude is the signal amplitude The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculatio
251. ge immediately Stable averaging produces slightly less improvement that is a smaller signal to noise improvement ratio than conventional averaging Signal to Noise Improvement Ratio with Stable and Multiple Averaging Selected Signal to Noise Improvement Ratio Number of Stable Average Multiply sampling Averages O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 29 ps9000 en Menu Multiple Average Multiple averaging lets you use the following algorithm N e A Mim 1 iy where N is the number of averages in every point rae is the acquired value of the waveform at point during acquisition cycle m A is the averaged value of the waveform at point When Multiple averaging is selected the oscilloscope works during the acquisition cycle as follows 1 Operator selects the number of averages 2 The oscilloscope samples and digitizes N times the th point of the waveform 3 Processor calculates new averaged value at point 4 This procedure repeats for every point of the waveform Unlike the stable average mode the multiple average mode is N times slower However every point of the waveform is displayed filtered from noise The Multiple Average mode has the most effective Signal to Noise Improvement Ratio O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 30 Envelope Modes Three Envelope modes are available in the PicoScope 9000 Min Max Envelope mode
252. ge position of any marker the results will be displayed in ratiometric values Click the On button to select ratiometric measurements Pko Iminsigr Protonpe S000 PL Sart Vete 17 Gear Ratiometric Measurement of Overshoot with Y Markers O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 197 Menu 5 6 Set Reference Clicking the Set Reference button sets the ratiometric values for the reference As an example they can be 100 O dB or 360 These values are displayed in the same color as the markers When you begin to change the position of any marker the results will be displayed in ratiometric values ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 198 5 8 Main Menu The Main Menu buttons are located at the bottom of the instrument display The Main Menu is used to Set up the oscilloscope operating modes Channels Time Basel Trigger 354 Acquisition 2 Display 4 and Zooml Menus Set up and execute waveform measurements Marker 87 Measure 2 Limit Test Histogram Eye Diagram and Mask Test Menus Control file management tasks Save Recalll3 Menu Perform waveform analysis Mathematics 24 and FET 6 Menus Set up and execute instrument calibration and to use a demo mode Utility Menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 199 5 9 ps9000 en Menu Mask Test Mask Test T
253. gger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired after the trigger event PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence A repetitive effectively random digital signal pattern 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 404 6 17 6 18 Preshoot Preshoot is a distortion that precedes a waveform edge transition This distortion occurs after the edge crosses through the waveform threshold levels and can occur on either the rising or falling edge Pretrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired before the trigger event Pre trigger Sampling A design concept used in transient recording in which a predetermined number of samples taken before a stop trigger are preserved Probe An oscilloscope input device usually having a pointed metal tip for making electrical contact with a circuit element and a flexible cable for transmitting the signal to the oscilloscope Probe compensation Adjustment that improves low frequency response of a probe Pulse A common waveform shape that has a fast rising edge a width and a fast falling edge Pulse Trigger Selects a pulse width either maximum or minimum The trigger is generated on the selected edge when the pulse width is either greater than or less than the selected width The timing for the width is initialized and restarted on the edge opposite to the edge selected Pulse Width
254. gger Input Connector O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 12 Note The time interval resolution is the smallest time you can resolve between two points External Direct Trigger External Prescaled Trigger Internal Clock trigger internally connected to direct trigger Clock Recovery Trigger PicoScope 9211 only Triggered causes the scope to trigger synchronously with the trigger input signal Freerun causes the scope to generate its own triggers Adjustable from 5 us to 1 s in a 1 2 5 10 sequence or in 8 ns increments 10 us to 2 ms in a 1 2 5 10 sequence or in 125 ns increments 100 mV p p DC to 100 MHz Increasing linearly from 100 mV p p at 100 MHz to 400 mV p p at 1 GHZ Pulse Width 500 ps 400 mV p p 3 5 ps 20 ppm of delay setting Note Measured at 1 GHz with the triggering level adjusted for optimum trigger Positive triggers on rising edge Negative triggers on falling edge 1Vto1V 1 mV 50 mV 0 1 of trigger level Normal the trigger hysteresis is set so the instrument meets the trigger sensitivity specification High Sensitivity hysteresis is turned off to allow a best sensitivity to high frequency signals This mode should not be used for noisy lower frequency Signals that may mistrigger without hysteresis 2 V DC peak AC 50 1 U DC coupled SMA F ps9000 en 13 4 5 4 6 4 ps9000 en Prescaled Trigger Prescaled Trigger Bandwidth and Sensi
255. graticule off The displayed waveforms and waveform s information is not turned off Displays the outside border with a measurement scale The measurement scale is incremented decremented with major divisions and minor divisions based on the vertical and horizontal measurement settings Displays the outside border with a measurement scale and a measurement scale crossing at mid screen The Grid background is complete graticule with ten horizontal major divisions and eight vertical major divisions Vertically one minor division is one quarter of a major division and horizontally one minor division is one fifth of a major division Dual YT XY ol lt a o al gt i gt Q gt a N o Z amp a 3 o a E 4 4 T E Grid l Axes C Frame Off Back Grid e Axes C Frame Off Back o E EtDir e Pos Ne C EH a C Int Cik 4 Ext Dir ch1 ETT Pos C Ne C Ext HF SC inte Trigger Acquisition Channels Time Base Acquisition Measure Limit Test Mathematics Measure Limit Test Mathematics 4 Utility Zoom Histogram O Converter FFT Histogram Utility Advance Option 5 xj i iol xj E Print aot print abot Display Displa
256. gy All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 226 5 9 1 4 4 Delete Polygon Delete Polygon a The Delete Polygon function allows you to delete one of the eight polygons To delete the polygon 1 Click the Edit Mask button Click on any vertex of the polygon you want to delete 12 GHz 1 493 TSals 12 GHz 1 493 Tals Persistence External HF sample User Mask sample 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 227 Menu 2 Click the Delete Polygon button You will see the mask without the deleted polygon 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz 12GHz 1 493 Tsalz Persistence External HF sample sample User Mask pf et A ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 228 3 Click the Back button The scope returns to high level menu and mask gets a new form without deleted polygon 12 GHz 1 493 Tsalz i I Persistence External HF sample ale User Mask 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 229 SLAS 5 9 1 5 5 9 1 6 ps9000 en Menu Delete Mask The Delete Mask function allows you to delete the mask that you are editing To delete a mask 1 Click the Edit Mask button 2 Click the Delete Mask button You will see the screen without the deleted mask Recall User Mask Clicking the Recall User Mask button recalls the Windows
257. gy All rights reserved ps9000 en 101 Menu 5 4 6 6 NRZ Max NRZ Max is a measure of the maximum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop e Print Help als z 1 493 is Eye Diagram 49 Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base f Time Bit Period J o Y AR Eye Paramet DT AC RMS Avg Power Avg Power der Crossing alt Rale Crossing Level st 8400 Mbs Ext Ratio dB Est Ratio Ext Ratio Mode 7 Eye Amplitude Main TT Eye Height C Intensified Eye Height dB Delayed Jw haz Mean T mid F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level 67 pedir gt KE Cual Delayed Con t off ent Total Meas Minima my 130 490 2 mv DELTA DELAY Pos a 67 psidiv Ext Dit bos eg f Ext HF de sd CES ena gt Acquistion Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics NRZ Maximum definition The NRZ maximum eye amplitude is determined as follows NRZ Maximum max VertPos s where s is the set of samples within the eye window
258. h 8 GHz 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 42 5 2 7 Channel DESK EW DESKEN An Aca The DESKEW variable adjusts the skew to change the horizontal position of one active channel with respect to another on the instrument display The deskew function has a range of 100 ns You can use the function to compensate the time offset between two channels and also differences in cable or probe lengths It also allows you to place the triggered edge at the centre of the display when you are using a power splitter connected between the channel and trigger inputs Another use for deskew is when you are comparing the shapes of two waveforms rather than the actual timing difference between them you can use the DESKEW to overlay one waveform on top of the other Use the DESKEW function only when the Alternate Sampling Mode 27 is selected in the Acquisition 2 menu Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E Ol xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo IF Copy Cae Print About 12 GHz a T gt alz Channels 1 Hz 2 GHz Persistence External Direct Measure 5 40 hannel 1 Wal Chan Parameter Select f chi E Cha on Off Iw Delay 1R 1R Delay 1R 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1F 1F Delay 1R nF Delay 1R 0F Delay 1F nF Delay 1F nF Phase Deg Phaze Rad Pha
259. h potentially lower precision Since the extinction ratio measurement is based on the histogram means of the one and zero levels noise on the waveform typically does not have a significant effect on the accuracy of the measurement Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the central of the bit period within Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 99 Menu 5 4 6 4 NRZEye Amplitude 4 Eye Amplitude NRZ Eye Amplitude is the difference between the logic 1 level and the logic 0 level histogram mean values of an eye diagram Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 17 GHz i E Of x Clear Display Fun Stop Single Autoscale Copy ae Print Help Eye Diagram A E Time Base Time Base Time i Bit Period ye Parameters Y NRZ Eye Paramet ACRMS Avg Power Avg Power der Crossing Bit Pte Crossing Level 5 6400 Wis Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio e Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Main Intensified f Delayed Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS SiN Ratio T S N Ratio del TF Zero Level Minimum CA By
260. hannel Select menu 36 Channels Vertical 10 Channels Menu 35 Characteristics 10 Cleaning 4 Clear Display button 332 Clock recovery trigger 354 358 specifications 13 Color Grade Scale 68 Color Grade Scale button 68 Company address 7 Compare With menu 230 Connect waveform dots 49 Connections 8 Contact details 7 Contents of product pack 8 Cooling fan 4 Copy button 339 Copyright 6 Cosine window 172 Create Mask button 200 Current color button 6 7 Cycle parameter 267 D Default Colors button 69 Default Setup button 337 Define Parameters menu 300 Defined Thresholds menu 305 DELAY variable 350 Delete Mask function 229 Delete Point button 221 Delete Polygon button 226 DELTA DELAY variable 353 Direct Trigger 12 Disk Source menu 319 Disk menu 318 ps9000 en 419 Display 14 Display color item menu 65 Display Color menu 65 Display menu 4 7 Screen submenu 59 Display persistence 49 Display Screen Format menu 60 Display Screen Waveform menu 62 Dots display 49 Dual Delayed menu 352 Dual Channel Delay parameter 294 Gain parameter 298 Parameters menu 293 Y Source menu 293 E Edit Mask function 213 Electric shock risk 5 Electrostatic discharge 35 Email 7 EMC directive 5 EN61326 1 5 Envelope Ncontrol 31 Environmental Characteristics 19 Equipotential connectors 5 Equivalent time sampling 354 Erase Mask function 230 ESD 35 Ethernet masks list 206 External scale 44 EYE BOUNDARY variables 159
261. hat represent the highest density of data counts O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 56 Use gray scaling in the Eye Diagram and Mask Test menus The Eye Diagram and Mask Test measurement algorithms are based on the statistical accumulation of the data that the Gray Scaling mode uses internally Variable Gray Scaling In the Variable Gray Scaling display style the screen is not refreshed after every acquisition instead the screen is refreshed at a specified user selectable rate You can vary the refresh time from minimum of 1 s to 200 s You can change the refresh time with the REFRESH TIME variable If one of the following is changed when the instrument is in the Variable Gray Scaling display style the displayed waveform is redrawn and any accumulated waveforms are cleared Clear Display button is pressed e An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed e The instrument is turned off Infinite Gray Scaling When you select the Infinite Gray Scaling display style all the data points are kept on the display With the Infinite Gray Scaling display style all sampled data points are left on the display until one of the following occurs Clear Display button is pressed An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed The instrument is turned off You can use infinite gray scaling for worst case characterization of signal noise jit
262. he Chi and Ch2 check boxes in the Permanent Controls Area Clicking the On Off buttons Turns the display for the selection on or off Changes the label from on to off or vice versa Turning the Display off does not turn off acquisition of the selected channels To turn off acquisition of the selected channel use the Acquire menu The Display turns on or off the display of the waveform for the chosen channel When the channel display is on a waveform is displayed for that channel unless the offset is adjusted so the waveform is clipped off of the display When the channel display is off the waveform display for that channel is turned off but acquisition on that channel is not stopped Turning a channel s display off also turns off the XY markers while X or Y markers are available Measurements functions FFTs and histograms also are available to that channel Turning a channel off increases the display update rate for the remaining channel that IS on Channel Acquire Fon off On Turns on acquisition of the selected channel Off Turns off acquisition of the selected channel 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 37 Menu 5 2 4 Channel SCALE aa mo E 5 PT Ld A J0 pr id The SCALE controls vertical scaling of the waveform It determines the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system Adjust the SCALE to control the portion of the vertical window displayed on screen The
263. he Pop up Keypad to quickly enter numeric data using the mouse If fine mode is off the main timebase scaling is in a 1 2 5 10 sequence When fine mode is on you can adjust the main timebase scaling in 0 1 increments or smaller D The SCALE B value cannot exceed the SCALE A value ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 350 5 15 6 DELAY The DELAY function is similar to the delay knob of the delayed timebase on a traditional oscilloscope DELAY is a post trigger function because it controls the delay from the trigger The maximum post trigger delay varies with the sweep speed and the minimum delay zero delay value is limited by the propagation delay of the trigger path The advantage of digital delay is that it is calibrated Adjusting the delay moves the position of the input waveform horizontally As the delay increases the waveform moves to the left of the display graticule As the delay decreases the waveform moves to the right of the graticule Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz m Oj x Clear Display lo StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About Channels 12 GHZ 12 GHz 2 415 External Direct Time Base hannel 1 Time Base Unis chi cha Time C Bit Period Display w on Of Persistence Acquire f On SCALE 100 id
264. he channel inputs 0 00001 1 to 1 000 000 1 Ratio or dB Volt Watt Ampere or Unknown gt 40 dB at rated bandwidth Main Intensified Delayed or Dual Delayed Full scale is 10 divisions 10 ps div to 50 ms div Adjustable in a 1 2 5 10 sequence Also adjustable in 0 1 fine increment 10 ps div to current Main Timebase setting Adjustable in a 1 2 5 10 sequence Also adjustable in 0 1 fine increments 0 4 of of Delta Time Interval 15 ps 100 ppm of Delay setting at a temperature within 3 C of horizontal calibration temperature The time base uses a series of near 4 ns blocks Time base linearity and small discontinuities across these blocks contribute to the 15 ps accuracy Specification Up to 1000 screen widths of Delayed Timebase or 19 98 ms whichever is smaller lt 40 ns Time or Bit Period screen width record length or 200 fs whichever is larger O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 4 Trigger Trigger Sources Trigger Modes Trigger Holdoff Internal Clock Repetition Rate Direct Trigger Direct Trigger Bandwidth and Sensitivity RMS Direct Trigger Jitter maximum Trigger Slope Direct Trigger Level Range Direct Trigger Level Resolution Direct Trigger Level Accuracy Direct Trigger Hysteresis Maximum Safe Direct Trigger Input Voltage Direct Trigger Nominal Input Impedance Direct Trigger Coupling Direct Tri
265. her peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 31 and RIGHT MARGIN s 7 variables When Peak is selected in the Method 313 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 3 5 variable PEAK RIGHT defines the second peak used for the FFT measurements 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 314 5 11 9 View Define Parameters The markers can be used to give you a visual indicator of where you are manually setting the thresholds and margins To use the markers to show the settings use the View Define Param menu Clicking the On Off options turns the display for the selection on or off 5 11 10 Mode Repetitive f Single shot Two modes are available for extracting parameters Repetitive Single shot Repetitive This mode dynamically extracts the same number of parameters based on successive acquisition sequences and updates the measurements approximately every 100 ms except at very slow repetition rates Single shot Extracts up to ten measuring parameters and up to four statistical parameters based on the last acquisition and displays the result 5 11 11 Single Clicking the Single button provides single shot measurement of selected parameters 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 315 5 12 ps9000 en Menu Permanent Controls Chd Bee TE
266. here are industry standards that define the parameters for electrical and optical waveforms Mask testing is a process you can use to verify that the displayed waveform complies with an industry standard waveform shape A mask is a template that consists of numbered shaded regions on the instrument display screen The input waveform must then remain outside these regions in order to comply with the industry standard Any acquired data point that falls inside a mask margin appears in red The instrument has been designed to perform communication industry mask testing to a variety of test standards Mask testing may be performed by a following simple procedure This procedure loads one of several mask templates automatically aligns the mask to the present waveform and then determines the waveform s compliance to the mask The size of the mask or the portion of the mask can be increased or decreased in a linear fashion to determine the waveform s margin of compliance Both the user defined and standard factory installed masks can be stored to disk for rapid switching between instrument setups Mask testing can also activate a variety of actions upon determining a test failure Mask Test Mask Test Mask Test Mask Test Mask Test ask Test reate Mask Automask dit Mazk un Untilction Create Mask Standard Mask Add Point source Stop Single f Failed Wims Failed Samples Delete Point Automazk TA o Waveforms Pe Sa
267. hese masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveform to a specific industry standard listed above ITU G 05 ANSI 11 102 Other SONET S5DH Ethernet Fiber Channel FC133 FC266 FC531 FC1063 FC1063 PI Rev13 FC2125 FC2125 Pl Revi FL4250 Pl Rev13 10 Fiber Channel F Marans 0 al Cancel Alignment 132 9 Mbps 265 6 Mbps 531 35 Mbps 1 0625 Gbps 1 0625 Gbps 2 1231 Gbps 2 1231 Gbps 425 Gbps 10 5186 Gbps The list of industry standard Fiber Channel masks 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 206 5 9 1 1 5 Ethernet Masks Ethernet Clicking the Ethernet tab opens the list of industry standard masks Any of these masks may be recalled from memory and used to test a waveform to a specific industry standard listed above ITU G 703 Other SONET SOH ANSI 71 102 Ethernet Fiber Channel GB Ethernet 1 25 Gbps GB Ethernet 2 5 Gbps 10Gb Ethernet 9 953 Gbps 1OG6E 9 953 9 953 Gbps 10Gb Ethernet 10 3125 Gbps 10Gb 10 3125 10 3125 Gbps 10sGE Ethernet 12 5 Gbps F karans 0 Alignment Jk Cancel The list of industry standard Ethernet masks 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 207 5 9 1 1 6 ps9000 en ITU G 703 Masks ITU G 03 O51 2 Mb 120 2 Mb 75 0521710 O52 75 a Mb 34 Mb 053 140 Mb 0 140 Mb 1 140 Mb 1 Inv 155 Mb 0 155 Mb 1 TAFE hab d laii Alignment Ethernet
268. hreshold Lower A margin will be placed on the lower threshold Middle A margin will be placed on the middle threshold You can change values of upper lower and middle thresholds from the Defined Thresholds menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 309 Menu 5 11 7 FFT Parameters You can use automated measurements to measure FFT waveforms To take automated measurements with FFT waveforms select one of the spectrums in the Source on the first page of the Measurel2 f menu Measure After one of the spectrum waveforms is selected you can perform up to five FFT measurements They are FFT dFreq FFT Magnitude Para FFT Magnit FFT dhtagnit THD FFT Frequency FFT delta Frequency FFT Magnitude FFT delta Magnitude Total Harmonic Distortion PEAK LEFT You can continuously update as many as ten measurement parameters and as many as four statistics measurements at any one time The algorithms for FFT measurements will only work when a spectrum waveform is used Measurements made on a single valued signal NRZ or RZ eye diagrams will fail Aliasing When using FFTs make sure you avoid signal aliasing Aliasing occurs when there are insufficient samples on each cycle of the input signal to reconstruct the signal It occurs whenever the frequency of the input signal is greater than the Nyquist frequency which is the sample frequency divided b
269. hrough 4 Spectra 1 and 2 For example you could set the M1 Source to a waveform on channel 1 and the M2 Source to a waveform in memory Mi The scale used to position each marker on the display is based on the scale of the waveform source to which the marker is tied O You cannot select a marker source that is turned off When you are placing markers on a waveform make sure the source Is set to that waveform ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 194 5 3 M1 POSITION and M2 POSITION You can use different methods to control the positions of the markers Use the spin box Use the mouse to click and drag markers to a new position Use the keyboard Use the Pop up Keypadl 22 for quickly entering numeric data using the mouse Manual X Markers The MI POSITION variable moves the XM1 marker horizontally and the M2 POSITION variable moves the XM2 marker horizontally The position of each marker is displayed in the same color as the markers You can make timing measurements using X markers on the signal The difference between the marker s positions is the timing measurement or dXM dxM XM2 XM1 If XM1 is more positive than XM2 dXM will be a negative number which can result in negative time interval measurements Also notice the 1 dXM value If you are measuring the period of a signal with the X markers then 1 dXM is the frequency of the signal You can also make a
270. i Upper i middle C Lower RIGHT MARGIN Right Threshold Upper f fiddle C Lower ps9000 en 243 Menu Measurement Results The measurement readouts appear in the Measurement Area of the screen These values are displayed on tabs The readouts are continuously updated as the oscilloscope acquires new data or as you change settings You can display as many as ten measurements of parameters continuously updated and as many as four statistics measurements at any one time Total ime Minimum m r ann 4 iJ Measure tab with the results of four statistics measurements When the instrument cannot make the requested measurement an error message Undefined is displayed instead of measurement results Usually this is because there are not enough sample points there is no edge on the display or the specified channel is turned off ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 244 5 11 1 Display Two types of measurements are used in the PicoScope 9000 Measurements of parameters Parameters Statistics measurements Statistics Click on the option for the type of measurement that you require Off removes the measurement results and markers from the display Statistics The Statistics function calculates the minimum maximum mean and standard deviation of the automatic measurement results The current value and amount of measurements are also displa
271. ico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 424 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en Pico Technology James House Colmworth Business Park ST NEOTS Cambridgeshire PE19 8YP United King dom Tel 44 0 1480 396 395 Fax 44 0 1480 396 296 www picotech com ps9000 en 2 25 11 08 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved
272. iddle threshold If the falling edge and the rising edge intersect precisely at the middle thresholds there is no duty cycle distortion NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion is measured by histogram analysis at the crossing points and middle threshold The algorithm for calculating NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion is dependent upon the edge that crosses the threshold first Therefore the falling edge may occur prior to the rising edge Ideally both the rising and falling edges intersect precisely at the 50 threshold level That results in no duty cycle distortion ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 84 NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion can be displayed in two formats time or percent In the time format DutCycDis s the actual time between the median falling edge and the median rising edge at the middle thresholds is determined In the percentage format DutCycDis the time difference is determined as a percentage of the full bit time The NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion is determined as follows MARZ Dutylycielisioraor Trise sy yere IA pecas in CF Sn werent DAN so encens NRZ Dui fofkstoriion z a eraen bitPeriod O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 85 E T ps9000 en Menu NRZ Eye Width and NRZ Eye Width NRZ Eye Width is a measure of the horizontal opening of an eye diagram Ideally the eye width would be measured between the crossing points of the eye A hori
273. ified State Qualified triggering generates a trigger when the trigger source meets its conditions during the selected pattern A pattern is defined as a logical AND combination of trigger states A trigger state is either high or low high when a trigger source is greater than the trigger level and low if it is less than the trigger level Stimulated Emission The optical power emitted from a laser diode after a specific current threshold is reached Also known as Coherency Stop Single In the Stop Single mode the scope triggers once when the trigger conditions are met Once the acquisition process is complete the scope will display the acquired waveform and stop the acquisition process You can begin another acquisition by pressing the front panel Run button Stop Trigger A pulse that is used to stop a transient recording or similar sequence Strobe A short duration pulse that operates the sampling gate Strobe kick out A fraction of the strobe signal coming out of the input connector Summed or Summation Averaging The repeated addition with equal weight of successive waveforms divided by the total number of waveforms acquired Sweep One horizontal pass of an oscilloscope s trace from left to right across the screen Sweep Cycle Time The time required for making a complete sweep and preparing for the next sweep It can be measured as the time from the start of one sweep to the start of the next sweep Sweep Spee
274. ima gt 17 Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a iS E i Ext Dir E po Neg f Ext HF E Ma g a 72 2 eo of y oo fe E t Int Clk S0 o RZ Contrast Ratio definition RZ Contrast Ratio also is called RZ Suppression Ratio RZ Contrast Ratio measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 139 ps9000 en Menu Histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the eye window boundaries and within equivalent eye window boundaries positioned between eye diagram peaks The one level histogram mean is composed of data points taken from the upper half of the eye window located within the eye diagram the zero level histogram is composed of data points taken from the lower half of the eye window located within the eye diagram and the remaining histogram is composed of data points taken from the eye window located between peaks The instrument analyses the histogram data removes the zero level data from the between peaks histogram then determines the ratio of the one level mean and the one level mean between peaks The accuracy of the contrast ratio measurement can be affected by offsets including the dark level gen
275. ine drift Vertical movement of the entire trace under constant signal conditions and control settings 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 381 ps9000 en Glossary BER An acronym for Bit Error Ratio or Rate The principal measure of quality of a digital transmission system BER is defined as BER Number of Errors Total Number of Bits BER floor A limiting of the bit error ratio in a digital system as a function of received power due to the presence of signal degradation mechanisms or noise Bin Each frequency point represented in the frequency domain display of an FFT is called a bin Binning A technique for combining points in a histogram to be compatible with the resolution of the display device Blind Time In digital scopes the blind time or dead time is the time from the end of one data acquisition to the beginning of the next acquisition Better update rate in a scope means less dead time and less chance of missing a significant event Bit One of the two numbers O and 1 used to encode data A bit is often represented by a high or low electrical voltage Bit error An incorrect bit Also known as a coding violation Bit Error Rate Ratio of the number of bits of a message incorrectly received to the total number received Bitmap or bmp Bitmap or bmp is a standard used for storing bit mapped graphic files that can be imported into other Windows applications for document
276. ing When you adjust the HOLDOFF control the amount of time that the scope waits before re arming the trigger circuitry also changes Before re arming the trigger circuity cannot recognize when the next trigger conditions are satisfied and so cannot generate the next trigger event When the instrument is triggering on undesired trigger events you adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering For example if you have a burst of pulses and want to trigger on the first pulse in the burst you can set the holdoff time to be slightly longer than the burst width Hold off Hold off Hold off Trigger Level Hold off Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Trigger Level The HOLDOFF spin box allows you to change the holdoff time from 5 us to approximately 30 72 ms HOLDOFF is active when the External Direct External HF or Clock Recovery sources are selected in the Sourcel 35 menu O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 363 Menu 5 16 7 Hysteresis e formal High sensitivity Trigger hysteresis helps to prevent false triggers from occurring on a falling edge due to noise when the rising edge is selected as the trigger edge or on a rising edge when the falling edge is selected as the trigger edge The voltage through which the trigger signal must pass before the instrument is ready to accept another valid trigger is known as the arming voltage level Hysteresis is the voltage difference between the arming level and the trigger thresh
277. installing and using your oscilloscope please refer to the printed Quick Start Guide supplied with the instrument Minimum PC requirements For the PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscope to operate correctly you must connect it to a computer with the minimum requirements to run Windows or the following whichever is the higher specification Processor Pentium class processor or equivalent Memory 256 MB Disk space Software occupies about 30 MB Operating system Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or Vista Ports USB 1 1 compliant port minimum USB 2 0 compliant port recommended 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 2 3 Safety information We strongly recommend that you read the general safety information below before using your oscilloscope for the first time If you use the oscilloscope in a manner contrary to these instructions safety protection built in to the equipment may cease to function This could cause damage to your computer or other equipment or lead to injury to yourself and others Maximum input range The PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscopes are designed to measure voltages in the range stated in the Specifications 1 table The oscilloscope can withstand the maximum voltage range stated in the Specifications 10 table and operation with voltages exceeding this range may cause physical damage Mains voltages The PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes ar
278. ion FFT Windows FFT Measurements Zoom Zoom feature Complex Scale Vertical expanding and positioning Horizontal expanding and positioning Histogram Histogram Axis Specifications amp Characteristics Up to four math waveforms can be defined and displayed using math functions F1 F4 Add Subtract Multiply Divide Invert Absolute Exponentiation e Exponentiation 10 Logarithm e Logarithm 10 Differentiate Integrate Inverse FFT Linear Interpolation Sin x x Interpolation Smoothing Trend Any channel waveform memory math function Spectrum or constant can be selected as a source for one of two operands Up to two fast Fourier transforms can be run simultaneously Frequency Span Sample Rate 2 Record Length 2 x Time Base Range Frequency Resolution Sample Rate Record Length The built in filters Rectangular Nicolson Hanning Flattop Blackman Harris and Kaiser Bessel allow optimization of frequency resolution transients and amplitude accuracy Marker measurements can be made on frequency delta frequency magnitude and delta magnitude Automated FFT Measurements include FFT Magnitude FFT Delta Magnitude THD FFT Frequency and FFT Delta Frequency The zoom feature allows waveforms memories functions and spectrums to be expanded and positioned in both vertical and horizontal axes Allows precise comparison and study of fine waveform detail without affectin
279. ion in a Sampling loop Loop gain in a calibrated system Is normally unity 1 but can go to values more or less than unity Low The value used as the 0 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot Low pass filter A circuit that attenuates the high frequency components in an analog signal Luminance The brightness or intensity of a color Luminosity The relative brightness of a color A 100 luminosity is the maximum color brightness A 0 luminosity is pure black M Main Sweep When main sweep is enabled all input channels will be displayed along a single common timebase If delayed sweep is enabled then the display shows an expanded view of a selected portion of the main sweep 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 398 Margin Measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors Markers On screen markers that you can align with a waveform to take accurate measurements Markers are two sets of horizontal vertical or waveform markers in the waveform display area used for making custom voltage and time measurements Markers or Cursors can be placed anywhere on the displayed waveform and the scope will display the numerical position of the markers and the difference between the markers with units in volts and time for the time domain display or
280. is similar to the vertical position control on analog scopes Offset is precisely calibrated on a digital scope The offset voltage is the voltage at the centre of the graticule area Offset null An adjustment to remove any unwanted DC offset that may be present in the sampler Effectively zeroes the sampler so that an input signal with zero volts of amplitude delivers a zero volt output OMA Optical Modulation Amplitude The difference between the average power levels of the logic 1 level High and the logic O level Low of the optical pulse signal The levels are the Means of the logical levels sampled within an Aperture of the logical 1 and O regions of the pulse The logical 1 and O time intervals are marked by the crossings of a reference level determined as the Average Optical Power AOP of the signal One Level One level is a measure of the mean value of the logical 1 of an eye diagram OR A logic circuit having the property that if at least one input is true the output is true Oscilloscope An instrument used to make voltage changes visible over time The word oscilloscope comes from oscillate since oscilloscopes are often used to measure oscillating voltages Overshoot Overshoot is a distortion that follows a waveform edge transition This distortion occurs after the edge crosses through the waveform threshold levels and can occur on either the rising or falling edge O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve
281. is determined as follows A Moise F p maz Fert osla minl keri osie where s is the set of samples within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the eye aperture at either the High or the Low level settable RZ Noise P p One and RZ Noise P p Zero The RZ Noise P p One and RZ Noise P p Zero measurements are made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 150 5 4 8 12 RZ Noise RMS One and RZ Noise RMS Zero NRZ Noise RMS is a measurement of the single standard deviation of the data distribution sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High logical 1 or Low logical 0 levels Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop Ce Print Help 1 1 493 TSE Eye Diagram ve Parameters Y RZ Eve Paramete 1 493 Toals 12 GHz 1 495 Tals Persistence Ex
282. isk menu allows you to save your acquired waveform or database as arbitrary file to a disk in either internal format or text format You can load these waveforms at a later time into the waveform memory M1 M4 and display them on the instrument s display screen A database also can be loaded and displayed but not via the waveform memory M1 M4 Save recall capability is helpful when you want to Recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other waveforms e Extend the waveform carrying capacity of the oscilloscope The PicoScope 9000 Supports two channels four waveform memories four math functions and two spectrums 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 319 5 13 5 1 0 Aa ke Po 2 5 13 5 3 ps9000 en Menu File Type f Waveform File O Database File The File Type menu selects how waveforms are stored to disk Two options are avallable Waveform File Database File Waveform File The Waveform File is used for storing the last record of the waveform data acquired by the instrument after the Save button was pressed You can save acquired waveforms to a file so that you can recall them at a later time and display them on the instrument s screen and perform different measurements Database File The Database File is used for storing the multiple waveform database acquired by the instrument between clicking the Save button and later clicking any another control
283. istance ratiometric horizontal measurements The markers are display limited so you cannot move them off screen Also if you resize waveforms the markers do not track That is a marker stays at its screen position ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 188 Marker aay The Marker menu allows you to turn on and position calibrated ener colored markers on the display For example you can use the M1 POSITION solid line control to move the X1 marker horizontal position The position value of the marker will be displayed in the Measurement Area of the display However it can be changed to a different color in the display menu You can use the markers to make custom measurements or to use as visual reference point on the display Marker measurement results The Measurement Area of the GUI displays the values of the marker positions and measurements on tabs The marker position readout is based on the units of the source waveform The marker resolution is limited to the resolution of the display As you move a marker its position is displayed in the Measurement Area The horizontal value X axis is the time ES delay from the left border of the display graticule and the vertical position Y axis is measured with respect to the corresponding source ground f Independent C Paired The following information is dis
284. iv a E OFFSET oy a 5 1 Bandwidth Full Narrow DESKEN At Acq os ai hlode Main Intensified Delayed a 0 o 100 r Dual Delayed KIG Con Off chik 2 nelly fe Ext Dir f Pos O Meg O Ext HF DELTA DELAY El id E ic T7 z Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics Z Cee A ASB A ad a ua ft a Delay of a waveform The DELAY spin box allows you to simultaneously control the position of both delayed timebases from O up to maximum value of 10 divisions of main timebase in one of three ways By using the DELAY spin box By using corresponding spin box in the Permanent Controls Areal31 e By using the Pop up Keypadl 7 for some specific settings If fine mode is off the delay can be changed in a sequence of 0 5 major divisions of the main timebase When fine mode is on you can change delay in a sequence of 0 001 major divisions of main timebase O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 351 Menu The possible maximum value of DELAY can be calculated from the following condition Maximum Delay 10 x SCALE B 10 x SCALE A ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 352 5 15 7 Dual Delayed This function expands and displays the intensified portion of the waveform The amount of expansion depends on the SCALE B setti
285. ive Jitter p p parameter 270 Positive Jitter RMS parameter 271 Positive Width parameter 252 Power Requirements 19 Prescaled trigger 13 Print button 341 ps9000 en Index Q Quick Start Guide 3 R Recall Factory button Recall Power Off button Recall Setup button 326 Recall User Mask 229 Record Length variable Rectangular window Refresh time 59 Repairs 4 Reset all persistence modes RIGHT MARGIN variable 308 Rise Time parameter 256 Run button 333 Run Until menu 34 Run Until Action button RZ AC RMS parameter 13 7 Area parameter 120 Bit Rate parameter 121 Bit Time parameter 122 Contrast Ratio parameters Cycle Area parameter 123 Extinction Ratio parameters Eye Amplitude parameter Eye Height parameters Eye Opening parameter Eye Width parameters 124 Fall Time parameter 125 Jitter p p Fall parameters Jitter p p Rise parameters Max parameter 145 Mean parameter 146 Mid parameter 147 Min parameter 148 Negative Crossing parameter Noise p p parameters 149 One Level parameter 151 Peak Peak parameter 152 Positive Crossing 130 Positive Duty Cycle parameter 131 Pulse Symmetry parameter 132 Pulse Width parameter 133 Rise Time parameter 134 RMS parameter 153 Signal to Noise parameter 154 Suppression Ratio parameters 327 329 33 166 170 59 232 138 140 142 143 144 127 128 129 138 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide RZ Zero Level parameter 155
286. kers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of negative pulse width value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 255 Menu Negative pulse width value is affected by the Define Param 2 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 256 5 11 3 5 Rise Time Rise Time is a measure of the time at the upper threshold minus the time at the lower threshold on the edge you are measuring on It is a measure of the transition time of the data on the positive rising edge of a waveform The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop mee Print About 1 250 Gsalz 250 Gsalz Persistence Measure Parameterz F Period F Frequency Pos Width Neg Width e Fize Time TF Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing External Direct Time Base Bit Peri
287. l be performed only inside these margins Cycle Mean value is affected by the Define Param menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 288 5 11 4 13 Cycle dc RMS Cycle dc RMS is the averaged root mean square voltage of one cycle of the waveform value over the measurement region The average of the data values is taken of an integral number of periods The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either cycle ac or dc RMS measurements See also dc RMS 23 Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Run Stop Single Parameters Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude Middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area PON RS A LEAR ETSAN ANE PI ROCA TIT PROTA A Semaine ID LAO EAEAN ERICA Lena ame E Cycle Mean seceeecernennneesenenenspensenseccssecssccescecen O rer sensnenseeenecneennennneeseeeasrenecereeeseenseneeeeseennennsenssnenecese PA mn PP ea SALE E e Cycle de RMS 1 naidiy Cycle ac RMS DELAY Cycle Area os as Es Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot
288. l functions for this selected channel from the Acquisition menu The Channel menu can be active only when the Alternate mode is selected in the Sampling Model 2 menu O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 26 5 1 4 Mode Sample Stable Average Multiple Average f Median Average 7 Min ttax Envelop 7 Wax Envelope 7 Min Envelope f Peak Detect The Mode option lets you choose how the oscilloscope will create points in the waveform record The PicoScope 9000 supports three basic acquisition modes These are Sample mode default mode acquires one sample point per trigger and displays results without further processing Average mode calculates the average values for each record point over many waveform records Envelope mode uses the highest and lowest samples across several waveform records When you select the Average mode you can enter the number of averages with the AVERAGE N variable When you select the Envelope mode you can enter the number of acquisitions with the ENVELOPE N variable Acquisition modes do not affect the data sampling itself However they do affect the analysis of the sampling and therefore the way the oscilloscope combines the samples into a data point value Envelope and Average modes operate after the oscilloscope has taken two or more acquisitions For example each Average mode averages the corresponding data points from two or
289. l over the graticule area and represents a range of counts which depends on the total number of hits As the total count increases the range of hits represented by each shade also increases The shades are fixed and cannot be changed by the user Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy oe Print About 12 GHz z eT Channels hannel 1 f chi Cha On Off External Direct Display isplay i All Locked Per Trace Trace El a E Dots Vectors Var Persistence Infin Persistence C Var Gray Scalin Infin Gray Scalir Var Color Graciir Infin Color Gradi REFRESH TIME 203 Acquire f On SCALE 400 r OFFSET E O off i C Narrow Reset All DESKEVY CA Acq chi A cha E lo A 2nsidiv Etr S Post Neg O AB C EHF os Cno MO Gray scaling display style You can use the gray scaling persistence style to display waveforms that use the instrument measurement database This database consists of all data samples displayed on the screen The measurement database provides the data for the construction of histograms and performing mask tests If the gray scaling persistence style is left active for a long period of time the waveform will become saturated with the shades t
290. l rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 266 5 11 3 11 Burst Width Burst Width is defined as the time between the first and last crossings either positive or negative of the waveform at the mid reference level in the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico rechnelaaa PicoScope 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Persistence External Direct O x Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate 5400 mz y Main O Intensified e Delayed Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing e Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Current Total Wma Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed 6 513 ns Con amp off m f Ext Dir e Pos Ne i Ext HF 5 OC intck IC Burst Width definition Burst width is determined as follows Positive Width TcrossL TcrossF where TcrossL is the horizontal coordinate of the last crossing and TcrossF is the horizontal coordinate of the first cros
291. l samples s within the eye window When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 147 5 4 8 9 ps9000 en Menu RZ Mid Peres RZ Mid is a measure of the middle level between the Max and Min vertical values of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo OY o Print Help Eye Diagram es ESE Ele SS Time Base ve Parameters Persistence FP ACRMS FF Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max Mean I hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level in ensitied elayed 01 Ta L A Current Total Meas vinim Waxi Dual Delayed E Signal to Noise A 193 3 mw 16 199 9 mw y Hy Con Off Zero Level BELT DELAY RZ Mid definition The RZ Mid is determined as follows RZ Mid Max Min 2 where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to u
292. lates a strip chart recorder showing a continuously drawn waveform at slow sweep speeds Waveforms can be displayed a slow sweeps but will be displayed only when the acquisition period has a full record not point by point The trigger activity light on the front panel will assist in showing the acquisition process ROM Read only memory is any type of memory that cannot be readily rewritten The information is stored permanently and used repeatedly Usually randomly accessible Runt Pulse A runt pulse is a pulse in your waveform that is shorter than the other pulses in the waveform 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 407 6 19 ps9000 en Glossary RZ Return to zero A type of signal coding that ensures in any one bit period that the signal is turned on for the first half of a logical one pulse and turned off or nearly off for the second half of the logical one pulse As with NRZ coding the signal is turned off or nearly off for the entire duration of a logical zero pulse S Sample The oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval Sample mode is the default acquisition mode Sample and hold S H A circuit that acquires an analog voltage and stores it temporarily in a capacitor This circuit is also referred to as a sample and hold amplifier SHA Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a timebase For real ti
293. layed Con amp Off DELTA DELAY os Suppression W DE e Phase KIG a A sans idiy e Ext Dir fe Pos B Neg CAIB CO Ext HF CA os Int Clk C Spectrum Magnitude of 500 MHz pulse waveform 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 371 Menu Phase Phase is measured with respect to a cosine whose maximum occurs at the left hand edge of the screen at which point it is 0 Similarly a positive going sine wave starting at the left hand edge of the screen has a 90 phase You can display phase data as a function of frequency in degrees You can zero the noise phase for magnitudes below a threshold level a Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle utoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy E Print About 12 GHz 10 z 3 0 GSsa z Vectors External Direct Time Base Time Base f Time Bit Period Bit kate E A400 Wiis Mode Main Intensified Delayed ir Complex Signal 0 C Complex Scale i Magnitude f Phase i Real C Imaginary SEALE B 1 naidi ELA Pos Gual Delayed Suppression oe e Phase SUPPRESS LEVEL gt Con tf otf Est HF DELTA DELAY AEN ents ra e pos P E Int Clk ov B Display save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics 5 msddiv Ext Dir Pos
294. le Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About 12 GHz u s 12 GHz 500 GSi Persistence Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Poe Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum F Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Iw Neg Jitter RMS O x External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate E A400 Wiis y Mode f Main Intensified e Delayed Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed Con t off T 0 DELTA DELAY m f Ext Dir oo gt Neg Ext HF cock MOR Channels Trigger Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics Negative Jitter RMS definition Negative Jitter RMS is determined as follows Negative Jitter RMS 10 standard deviation of the Horizontal Histogram in the Middle Threshold The Margins 3A menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of Negative jitter RMS will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 274 5 11 4 Y Parameters Y Parameters Measure Clicking the Y Parameters button opens the list of amplitude ee parameters The list includes seven
295. le Area TE DutCyeDist C Main DutCycDist fee Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency e Jitter P p v Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Minima Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY CA 67 paidi EtDir pr fe C AIB Ext HF VE gt cno MO 200 mi ov NRZ Jitter definition NRZ Jitter can be displayed in one of two formats peak to peak NRZ Jitter p p measurement or RMS NRZ Jitter RMS measurement Both values are based on the Standard deviation of the crossing point position NRZ Jitter peak to peak is equal to the full width of the histogram at the eye crossing point NRZ Jitter p p 60 crossing NRZ Jitter RMS is defined as one standard deviation from the histogram mean at the eye crossing point NRZ Jitter RMS 10 crossing ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 90 5 4 5 11 NRZ Period NRZ Period is twice the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points It would be the period of a digital signal of a O 1 0 1 stream Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display un StopiSingle Autosca Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ie Print About Eye Diagram 1 2 GH Ss 12 GHz 74 val Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Units Time C Bit Period le z T4635 Goals Bit kate Js A400 Wiis Mole f Main
296. lected the Source drop down list box located on the first page of the Measurel2 f menu selects the reference source while the Source 2 drop down list box located on the Dual Chan Parameters menu page selects the second source ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 294 5 11 5 2 Delay Delay 1R 1R Delay is defined as a time interval between the crossings of the two Delay 1R 1F mid reference levels on the two sources of the measurement The Delay 1F 1R PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left FT Delay 1F 1F most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the Delay 1R 0R measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the Delay 1R nF measurement region right margin Delay 1F nR Delay 1F nF Delay is determined as follows Delay Tcross2 Tcross1 where Tcross2 is a horizontal crossing on the rising or falling edge of the second source and Tcross1 is a horizontal crossing on the rising or falling edge of the first reference source The delay will not be measured until the rising and falling edges on both sources complete the transition through all three levels You can select one of the eight delay options Delay 1R 1R is the delay between the first rising edge on the reference source and the first rising edge on the second source e T Delay 1R 1F is the delay between the first rising edge on the
297. led Memory Depth in this scope Recovered Clock The process of extracting a clock signal from electrical digital communications signals The resulting trigger signal is made available to the instrument The recovered clock has a lower jitter modulation bandwidth than trigger from data signal Reference memory Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The instrument saves the data even when the instrument is turned off or unplugged Reference waveforms Waveforms that are static not live see live waveforms Reference waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references or to files in the instrument s file system Once saved they do not update O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 406 Reflection Coefficient Rho In time domain reflectometry the ratio of peak amplitude of a reflection to the incident step amplitude The observed reflection coefficient may depend upon system rise time losses in the transmission medium and the nature of the discontinuity that produced the reflection Repetitive Sampling Repetitive sampling is another term that is used to refer to equivalent time sampling In the repetitive or equivalent time sampling mode a waveform record is built up by taken from multiple trigger events This process allows samples in the waveform record to be spaced more closely together for re
298. led within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the One Level NRZ Noise P p Zero is a measurement of the maximum range of the amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the Zero Level Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo I Copy aoe Print Help Eye Diagram 49 tE 193 is External HF Time Base ve Parameters Y MRS Eye Paramet AC RMS Avg Power T Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio I Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Tl Max Mean T Mic T Min Neg Overshoot Iw Noise P p One WW Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level aS 49 Persistence Bit Period Bit Rate E A400 Wiis Mode i Main C Intensified f Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY fos Reet Ext Dir 7 Ext HF te ai 181 2ps ie Int Clk 30 5 le Post Hed OO rns O Acquistion Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics NRZ Noise P p One definition ps9000 en 106 107 Menu Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 17 GHz 2 ioj
299. ll Time definition A histogram is first constructed to find the mean location of the crossing points relative to the one level and zero level Histograms are then constructed at each of the three threshold levels for example the 10 50 and 90 points on the transition The instrument analyses each histogram to determine the histogram mean at which the data crosses the separate threshold levels Once the scanning of the waveform is complete and the instrument has identified the mean location for each threshold crossed then fall time can be computed NRZ Fall Time Time at the Lower Threshold Crossing Time at the Upper Threshold Crossing The instrument has two standard threshold levels for which fall time may be measured The default setting is between the 20 and 80 points on the transition and the second is between the 10 and 90 points on the transition The 20 to 80 transition is recommended for devices with significant pulse distortion Also user defined threshold levels can be selected You can define the threshold settings that you want by going to the Define Parameters Thresholds menu O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 87 ps9000 en Menu If the fall time relative to the time per division is a small value the data acquired at the threshold levels on the falling edge will not yield accurate measurement results The falling edge will appear very steep on the display screen If
300. lope menu 361 U Undo button 338 Units menu 184 306 Upgrades 6 UPPER THRESHOLD variable 160 UPPER MIDDLE and LOWER THRESHOLD variables 306 Usage 6 USB 19 User defined Masks 210 V Variable persistence 49 Vector display 49 Vertical sensitivity 37 View Define Parameters menu 314 Viruses 6 W Waveform Memory menu 317 WAVEFORMS variable 302 Website 7 WEIGHT variable 181 302 WFMS IN CYCLE variable 157 X X Eye Parameters button 76 X NRZ Eye Parameters 77 ps9000 en 423 Index X RZ Eye Parameters 119 Y Y ac RMS parameter 284 Amplitude parameter 280 Area parameter 285 Base parameter 279 Cycle ac RMS parameter 289 Cycle Area parameter 290 Cycle dc RMS parameter 288 Cycle Mean parameter 287 dc RMS parameter 283 Maximum parameter 275 Mean parameter 282 Middle parameter 281 Minimum parameter 276 Negative Overshoot parameter 292 Parameters menu 274 Peak Peak parameter 277 Phase parameter 296 Positive Overshoot parameter 291 Top parameter 278 Y Eye Parameters button 76 Y NRZ Eye parameters 93 Y RZ Eye Parameters 136 Z Zoom 17 Zoom Menu 366 Zoom Complex Scale menu 370 Zoom HORIZ POSITION variable 369 Zoom HORIZ SCALE variable 368 Zoom PHASE SCALE function 368 Zoom Scaling button 367 Zoom Source menu 367 Zoom SUPPRESS LEVEL variable 374 Zoom Suppression menu 374 Zoom VERT POSITION variable 368 Zoom VERTICAL SCALE function 368 Zoom Vertical Scale Type menu 367 ps9000 en O 2009 P
301. m Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed Gain hi i 40 9 76 07 si 11 Con oft Gain dB DELTA DELAY a ne 2 nadi r Pos Neg of Bt HF Os cno EES Example of phase measurement between two sine wave signals Both the first reference and the second sources should have an equal period value when the phase measurements are performed The Margins 3A menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Phase value will be performed only inside these margins Phase value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 298 5 11 5 4 Gain Am pl ltude Parametel ain Gain de Gain is the amplitude gain between two selected waveforms The PicoScope 9000 Starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Gain is determined as follows Apmlitude 2 Ampi tude Crain Amp i tide 2 Gain d 2Uloe Zn Amplitudel where Amplitude1 is the amplitude measurements of the first reference source and Amplitude2 is the amplitude measurements of the second source You
302. made in the central of the bit period within Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 97 5 4 6 3 ps9000 en Menu NRZ Extinction Ratio dB NRZ Extinction Ratio and NRZ Extinction Ratio le Ed Ratio db le Ed Ralio de e Ed Ratio A a 4 eh NRZ Extinction Ratio for an eye diagram is simply the ratio of the logic high level Vone or Pone to the logic low level Vzero or Pzero A very high extinction ratio typically implies that the logic low level is very small In the case of an optical transmitter the logic low level would approach a condition where the laser is nearly turned off Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Eye Diagram ve Parameters DT AC RMS D Avg Power FF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Y Ext Ratio dB Iv Ext Ratio Iv Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB hax Mean hic T Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level Fun E O x StopiSingle Autoscale Detautt Setup Undo I Copy Cee Print Help GHz 1 493 Tas 12 GHz 1 493 Tak Persistence External HF Time Base Time Base
303. me Bi Period D Avg Power TF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Jw Eye Height e Eye Height dB Fax Mean T Mic T Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS M SiN Ratio SN Ratio dB Zero Level Bit kate 5400 Mbs s Main O Intensified e Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Minima 21 ExDir g Pos E Hed f Ext HF EEN C Int Clk 50 NRZ Eye Height definition Similarly to the extinction ratio measurements a vertical histogram is calculated on the data Vone and the high level distribution are determined and similar patterns are determined for the low levels The Vone and Vzero levels are the relative means of the histograms The noise is measured through the histograms as three standard deviations from both the one level and zero level into the eye opening The eye height can be defined in one of the two following formats NRZ ByeHeight F e 30 1 P tT eno esp NEZ_ Aye ferghitds 1lOQlog W 30 Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time 2009 Pico Technolo
304. me Bit Period D Minimum Peak Peak Top Bit kate Js S400 Wiis Base TE Amplitude f Main FT Middle Intensified Delayed Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Iw Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot 1 naidi SALE B 1 naidi DELAT C Dual Delayed Con f off Kig Total Wima Minimum 11790 g7 DELTA DELAT fos 1 naidi EtDir pr oe O Ext HF al na 0s cme ES Area definition Area is determined as followed If Start End then return the interpolated value at Start Otherwise End Area Waveform side arf In practice the PicoScope 9000 uses the following algorithm N A Area gt FU 7 where N is the number of waveform points on screen and not the memory depth V 1 is the voltage at the i th point on screen and t is the measured region duration O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 286 The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope Is making the automatic measurement All calculations of area value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 287 Menu 5 11 4 12 Cycle Mean Cycle Mean is the averaged mean of all the waveform data of one cycle of the signal over the measurement region The average
305. me digitisers the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sampling rate For equivalent time digitisers the time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sample Point An item of raw data from an ADC used to calculate a waveform point Sampling Rate Sampling rate is the rate at which the acquisition system samples a waveform In real time mode all samples in a given waveform record are taken from one trigger event and are evenly spaced in time at a distance of 1 sample rate In equivalent time mode a waveform record is built up from multiple trigger events This process allows Samples in the waveform record to be spaced more closely together for repetitive waveforms As a result the waveforms appear to have been sampled at a much higher rate sometimes referred to as an effective sample rate Sampling The process of capturing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized for further processing or display Two general methods of sampling are real time sampling and equivalent time sampling Sampling efficiency The percentage of signal voltage transferred across the sampling gate when the gates conduct Sampling Frequency The clock rate at which samples are taken during the process of digitizing an analog Signal in a DSO or digitizer Sampling gate An electronic switch that briefly conducts a command to collect and
306. measurement All calculations of middle value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 282 5 11 4 8 Mean Mean is the average mean of all the waveform data over the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Technology e 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz 7 Oo x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale A Setup i Undo E e E Print About Measure Persistence External Direct Time Base Parameters Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top Base F Amplitude T middle v Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Bit Period Bit kate 1 5400 mes S400 Wiis 1 5400 mes Mode SCALE B 200 psidiv DELAY 5ns ae ee Con f Off DELTA DELAT OE f Ext Dir mo Neg Ext HF cmc A Mean definition Mean is determined as follows 1 iv Mean gt VID PE jel where n is the number of waveform points on screen and not the memory depth V 1 is the voltage at the th point on screen The Margins 2A menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope i
307. meter Negative Duty Cycle parameter Negative Jitter p p parameter Negative Jitter RMS parameter Negative Width parameter 254 NRZ AC RMS parameter 94 Area parameter 78 Bit Rate parameter 79 Bit Time parameter 80 Crossing parameters 95 Crossing Time parameter 81 Cycle Area parameter 82 Duty Cycle Distortion parameter 83 Extinction Ratio parameters 97 Eye Amplitude parameter 99 Eye Height parameters 100 Eye Width parameter 85 Fall Time parameter 86 240 244 250 265 262 272 273 ps9000 en 421 NRZ Frequency parameter 88 Jitter parameter 89 Max parameter 101 Mean parameter 102 Mid parameter 103 Min parameter 104 Negative Overshoot parameter 105 Noise parameters 106 Noise RMS parameters One Level parameter Peak Peak parameter Period parameter 90 Positive Overshoot parameter Rise Time parameter 91 RMS parameter 114 Signal to Noise parameters Zero Level parameter 117 34 108 150 110 112 113 115 Number of acquisitions Numeric values entering 375 Nyquist frequency O Other masks list P Package contents 8 Parameter Mode menu PC connection 19 PEAK LEFT and PEAK RIGHT variables PEAK LEVEL variable 313 Permanent Controls 315 Persistence 49 time 59 Physical Characteristics 19 PicoScope 9000 Series PC Sampling Oscilloscopes 2 162 209 314 313 Place on Graticule menu 62 Pop up keypad 375 Positive Crossing parameter 264 Positive Duty Cycle parameter 260 Posit
308. meters Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle e Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Bit kate 5400 mz y Main O Intensified f Delayed Current Total Wima Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed A741 ne Con ot al f Ext Dir a Pos Ne f Ext HF 5 FC intck IC Positive Crossing definition Positive crossing is determined as follows Positive Crossing Tcross where Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first positive crossing The Margins 37 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of positive crossing value will be performed only inside these margins Positive crossing value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 265 Menu 5 11 3 10 Negative Crossing Negative Crossing is defined as the time of the first negative crossing of the data Sampled at the mid reference level in the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of th
309. more waveforms not the waveform as a whole Envelope mode builds an envelope from the peak minimum and maximum values of each point on a succession of waveforms Side effect of averaging and enveloping Averaging improves the accuracy of some software measurements because the measurements are taken from averaged data However some measurements can be adversely affected by averaging or enveloping For example if you take a rise time measurement of a signal with horizontal jitter the averaged trace will indicate an inaccurately slow reading Be cautious when taking software measurements of averaged or enveloped traces Use statistical measurements on the unaveraged signal to take an accurate rise time measurement on a signal with jitter Sample acquisition mode With the Sample radio button pressed the oscilloscope saves one sample during each acquisition interval Samples are accurately acquired at precisely and uniformly programmed intervals When the record is full the oscilloscope acquires new samples that overwrite the previously acquired waveforms In the Sample mode the sample interval varies with the time base settings At slower sweep speeds the sample interval is often so large that the oscilloscope misses information between samples for example repetitive glitches In the above waveform the Sample mode misses a glitch in the first peak but happens to capture it in the second 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps
310. mples Erase Mask Compare with gt E OF FAILED YF hl 0 chi C Cha Test on t Off Delete Polygon Select Action Run Until Action Delete Mask O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 200 5 9 1 Create Mask Clicking the Create Mask button opens the mask selection menu You can select from industry standard electrical masks industry standard optical masks automasks new user defined masks stored user defined mask Also you can edit any mask and save it to a memory 5 9 1 1 Standard Mask Standard Masks allows you to select froma variety of standard telecommunication masks Clicking the Standard Masks button opens the Standard Masks Dialog Choose a standard to access a list of masks used for optical or electrical waveforms The PicoScope 9000 supports several standards for datacomms and telecomms masks They are SONET SDH Fiber Channel Ethernet ITU G 703 ANSI T1 102 Other Masks 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 201 Menu 5 9 1 1 1 SONET SDH Masks SONET SDH Clicking the SONET SDH tab opens the list of industry standard masks ANSIT1102 Ethemet Fiber Channel TUG 703 Other SONET SDH STMO OC1 51 04 Mbps STMTAZOCS 155 52 Mbps ST M3009 466 56 Mbps STM OCIA 621 89 Mbps STME OC18 333 12 Mbps oT MavO024 1 2442 Gbps STM16 0C46 2 40032 Gbps FEC 2666 2 666 Gbps 5 1M6400132 3 95325 Gbps FEC 1066 10 664 Gbps
311. n the ratio of a vertical distance to a horizontal distance A positive slope increases from left to right while a negative slope decreases from left to right Smoothing A process that reduces displayed noise by reducing the gain of the sampling loop By oversampling the input signal the sampling loop can maintain an apparent unity gain while reducing noise SNR Signal to Noise Ratio SNR is the ratio of the magnitude of the signal to that of the noise Source The source input channel math function waveform memory spectrum or constant used when performing tasks such as measurements math or mask tests Square The process of multiplying a value by itself Square Wave A common wave shape consisting of repeating square pulses 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 411 ps9000 en Glossary Standard Deviation Standard deviation is the measure of the dispersion or spread of the statistical average of all results for a particular measurement Standard deviation is represented by the Greek letter sigma 0 In a Gaussian distribution two sigma or within 10 of the mean is where 68 3 within of the data points reside Six sigma or within 30 of the mean is where 99 7 percent of the data points reside State Triggering State triggering is an edge qualified pattern trigger A trigger event occurs if a specified pattern is present when an edge occurs on the designated clock waveform State Qual
312. n decibels per division The histogram is plotted according to the following formula A d 01 a Bm Peak where X is the number of hits in a histogram row for vertical histograms or the number of hits in a histogram column for horizontal histograms Peak is the number of hits in the largest histogram column or row and dB Is the log value that gets plotted ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 186 3 6 6 4 5 6 7 5 6 8 OFFSET Linear offset For the linear scale type the offset is the percentage of the peak at the left edge or lower edge of the display For example on a horizontal histogram an offset of 20 places 20 of the peak at the lower edge of the display Therefore 20 of the histogram will be below the display and the other 80 of the histogram will be above the lower edge of the display displayed on the screen Logarithmic offset For the log scale type the offset is in decibels at the left edge or lower edge of the display The histogram is plotted according to the following formula dS 20log Peak where X is the number of hits per row for vertical histograms or the number of hits per column for horizontal histograms Peak is the number of hits in the peak and dB is the log value that gets plotted This means O dB is at the peak of the histogram and the offset can only contain negative values For example with a horizontal histog
313. n of corresponding limit independently 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 183 Menu 5 6 5 2 LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT The LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables allow you to use the histogram limits to select a region of the database When the Independent mode in the Limits 182 menu is selected the TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables move the vertical histogram limits vertically across the display while the LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT variables move the horizontal histogram limits horizontally across the display When the Paired mode in the Limits menu is selected the TOP LIMIT variable moves the full histogram window up or down and the LEFT LIMIT variable moves the full histogram window left or to right At the same time the BOTTOM LIMIT variable moves the bottom limit of the histogram window up or down while the RIGHT LIMIT variable moves the right limit of the histogram window left or to right Because the database that the histogram is derived from is limited to the size of the graticule area placing the histogram limits beyond the graticule area results in a histogram of only the graticule area For jitter measurements you would position the TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT histogram limits so that the histogram is built from a very narrow horizontal slice of the graticule area For noise measurements you would position the LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT hi
314. nal Direct Display isplay Trace Mode All Locked Per Trace Trace Chi Dots Vectors Var Persistence Infin Persistence C Var Gray Scalin Infin Gray Scalir Var Color Gradir Infin Color Gradi PERSISTENCE TIME a Pa hannel 1 f chi Cha Display on Off Acquire f on or OFFSET DESKEVY At Acc ie A 2 naci Ext Dir E Post N f A B O Ext HF as a ae ca os c recu MERMA Persistence Display Style Persistence style applies to all waveforms Use display persistence to control how waveform data ages By adding persistence you can see a visual history of a waveform s acquisitions over time Setting the persistence to minimum allows for easiest viewing of variations in the acquired waveforms Setting the persistence to infinite allows for a complete view of everything measured in the waveform For example you can see the accumulated peak to peak noise of a waveform over time which may appear significantly different than in only one acquisition You can see timing jitter the variance of the waveform from the trigger event by accumulating acquisitions on the display By adding persistence viewing a waveform s extremes over time is much easier You can have averaging and persistence on at the same time because when averaging is on the averaging is done before the data Is sent to the display Use the Acquisition 207 menu to control
315. nal mode does not use the digital feedback architecture This mode is the best choice for waveforms such as eye diagrams When Multi valued mode is selected the icon appears at the top right of the display O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en ps9000 en Menu sampling Mode Sampling Mode Simultaneous Alternate The Sampling Mode menu selects how the signals will be acquired if more than one channel is selected You can specify Simultaneous or Alternate mode Simultaneous When more than one channel is selected vertical acquisition is done simultaneously for both channels from a common strobe pulse The Simultaneous Sampling Mode provides synchronous dual channel acquisition with insignificant delay between channels You can specify all functions for both channels equally from the Acquisition menu Also you cannot use the DESKEW variable from the Channel menu Alternate When more than one channel is selected the vertical acquisition switches sequentially through the selected channels You can specify all functions for the selected channel from the Acquisition menu independently For example you can select the Stable Average mode for channel 1 and Min Max Envelope mode for channel 2 Also you can use the DESKEW variable from the Channel menu Channel Alt Mode Channel At Mode The Channel Alt Mode menu selects the waveform from one of the channels Ch1 or Ch2 You can specify al
316. nctions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 166 5 5 5 FFT Window FFT Window Windowing is a technique that compensates for some of the limitations of FFT analysis The FFT operation assumes the time record repeats infinitely Unless there are an integral number of cycles of the sampled waveform in the record a discontinuity is created as the end of the record A pure sine wave transforms into a single spectral component but a discontinuity in the time domain causes a frequency domain widening or spreading out of the waveform referred to as spectral leakage Two figures below show a sine wave FFT with and without leakage y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopSingle Auto cale Default Setup Undo i Copy eS E Print About FFT 1 als Vectors External Direct Spectrum 1 tesi Os Display on Off Source 2 neil Sik Ed Pos Neg os cno MO 400 m y To A ASB A I i FFT with leakage 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 167 Menu Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz p Oj x Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop ne Print About FFT 12 GHz E 12 A External Dire
317. nd Random Jitter Trace The visible shapes drawn on the screen of an oscilloscope Transient A signal measured by an oscilloscope that only occurs once also called a single shot event Trend Plot of a parameter value or other characteristic of a measurement over a period of time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 414 Trigger 1 The circuit that initiates a horizontal sweep on an oscilloscope and determines the beginning point of the waveform 2 The signal that tells the DSO to start capturing data Trigger Coupling Describes the circuitry used to connect the trigger source to the trigger circuit Several types of coupling are available HF Reject LF Reject Noise Reject AC and DC The different types of coupling provide improved triggering performance depending on the characteristics of the trigger source Triggered The triggered or normal trigger mode requires that trigger conditions be met before the acquisition process terminates If the trigger conditions are not met the scope will not display any input waveforms The normal or triggered mode is the desired mode of triggering when you want a stable trigger and know the trigger conditions An alternative to the normal or triggered mode is the freerun or auto trigger mode which will force a trigger after a period of time if trigger conditions are not met Trigger Event A trigger event is the change in the
318. nd display the variation of maximum values Min Envelope This radio button tells the oscilloscope to acquire and display the variation of minimum values O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 31 Menu AVERAGE N ENVELOPE N Number of Averages The AVERAGE N variable changes the number of averages records when you select one of the two average radio buttons Stable Average or Multiple Average The number of averages can be specified from 2 to 4096 in multiples of two by one of these methods By using the AVERAGE N spin box By using the Pop up Keypadi27 for some specific settings The waveform is less responsive to changes if a large number of averages is Specified ps9000 en Number of Envelopes The ENVELOPE N variable changes the number of acquisitions when you select one of the three envelope radio buttons Min Max Envelope Max Envelope or Min Envelope The number of acquisitions can be specified from 2 to 4096 in multiples of two or continuously using one of these methods By using the ENVELOPE N spin box By using the Pop up Keypad 27 to enter specific settings 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Pico Techno adi PicoScope 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz 12 GHz sample S00 GSals Channels hannel 2 chi ff Cha e on ie Off f On O Off a 5 2 OFFSET pov ies a a Narrow 200 meli DESK
319. nd stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Oj x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About 12 GHz E 12 GHz 100 GSa 0 GSars Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Iv Neg Width Rise Time TF Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Bit kate E A400 Wiis y bode C Main C Intensified f Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p E Current Total ma Minimum Maximum bean Std Deviation Meg Jitter RMS P a PE 3 ae a 1 467 nz Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a ue 53 Est HF ET EtDir pr a T o ME Negative Width definition Negative pulse width is determined as follows Negative Width Tcross2 Tcross1 where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the two consecutive horizontal crossings on the first negative pulse If more than one negative pulse width can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of the negative pulse width The Margins 2 7 menu sets the margin mar
320. nd you want to recall the entire waveform ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 322 Remember to always copy important settings and waveforms to a removable disk If your original files are damaged or lost you can restore the files from the backup disk Binary format The binary format files wfm extension stored using the internal format contain the vertical and horizontal scaling parameters of the original waveform Therefore when you recall a waveform into a waveform memory you can still perform automatic measurements and use the markers Because the internal format is binary you cannot directly display its contents in a word processing or plotting program However you can convert the binary format file to a text file txt for use in a spreadsheet or word processing program by recalling a wfm waveform and saving it in the text format Text format The text format txt is an ASCII text file format that uses alphanumeric characters to represent the voltage values of a waveform This file format consists of a file header which describes format txt waveform horizontal and vertical scaling information and scope information The header is followed by data which consists of Y values separated by a carriage return and line feed Text format files use 4 to 5 times more disk space than internal format files The text files are a convenient method for transferring waveforms t
321. ng The position of the first delayed timebase depends on the DELAY setting and the position of the second delayed timebase depends on both the DELAY 235 and DELTA DELAY 35 settings Click the On option to select the delayed timebase The following conditions are then avallable o If Off is selected the timebase is equivalent to Delayed Time Base e If On is selected the timebase is equivalent to Dual Delayed Time Base 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 353 Menu 5 15 8 DELTA DELAY The DELTA DELAY function is similar to the delta delay knob of the dual delayed timebase on a traditional oscilloscope Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz E af x Clear Display Fun Stop Single Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy a Print About Channels 1 2 12 GHz Be ig External Direct Time Base hannel 1 Time Base Time i Bit Period Persistence Select Chi i on C Off O che Bit Fate E 0400 Miis A2cquire f On Main Intensified f Delayed otf j m OFFSET E 5 4 e E Narrow 10 DESKEY Alt Acq DELTA DELAY 8 ch Bai DA 2 neldiv fe Ext Dir e Post Meg C AiD Ext HF co E o REN gt OVE Converter Mask Test Eye Diagram TDR TDT Litility Advance teu ye ma m Ia M Jy m A Uy Dual Delay of
322. ng data If the instrument is stopped it starts acquiring data on the next trigger event If the instrument is already in the run mode it continues to acquire data on successive trigger events StopiSinal o The Stop Single button Eene causes the instrument to stop acquiring data or to acquire a single waveform You can stop acquisition if you want to freeze the displayed waveform s for closer analysis or measurement O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 24 5 1 1 Fit Acquisition To Fit Acquisition To Main Menu ingle valued Sh multi walued Sgr The Fit Acquisition To menu selects a mode of digital feedback Main Menu The Main Menu mode selects digital feedback mode for all main menus excluding the following cases NRZ or RZ measurement in the Eye Diagram menu is selected One of the standard masks for eye diagram waveforms is selected in the Mask Test menu When digital feedback mode is selected the E icon appears at the top right of the display When digital feedback sampling loop mode is not selected the IE icon appears at the top right of the display Single valued signal The Single valued signal mode uses a digital feedback architecture that is the best choice for waveforms such as sine waves and pulses When Single valued signal mode is selected the e icon appears at the top right of the display Multi valued signal The Multi valued sig
323. ng of the mean square shot noise current amperes rather than a noise power watts Signal Generator A test device for injecting a signal into a circuit input the circuit s output is then read by an oscilloscope Signal Processing With respect to oscilloscopes this refers to functions that are performed by signal processing hardware or software For example signal measurements rise time overshoot period etc FFTs Integration and Differentiation functions are signal processing functions Sine Wave A common curved wave shape that is mathematically defined by the value of the sin function Single Shot A signal measured by an oscilloscope that only occurs once also called a transient event Signal to Noise ratio SNR Signal to noise is a ratio of the signal difference between one level and zero level relative to the noise present at both levels The ratio of total signal to noise expressed in decibels dB The larger the number the better SNR is calculated by SNR 20 log Signalgms Noise pjys A related unit is the signal to noise and distortion ratio SINAD the ratio of the input Signal to the sum of noise and harmonics SINAD 20 log Signalpyc Noise Harmonics pyc Significant Instant A significant instant is any convenient easily identifiable point on a signal for example a point on either the rising or falling edge of a pulse Simultaneous sample and hold A data acquisition
324. ng the number keys then click one of the multiplier buttons to complete the value The X button means a multiplier of 1 Finally click OK to update the numeric field ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Special Key Definitions Clr i 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 376 Min Enter the minimum value of selected variable Mid Enter the middle value of selected variable Max Enter the maximum value of selected variable Fine Enter the value of selected variable with fine resolution Coarse Enter the value of selected variable with coarse resolution Numeric value keypad Minus Changes the sign of the mantissa Changes the sign of the exponent after you have pressed the exponent key Dimension keypad p pico suffix Appends an exponent of 10 1 to the number you have entered n nano suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered u micro suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered m milli suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered K kilo suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered M mega suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered G giga suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you have entered T tera suffix Appends an exponent of 10 to the number you h
325. nning of the record For this case the window must be rectangular The rectangular window generally gives the best frequency resolution because it results in the narrowest lobe width in the FFT output record It gains frequency resolution at the expense of amplitude accuracy if the frequency of the signal being observed has a non integer number of cycles in the FFT time record Signals not in this class show varying amounts of spectral leakage and scallop loss which can be corrected by using one of the other windows Although the rectangular window has the potential for severe leakage problems in some cases the waveform data in the time record has the same value at both ends of the record thereby eliminating the transient introduced by the FFT Such waveforms are called self windowing Waveforms such as sine bursts impulses and decaying Sinusoids can all be self windowing 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 171 Menu 5 5 5 2 Hamming Window The Hamming window is a bell shaped window It has lower side lobes adjacent to the main lobe than for example the Hann window Time domain characteristics for Hamming window The Hamming window tapers the data to smaller values but not to zero It decreases the amount of energy spillover into adjacent frequency bins increasing the amount of amplitude accuracy at the expense of decreasing the frequency Use the Hamming window for resolving frequencies that are very clos
326. ns of the Negative O vershoot value will be performed only inside these margins O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 293 Menu 5 11 5 Dual Channel Parameters Measure Wal Chian Parameter Timing Parameters e Delay 1R 1R Delay 1R 1F Delay 1F 1R Delay 1F 1F Delay 1R nk Delay 1R nF Delay 1F nR Delay 1F nF Phase Deg FT Phase Rad 5 11 5 1 Source 2 Clicking the Dual Channel Parameters button opens the list of parameters that can be measured with two sources You can select as one of the sources channels 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 spectrums 1 and 2 The list includes eight delay parameters three phase parameters and two gain parameters You can continuously update as many as ten measurement parameters and as many as four statistics measurements at any one time The pulse measurement algorithms for X Parameters will only work when a single valued signal is used and no NRZ eye diagram or RZ eye diagram is present on the screen Measurements made on NRZ and RZ eye diagrams will fail When the Dual Channel Parameters menu is selected the Source drop down list box located on the first page of the Measure 2 menu selects the reference source while the Source 2 drop down list box located on the Dual Channel Parameters menu page selects the second source C gt When the Dual Chan Parameters menu is se
327. nsient signals Use the Hanning window for frequency resolution and general purpose use Use the flattop window for making accurate amplitude measurements of frequency peaks Filter An operation that selectively removes noise from a signal Electronic filters include low pass band pass and high pass types Mathematical filters can operate on data to extract information and to enhance images 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 391 ps9000 en Glossary Fine Vernier or fine control allows a calibrated fine adjustment of a scaling factor such as the channel volts div or the timebase time div For example it is possible to set the V div to 150 mV div instead of the standard choices of 100 or 200 mV div Freerun Freerun is a trigger mode that will attempt to trigger the scope on the specified trigger conditions If the trigger conditions are not met a trigger will be forced displaying the acquired data This is a useful trigger mode to use if you are unsure about the exact trigger conditions as it forces the scope to acquire and display a waveform giving you a glimpse of the waveform Caution should be used if the waveform is low frequency as a free running display may result even if the trigger conditions are valid An alternative to the freerun trigger mode is the triggered or normal trigger mode which requires that the trigger conditions be met before acquiring a waveform Frequency The number o
328. nt However noise levels contributed by the instrument cannot be removed therefore a slightly pessimistic Q factor measurement may result Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz y Oo xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Detautt Setup Undo Copy ae Print Help Eye Diagram 1 1 493 TSass 12 GHz 1 493 E Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y RZ Eye Paramete f Time L o ie Bit Period vg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE FF ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio I Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max Mean F Mic T Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak RMS e Signal to Noize Zero Level Bit kate 51 8400 Wks Chain Intensified f Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Ext Dir Posta Neg f Ext HF m Int Clk 50 RZ Signal to Noise definition RZ Signal to Noise ratio is computed as k _orgual io Noise _ Aafia ee ee A oe ee The RZ One Level and Zero Level measurements are made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary
329. ntage is a measure of the amplitude of eye diagram crossing points relative to the one level and zero levels Crossing Point The point in time in an NRZ eye diagram where the rising edge of a waveform intersects with the falling edge Crosstalk 1 A phenomenon in which one or more signals interfere with another signal 2 Unwanted coupling of a signal from one channel to another Cursors Cursors are two sets of horizontal and vertical markers in the waveform display area used for making custom voltage and time measurements See Markers 3 D DAC Digital to analog converter Dark Calibration Dark calibration extinction ratio calibration is a calibration that allows the instrument to identify internally generated offset dark level signals and remove them during the extinction ratio measurement calculations Data acquisition DAQ Gathering information from sources such as sensors and transducers Data Dependent Jitter Data dependent jitter is pattern related jitter caused by the combined effects of inter symbol interference and duty cycle distortion DC Direct Current A signal with a constant voltage and current DC Coupling DC coupling passes both the AC and DC components of the waveform to the channel input or the trigger path If a channel is DC coupled the DC component of the waveform can be quickly measured by noting the distance from the ground indicator DC Level Shift A change in the nominal
330. ntrol the noise Checking Phase reduces the effect of noise in your phase FFT 9 17 5 SUPPRESS LEVEL SUPPRESS LEWEL Your source waveform record may have a noise component with phase angles that randomly vary from to This noise could make the phase display unusable In such a Case use phase suppression to control the noise The SUPPRESS LEVEL control allows you to adjust the phase suppression level You specify the phase suppression level in dB with respect to a peak having maximum amplitude among other peaks If the magnitude of the frequency is greater than this threshold then its phase angle will be displayed FFT magnitudes below this level will have their phase set to zero O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 375 Menu 5 18 Pop up keypad The Pop up keypad allows you to enter numeric values directly You can use it with any numeric field in the PicoScope 9000 program just right click on the field and select Calculator You can also type variables directly into numeric fields first type the number then finish by typing a single letter p n u m X k M G T The meanings of these letters are explained below 1 Choose the numeric field EE that you wish to edit e 2 Right click on the field to bring up the context menu 3 Click the Calculator command to bring up the Pop up keypad C Fine Coarse 4 Enter the new value numerically by clicki
331. o Noise Bee oe vee 420 my FEU mv Con off Zero Level DELTA DELAY RZ Maximum definition The RZ maximum eye amplitude is determined as follows RZ Maximum max VertPos s where s is the set of samples within the eye window When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 146 5 4 8 8 RZ Mean e Mean RZ Mean is a measure of the arithmetic mean of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz x Clear Display Stop sSingle Autoscale Setup Undo Copy OE Print Help Eye Diagram i ES SS Time Base ve Parameters AC RMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio an in FT Ext Ratio C Intensified FT Eye Amplitude e Delayed Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max J Mean F Mic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level Peak Peak a Dual Delayed Signal to Noise Con i off Zero Level DELTA DELAY RZ Mean definition The RZ Mean is determined as follows N A Mean pean Veri Posisi a Peri OSIS i l over al
332. o other software applications You can import this file format into many spreadsheet or word processing programs Both The Both uses both internal and text formats Two files are needed when you save waveform in both formats Ensure your waveform files have the file name extension wfm or txt If you specify a different extension the instrument automatically corrects the extension Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform or an active waveform memory Display the waveform in the timebase with which you want to Save it Enter a useful comment in the file name about each waveform you save Write the comment so that it explains the purpose of the saved file when that file is later accessed O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 323 Menu 2 Waveform File is selected in the File Type 31 menu while Auto is selected in the File Namel menu Clicking the Save button stores your acquired waveforms automatically incrementing a new number in a previous file name with its selected format s 3 Database File is selected in the File Typel3 menu Clicking the Save button opens Windows Load Waveform dialog box which allows you to select a file name Only cgs file extension can be use in this case ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 324 5 13 5 5 Load The Load button loads the sele
333. oScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 17 GHz 2 ioj x Clear Display Pun Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo IE Copy Pel Print Help Eye Diagram 12 an ls 12 GHz 1 493 TSalh External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y NRZ Eye Paramet AC RMS Time Avg Power i Bit Period Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB MT Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB als Persistence Bit kate E S400 Mis a Mode Main Intensified e Delayed Neg Overshoot W Noize P p One W Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS MT S N Ratio T SIN Ratio del Zero Level DELA gt EEN ie Dual Delayed Con Off DELTA BELAY Pos OA BT psidiv C Ext Dir g Pos Heg CAIB Ext HF Y EN co MEROS ono gt NRZ Noise RMS Zero definition NRZ RMS High 6 NRZ RMS Low 6 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the central of the bit period within Eye Boundaries The default v
334. od Bit kate st S400 Wikis bode C Main C Intensified ir Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS SCALEA l Dual Delayed Con ft Off i ij DELTA DELAY Os no A ETE gt i Ext Dir oo so f AJB i Ext HF co EE cnx E Rise Time definition Rise Time is determined as follows Rise Time TcrossUT TcrossLT where TcrossUT is the time of crossing with the upper threshold and TcrossLT is the time of crossing with the lower threshold If more than one rise time can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of rise time The rise time will not be measured until the rising edge completes the transition through all three levels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 257 Menu The Margins 3 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of rise time value will be performed only inside these margins Rise time value is affected by the Define Param 2 menu In the Defined Thresholds 30 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 11 3 6 Fall Time 258 Fall time is a measure of the time at the lower threshold minus the time a
335. of setups to help automate a procedure You can later recall a sequence of saved setups when you perform the procedure for production test environments Save and recall a setup that optimises the instrument for displaying and analysing certain signals Compare waveforms by using more than one setup Set the instrument to its default settings These settings set the instrument to a known operating condition Export a setup for sharing with a second instrument The number of setups you can Save is limited only by the available space on the selected drive Each setup uses approximately 30 kbytes of disk space O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 326 5 13 6 1 Recall Setup You can recall a setup that you have previously saved on any drive of your PC The Recall Setup button sets up the front panel by recalling a front panel setup from a selected setup memory Use the standard Windows Save Setup As dialog box The dialog box opens and allows you to select which subdirectory and setup you want to recall Because recalling a setup will overwrite the instrument s existing configuration you may want to save the existing setup first Saye Setup As 7 x Save in Setup Files 4 CF Ez eSetpBADb set A 2 SetpDef set My Recent Setplst set Documents deal gt Error Other Mask of SetpDef set Es good set Desktop Hand set i My Documents My Computer a
336. of the data values is taken of an integral number of periods The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin See also Mean y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz z Ol x Clear Display Persistence Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ae Print About Measure 12 Hz EL 12 GHz 50 GSass External Direct Time Base Parameters Time Base Time Bit Period Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area e Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Bit kate st 400 Wiis hole f fain Intensified Delayed SCALE A C cle Mean SALE B 1 naidi DELE Y Cycle Area Pus ES Fos Overshoot ia Current Total vfs vazim Mean Dual Delayed Con e off Neg Overshoot 101 4 m 314 398 25 mW 10 Y 100 3 m DELTA DELAT TE o Etr e posi Neg Ml 2 os gt crc ME Cycle Mean definition You can customize this measurement to be made either on one waveform cycle or across all data on the display The Margins 307 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Cycle Mean value wil
337. off line and transform it back into a time domain trace You could save the imaginary spectrum into a waveform memory Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oo xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle utoscale Default Setup Undo Copy oe Print About 12 GHz 11 1 I is External Direct Time Base Time Base Unite i Time Bit Period 2 GH Vectors Bit kate E A400 Wiis h Main Intensified Delayed ir Complex Signal e Complex Scale i Magnitude CO Phase Real f Imaginary SCALE E 1 naidi DELA fos Dual Delayed fon ft off Suppression Dc e Phase SUPPRESS LEWEL 10 de DELTA DELAT os ae 5 naidi e Ext Dir f Ext HF P sl al mw E E os H cme ME ls Pos C Mec 150 r Imaginary part of the spectrum for 500 MHz pulse waveform ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 374 5 17 4 Suppression The Suppression mode allows you to reduce the DC components in your spectrum and also to reduce the effect of noise in your phase FFT DC Check the DC option to reduce the DC components in the FFT spectrum of the Signal Phase Your source waveform record may have a noise component with phase angles that randomly vary from to This noise could make the phase display unusable In such a case use phase suppression to co
338. old level The Hysteresis menu is active when External Direct is selected in the Source 35 menu The trigger hysteresis can be set to two modes Normal Hysteresis is enabled The trigger hysteresis is set so that the instrument meets the trigger sensitivity specification The instrument will trigger if a trigger Signal crosses both the arming voltage level and the trigger threshold voltage level Normal mode provides good trigger performance while minimizing false triggers High sensitivity The trigger hysteresis is turned off to allow best sensitivity to high frequency signals This mode should not be used for noisy lower frequency Signals that may mistrigger without hysteresis but can result in false triggers if there is significant noise on the trigger signal or if the trigger signal is not monotonic in the region of the trigger threshold level 5 16 8 External Direct Scale The External Direct Scale functions can be used when the trigger signal level changes due to the use of an amplifier attenuator or a probe The attenuation factor can be entered either as a ratio or decibel value ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 364 5 16 9 Attenuation Units You can enter the attenuation or gain characteristics of an external device when configuring a trigger channel for external scaling The Attenuation Units function lets you select how you want the probe attenuation fact
339. om an operator when it finds a waveform that exceeds the template limits Linear Interpolation Linear interpolation is another term for join the dots A straight line is drawn between two adjacent data points 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 397 6 13 ps9000 en Glossary Linearity The closeness of a device s response to a straight line Lissajous A special case of an X Y plot in which the waveforms applied to both axes are sinusoidal functions For a stable display the waveforms must be related harmonics Lissajous figures are useful for determining phase and harmonic relationships The X Y plot can be selected in the DISPLAY 4 menu Live Waveforms Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system acquires data Channel waveforms are live waveforms reference waveforms are not Math waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms Logical 1 A signal level indicating the TRUE state corresponds to the unit being set i e if interrogated the answer is yes Logical O A signal level indicating the FALSE state corresponds to the unit NOT being set i e if interrogated the answer is no Logic Triggering Logic triggering allows you to qualify the trigger event further than the standard edge trigger mode Long Term Stability Stability over a long time such as several days or months Loop gain The product of sampling efficiency forward gain and feedback attenuat
340. ontal margins that the automatic measurements use for calculating measurement results All calculations of measuring parameters can be performed only inside these margins The figure below demonstrates how correctly positioned margins can provide enough complicated user defined horizontal measurements Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run Stop Single Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo E Copy Print Help Measure i gt Persistence External Direct Measure EX Parameters Margins Timing Parameters ESTAS Waveform Period ogre TF Frequency Y Pos Width LEFT MARGIN D Neg Width Rise Time EA S l ESaC Fall Time Upper Pos Duty Cycle T Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst Width Cycles M Time Maximum M Time Minimum Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS twiddle Current TotalVVfims Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Back Back ch1 RE o EMS e E Dred amp posf Neg C AIB Prescaler y 7 de A Y ESE OHH co H circo EE Channels Time Base Trigger Acquisition Display Save Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics O Converter FFT Zoom Histogram Mask Test Eye Diagram TDR TDT Utility Advance Option Correct position of both margins provides
341. ontally so that the instrument can accurately determine the One Level and Zero Level values of the eye However if too much of the One Level and Zero Level of the eye diagram is on the display it may reduce the repeatability of your measurements A good rule of thumb is to have two divisions of One Level and two divisions of Zero Level User Defined You can use the User Defined setting to define thresholds for eye diagrams at the positions you want UPPER THRESHOLD amp LOWER THRESHOLD LOWER THRESHOL The UPPER THRESHOLD and LOWER THRESHOLD variables are displayed only when User Define option of the Thresholds 16 menu is selected UPPER THRESHOLD can be set from 55 to 95 while the LOWER THRESHOLD can be set from 5 to 45 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 161 DO ps9000 en Menu FFT Menu FFT Do FFT The FFT menu allows you to control the operation of the FFT including spectrum selection and display and also a choice of six FFT windowing functions Two signal spectrums can be active simultaneously pectrum 1 Refer to the Zoom menu for formatting a spectrum with different complex scales and also for scaling and positioning it O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 162 5 5 1 FFT Basics The PicoScope 9000 displays and measures signals in the time domain where the vertical axis is amplitude and the horizontal axis is time This is
342. ontrast Ratio 4 Contrast Ratio 4 ContrastRatiodg W ContrastRatio RZ Contrast Ratio is a measure of the ratio of the one level at the centre of the eye diagram to the one level after removal of the zero level contribution found midway between eye diagram peaks This measurement indicates how well the logic 1 levels return to the logic zero level Like the RZ extinction ratio measurement contrast ratio relies on determining and removing the dark level components from the measurement calculation In order to perform an accurate contrast ratio measurement you should first perform an extinction ratio calibration in order to minimize the dark level contribution Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz f Oj xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Copy oe Print Help Eye Diagram Teea SVEN el Sele Time Base ve Parameters Y RZ Eye Paramete MT AC RMS TF Avg Power Avg Power dBrr J Contrast Ratio fw ContrastRatio dE W ContrastRatio I Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio l Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak M RMS Signalto Noise Zero Level 7 Bit Period Bit Rate E a400 Mbs Main O Intensified e Delayed SCALE A rent Total Meas Min
343. ontrol the location in the data stream the input signal from which the waveform record is taken O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 355 ps9000 en Trigger Trigger Ext Direct Ext Prescaler Internal Clock Clock Recovery f Advanced MTERNM AL RATE 10 ys hs Freerun C Triggered LEW EL Positive Negative HOLDOFF 10 us High sensitivity hore Menu Types of trigger There are several different types of trigger used in digitizing oscilloscopes The PicoScope 9000 uses three of them e Edge trigger Prescaled trigger e Clock recovery trigger Edge trigger Edge trigger is the traditional and most often used type It identifies a trigger condition by looking for the slope rising or falling and voltage level trigger level on the source you select When the trigger edge crosses a predefined threshold the oscilloscope begins to sample and acquire data from the signal By acquiring data from the input signal the oscilloscope can reconstruct the waveform and display it on the display screen Prescaled trigger Prescaled trigger extends direct triggering to signals up to 10 GHz In this mode there is no control over the trigger level or Slope The input circuitry includes a low jitter high speed 1 16 frequency divider The divided signal is applied to the existing trigger circuitry The trigger input is AC coupled to the divider The in
344. or more acquisitions 32 to 4096 points maximum per channel in x2 sequence 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 4 8 Display Display Resolution Display Style Graticule Screen Display Format Colors O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 14 Full 800 points horizontally x 600 points vertically Data 501 points horizontally x 257 points vertically Dots Vectors Variable Persistence time that each data point is retained on the display Persistence time can be varied from 100 ms to 20 s Infinite Persistence Variable Gray Scaling five levels of a single color that is varied in saturation and luminosity Refresh time can be varied from 1 s to 100 s Infinite Gray Scaling Variable color Grading with color Grading selected historical timing information is represented by a temperature or spectral color scheme providing z axis information about rapidly changing waveforms Refresh time can be varied from 1 to 200 s Infinite color Grading Full Grid Axes with tick marks Frame with tick marks Off no graticule Single all waveforms are superimposed and are eight divisions high Dual with two graticules all waveforms can be four divisions high displayed separately or superimposed Quad with four graticules all waveforms can be two divisions high displayed separately or superimposed When you select dual or quad screen display every wav
345. or represented There are options for either decibel or ratio The formula for calculating decibels is 20log Vout Vin or 10log Pout Pin Decibel Versus Voltage Ratio dB Voltage Ratio 3 dB 1 41 6 dB 2 00 10 dB 3 16 20 dB 10 40 dB 100 60 dB 1000 120 dB 1 000 000 80 dB 0 0001 Changing the attenuation factor does not attenuate the trigger signal it only changes the database for generating prompts on the display If the trigger signal must be attenuated use external attenuators Gain is implied when you enter negative decibel values or ratios of less than 1 1 in the ATTENUATION variable The default attenuation value is LL 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 365 5 16 10 ps9000 en Menu ATTENUATION The ATTENUATION variable lets you select an amplification or attenuation that matches the device connected to the trigger input of the instrument When the attenuation is set correctly the instrument maintains the trigger level if possible For example if you want to trigger the scope with a O to 5 V trigger source you can attenuate the source with a 20 dB pad to bring the level within external trigger limits The pad lowers the source level to 0 to 0 5 V but you can use external scaling to compensate for the 20 dB pad This allows you to view the trigger source voltage in the trigger level spin box as though no attenuation were present Because of this scaling feature you can set the scope to
346. osi Neg Ext HF EEN C mek 50 a NRZ Peak Peak definition The NRZ Peak Peak is determined as follows NRZ Peak Peak Max Min where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements See also NRZ Max 110 and NRZ Min 1o When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 113 5 4 6 15 ps9000 en Menu NRZ Positive Overshoot 4 Pos Overshoot NRZ Positive Overshoot is a measure of the ratio of the maximum value of the measured signal to its amplitude expressed as a percentage The waveform is scanned for the maximum value within the eye window while the amplitude is measured in the Eye Aperture O x Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ae Print Help E y ra 3 12 GHz 1 493 PS Persistence External HF Time Base Time Base Time Bit Period Eye Diagram ve Parameters Y NRZ Eye Paramet DT AC RMS TF Avg Power TF Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level MT Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB FT Max Mean hic F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Pe
347. otal Wma Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed Con t off tf Ext Dir e Pos Ne i Ext HF C Int Clk IC E Cycle definition The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of cycles value will be performed only inside these margins Cycles value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 2 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 268 5 11 3 13 Time Maximum Time Maximum is a measure of the time of the first occurrence of the first data Sample with the maximum signal level The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the display right margin Time Maximum is position independent Therefore the instrument uses the entire waveform on the display graticule to determine the maximum signal level O x dll Print About Pico rechoblaaa e 9000 PC Sarnia Oscilloscope 12 GHz Measure Persistence External Direct Time Base 2 Parameters Time Base Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate A400 Wiis
348. ou can use infinite persistence for worst case characterization of signal noise jitter and drift or to see a waveform s envelope look for timing violations and find infrequent events With infinite persistence all sampled data points are left on the display until one of the following occurs Clear Display button is pressed An Autoscale button is executed A Default Setup button is executed 2 The instrument is turned off 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 55 ps9000 en Menu Gray Scaling This mode is similar to persistence mode The only difference is that the accumulated points are used are one color that Is varied in saturation and luminosity levels in other words different shades of the same color You can use the gray scaling database with histograms mask testing statistical measurements and eye diagrams You can also use color grading to provide more visual information about the waveforms The Gray Scaling function uses the database in the size of the graticule area Behind each pixel is a 16 bit counter Each time a pixel is hit by data the counter for that pixel is incremented Each color used for the color grade mode represents a range of data counts As the total count increases the range of hits represented by each color also increases The maximum count for each counter is 65 535 There are five levels used in the gray scaled mode Each shade shows the number of hits per pixe
349. ound is negative See also Areals Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i z Ol x clear Display Run StapiSinge autoscale em E Measure o e Time Base Parameters Time Base Time Bit Period Bit kate st 400 Wiis hoc Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum FT Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS e Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot hain Intensified Delayed ie e fc SCALE A SALE B 1 naidi BELA fos Dual Delayed Con f Off Kig DELTA DELAT os ch ch2 E jv EEE 2 Ext Dit e pos Neg C AiB Ext HF yf ae a a En BAE rs e rca ES Cycle Area definition The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of cycle area value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 291 5 11 4 16 ps9000 en Menu Positive Overshoot Positive Overshoot is defined as a maximum distortion that follows a positive waveform edge transition This distortion occurs after the edge crosses through the waveform threshold levels The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region le
350. over the entire waveform Measurement statistics The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts showing the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples Measurement updating The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect changes in the waveform targeted by an automatic measurement 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 399 6 14 ps9000 en Glossary Median The data value of a waveform above and below which there are equal numbers of data points Megahertz MHz 1 000 000 hertz a unit of frequency Megasamples per second MS s A sampling rate unit equal to one million samples per second Memory Four Memories in an oscilloscope used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The oscilloscope saves the data even when the oscilloscope is turned off or unplugged Memory Depth The number of waveform samples stored in the waveform memory The greater the memory depth the greater the amount of sampled data that is available for analysis or measurements This is referred to as Record Length by some oscilloscope manufacturers Microsecond A unit of time equivalent to 0 000 001 seconds Millisecond ms A unit of time equivalent to 0 001 seconds Minimum Amplitude voltage measurement of the minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Monochrome An image represented b
351. p up Keypadl37 to enter specific settings You can change the vertical scaling from 2 mV div to 500 mV div If fine mode is off the vertical scaling is in a 1 2 5 10 sequence When fine mode is on you can change the vertical scaling with a 0 5 increment or better The SCALE changes automatically if the attenuation factor is changed The units the scale is displayed in depend on the unit of measure selected with the Scale menu The choices for units are volts watts amperes or unknown The SCALE changes automatically if the display graticule mode single dual or quad or the attenuation factor is changed 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 39 J2 ps9000 en Menu Channel OFFSET The OFFSET variable changes the vertical position of a particular channel s waveform on the display screen without modifying the waveform itself It determines the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system The advantage of digital offset is that it is calibrated The offset voltage is the voltage at the centre of the graticule area and the range of offset is 1 V As you vary the offset the middle voltage level moves relative to zero This moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window the waveform appears to move in the window Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC level of the input signal
352. pe 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Copy OE Print Help Eye Diagram 1 1 493 TSass 49 ats Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Y RZ Eye Paramete MT ac RMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero J One Level TT Peak Peak T RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a Be LA i Ext Dir fe poet Neg f Ext HF E C Int Clk 50 Ov RZ One Level definition The RZ One Level measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boundary 2 A histogram is constructed using the sampled portion of the eye diagram within the eye window This histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram The instrument analyses the histogram and determines the histogram mean The RZ One Level is determined as follows RZ One Level Histogram Mean ps9000 en 2009 Pico
353. percentages of the full vertical or horizontal scale Display Fon off The Display menu is used to show histogram windows with both vertical and horizontal histogram limits Clicking the On Off radio buttons Turns the display of the selection on or off Scale Histograms are derived from the instrument measurement database The histogram values correspond to a row or column in the database The database that is used to construct the histogram is dependent upon the selected source The instrument converts the row and column numbers to time seconds and amplitude volts values using the scaling values of the selected the database source Therefore the histogram results from each source vary depending on the scaling of the source Histograms are displayed as a series of lines vertical or horizontal The length of each line represents the frequency or number of hits of data on that row or column of the display Zero hits correspond to the left edge of the graticule vertical histogram or the bottom edge of the graticule horizontal histograms The histogram Scale menu gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to set the scale of the histogram Scale Type Linear S Logarithmic The Scale Type menu defines how to display histogram data Two options can be set from the Scale Type menu Linear and Logarithmic Linear Sets the display of the histogram results to the number of hits per division Log
354. petitive waveforms As a result the waveforms appear to have been sampled at a much higher rate sometimes referred to as the effective sampling rate The equivalent time sampling mode increases the effective bandwidth of the scope for repetitive waveforms that have a stable trigger It can also be used with multivalued waveforms such as eye diagrams Resolution The minimum measurable increment such as one bit level of an ADC Time resolution is determined by the sampler bandwidth and ADC sampling rate which on a DSO is plus or minus one sampling interval Responsivity The ratio of an optical detector s electrical output to its optical input often as a function of optical wavelength Rise Time 1 Rise time is a measure of the transition time of a waveform as the rising edge passes through the lower usually the 10 point middle usually the 50 point and upper threshold usually the 90 point or logic levels 2 Rise time is a measure of the mean transition time of the data on the upward slope of an eye diagram The data crosses through the following thresholds the lower middle and upper thresholds as well as through the crossing points of NRZ eyes RMS RMS is the root mean square rms of the voltage values of a waveform The RMS value of an AC voltage equals the DC voltage that would cause the same heating in a resistive load Roll or Scan Mode Roll or scan mode is a display mode avallable on some scopes that emu
355. piSingle LA Autoscale ane Setup Undo I Copy e Print About Histogram 100 Hz 10 s Persistence External Direct Time Base istogram Time Base CO otf f Time O vertical Bit Period Horizontal Bit Fate E 2400 Mbs i Main C Intensified e Delayed w on Off d vode Ancona Fun Until f Stop Single O Wavetorms Dual Delayed C Samples Con amp off HOF VA EPORM Ss 10 wim DELTA DELAY 15ns a ERE f AJB i Ext HF An example of the horizontal histogram display 5 6 2 Source Histogram measurements can be made on only one source at a time Select the source you want to measure using the Source menu Be aware that even if the display shows only the most recent acquisitions the measurement database keeps track of all display coordinates hit while the measurement database is building You can set the histogram source Channel Function Waveform memory Spectrum O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 181 5 6 3 5 6 4 5 6 4 1 5 6 4 2 ps9000 en Menu Histogram Fon Ot The Histogram turns on or off the display a histogram On Turns on the display of a histogram Off Turns off the display of a histogram Turning off a histogram does not turns off measurement process Mode Clicking the Mode menu opens a histogram calculation statistical menu
356. played for the selected source or waveform XM1 Position of the M1 marker solid line The X axis units may be displayed in seconds Hz bits meters or feet YM1 Position of the M1 marker solid line The Y axis units depend upon the channel input and may be displayed in volts watts amperes phase degrees rho ohms M2 Position of the M2 marker dashed line The X axis units may be displayed in seconds Hz bits meters or feet YM2 Position of the M2 marker dashed line The Y axis units depend upon the channel input and may be displayed in volts watts amperes phase degrees rho ohms o dXM The difference between the M1 and M2 marker values if both markers are turned on dXM is calculated as follows Where XM2 represents the dashed line marker and XM1 represents the solid line marker If XM1 is more positive than XM2 dXM will be a negative number which can result in negative time interval measurements e The instrument will also calculate and display the 1 dXM frequency value when both X axis markers are turned on If XM1 is more positive that XM2 1 dMX will display a negative frequency 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 189 ps9000 en Menu YM1 Position of the M1 marker solid line The Y axis units depend upon the channel input and may be displayed in volts watts amperes phase degrees rho 10 ohms Where YM2 represents the dashed line marker and
357. ple rate increases due to a faster horizontal size setting frequency interval and frequency range both increase giving the FFT waveform a broader frequency range with less frequency resolution 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 369 Menu 5 17 2 5 HORIZ POSITION HORZ POSITION The HORIZ POSITION function allows you to move the horizontally expanded portion of the waveform record The HORIZ POSITION variable uses software positioning ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 370 5 17 3 Complex Scale The Complex Scale menu selects the display format of a waveform that has a complex value The options are Magnitude Phase Real Imaginary Magnitude The peak signal amplitude is represented on a linear or logarithmic scale in the same units as the input signal You can choose to display data in dB or linear mode You may display the real or imaginary parts of the spectral magnitude only VERT POSITION control gives complete control over the vertical position of the spectrum Pico Techn au PicoScope 9000 PC Sari Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x E Print About Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate st 5400 Mbs e Main Intensified Delayed Complex Signal Complex Scale f Magnitude Phase Real C Imaginary 5 naidi SLE B 1 naidi BELAY fos Bual De
358. posed on top of each other Dual YT XY The Dual YT XY format displays both YT and XY pictures The YT format appears on the upper part of the screen and the XY format on the lower part of the screen The YT format display area is divided into two equal screens You can use the XY format to compare frequency and phase relationships between two signals The XY format can also be used with transducers to display strain versus displacement flow versus pressure volts versus current or voltage versus frequency Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz lol xj Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz lol xj Clear Display i Stop Single E Autoscale Defa efault Setup Undo Cony Print About Clear Display 1 Stop Single E Autoscale Defa efault Setup Cony Print About Channels 25 GSals 12 GHz 25 GSa s ersistence c Display Channels 25 Sais z 250 ersistence xte Display Channel 1 Screen Channel 1 Screen Format Cm Ch2 Chi Ch2 AT Dual YT Dual YT Display C Quad YT Display C Quad YT fe On Off 13 CI On off ea G YT xY C YT XY aia C Dual YT XY salia Dual YT XY M fon Place on Graticule Place on Graticule JE oy y 3 Do Cs tid
359. psico AREA AAA IAEA AAR N AAA ENANA 309 8 FET Define Paramete s csi A A A A AA A AAA 312 9 View Define Parameters iaa A A RA AA AS LAA AAA pal ARA AS 314 AOiMade gt urna OS AA GA ASA 314 11 Single rr ener rananennes 314 12 Permanent Controls crecio wow eid A a 315 13 Save Recall Menoni uine eii E E EA E ees 316 1 Waveform Memory nn anna rara nnannnos 317 2 Source Waveform Memory eeeeeeteteteteerterterreerterreertertesteereestesseentesteeneententesnteneesseseentesteeneententeeneeneents 317 3 Save Waveform nur AAA AAA AAA 317 7 os 1110 a 318 Diskas Derna Aa O aac ered A AAA ie te taal ead AAA 318 CRY a 325 14 System Controls ti IA 331 1 Clear Display mm nn nn nn nn nan nnannnnnnnns 332 3 Rum Rei AAA AAA 333 3 Stop Single rn anna enn rannannnos 334 4 Au t scale adsa ia A A A A A vb uns 335 B Default Setup nn nene nnnnnennnnnnncns 337 Eear E E T A AA ce eee 338 7 A Oo a 339 O 341 Hala rr enn nn rn nen en en enenenenos 342 O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en Contents 15 Timo Base Mens SS A eee es 343 1 Units aaneen anar inapi NAVIA NEAR EAS AS A EE EiS 344 PRiGRate Rahn eee eorne AO des IA Ar iras 345 3 Time Base Mode ina A AAA AA IAS AA AAA AAA 346 ESCALERA Se AA AAA AAA 348 SSCAULEB ss 349 6 DELAY rad AAA AAA da 350 7 Dual Delayed mmm Renan enn nn rare nannces 352 S DELTA DELAY ieee ceases a AA A a ses DAA DE AAA AREA EA ae vce dn EA A AAA AAA 353 16 Trigger Menu sees
360. put threshold of the divider is set for maximum sensitivity and bandwidth and it will operate correctly ona sine wave input from 1 GHz to 10 GHz Square wave triggers or other sharp edged transitions will function down to DC Clock recovery trigger This optional type is needed in cases where direct or prescaled trigger signals are not available The clock recovery trigger derives a timing reference directly from the NRZ waveform to be measured The clock recovery trigger covers the most popular electrical lines used today from 12 Mb s to 2 7 Gb s bit rates 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 356 Trigger Trigger cont Low Jitter Lom Jiter Mode Con Eo External Direct Scale External trigger inputs Three external trigger inputs one optional are placed on the front panel DIRECT TRIGGER INPUT SMA female This input is used for edge triggering PicoScope 9000 provides a O to 1 GHz direct trigger bandwidth PRESCALE TRIGGER INPUT SMA female This input is used for prescaled triggering PicoScope 9000 provides 1 GHz to 10 GHz trigger bandwidth CLOCK RECOVERY TRIGGER INPUT SMA female This input is used for clock recovery triggering PicoScope 9000 provides triggering on 12 Mb s to 2 7 Gb s bit rates When using a given trigger source you should disconnect any other trigger source from the front panel to ensure specified performance 2009 Pico
361. quency Poe Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum Timecehinimurm Pos Jitter p p e Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS A gt O x Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period External Direct Bit kate E A400 Wiis y bode C Main C Intensified ir Delayed Dual Delayed Con i off DELTA DELAT ff Ext Dir oo gt Neg Ext HF E Channels Trigger Display save Recall Limit Test Mathematics Positive Jitter RMS definition Positive Jitter RMS is determined as follows Positive Jitter RMS 16 standard deviation of the Horizontal Histogram in the Middle Threshold The Margins 3A menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of Positive jitter RMS will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 272 5 11 3 17 Negative Jitter p p Negative Jitter p p is a measure of the peak peak time variations of the falling edges of a pulse waveform at the middle threshold Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy a Print
362. r measurement may result Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz a Oo xj Clear Display StopiSingle I Autoscale A Setup Undo I Copy ee Print Help Eye Diagram 1 z 1 49 IS Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y MRZ Eye Paramet AC RMS f Time Avg Power Bit Period Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio I Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Fax Mean T Mic tin Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level FT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS R SiN Ratio M S N Ratio dB Zero Level Bit kate 5400 Mbs s Main Intensified f Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY Current Total Meas Minima ExDir g Post Hed f Ext HF CEN Int Clk 50 NRZ Signal to Noise Ratio definition Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time To define the signal histograms are constructed using the sampled portions of the eye diagram within the eye window boundaries One histogram is composed of data points from only the upper half of the eye diagram one level The
363. ram The instrument will use only this region of the database to calculate the histogram results To define the histogram window choose Window from the Histogram 18 menu The histogram Window menu gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to select a region of the database to include in the histogram Opening the Window menu opens the histogram window markers The markers consist of Two solid vertical lines the LEFT LIMIT and RIGHT LIMIT variables Two solid horizontal lines the TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables You can then define the size of the histogram window within the horizontal and vertical scale limits of the instrument 5 6 5 1 Limits i Paired Independed The Limits menu defines a method of how the histogram window can be positioned with the LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables Paired With the Paired method the following conditions are used for positioning of the histogram window e The LEFT LIMIT variable changes the full histogram window to left or to right The RIGHT LIMIT variable changes the right limit of the histogram window to left or to right e The TOP LIMIT variable changes the full histogram window up or down e The BOTTOM LIMIT variable changes the bottom limit of the histogram window up or down Independent When the Independent is selected each of the LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables changes the positio
364. ram an offset of 20 dB places 20 10 or 10 of the peak at the lower edge of the display Run Until The Run Until menu allows you to determine when the acquisition of data stops Stop Single You must press the Stop Single key to stop the acquisition of data Waveforms After the number of waveforms is reached acquisition stops Samples After the number of samples is reached acquisition stops OF WAVEFORMS and OF SAMPLES HOF WAVEFORMS i OF SAMPLES OF WAVEFORMS Sets the number of waveforms After the selected number of waveforms is reached acquisition stops OF SAMPLES Sets the number of samples After the selected number of Samples is reached acquisition stops 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 187 5 ps9000 en Menu Marker Menu Markers are movable lines on the display You set their value by positioning them on the display Their actual value however comes from internal data so they are more precise than graticules They use numeric readouts to present results Markers can be positioned on either a selected waveform source input channel waveform memory function or spectrum independently anywhere on the display graticule Markers allow you to make absolute vertical measurements voltage spectrum magnitude spectrum phase rho ohms ratiometric vertical measurements absolute horizontal measurements timing bit period frequency d
365. rate than markers or graticules Measurements cover voltage timing and FFT Amplitude measurements are made on vertical parameters typically voltage They include such parameters as Maximum Peak Peak Middle and RMS Timing measurements are made on horizontal parameters typically seconds or hertz They include such parameters as Period Width and Rise Time FFT measurements are made on both vertical and horizontal parameters typically volts and hertz They include such parameters as FFT Magnitude and FFT Frequency Measurements made on two channels can include amplitude and timing parameters Each measurement relates to the source that was active when you selected that measurement It remains displayed until you remove it If you turn off the source that was selected for a measurement only the last measured result will be displayed The PicoScope 9000 makes measurements after every trigger event always maintaining continuity between the measurement results and the display This makes sure that no aberration in the waveform under observation is missed You can set measurement markers thresholds and margins on the display as defined parameters to track the measurement results This helps you verify that the oscilloscope is measuring the correct phenomena and to aid in windowing the waveform properly for measurement 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Measure Measure Measure A
366. rcuitry that controls the timing of the sweep The timebase is set by the Time div variable Time Base Accuracy The closeness of the indicated time value to the true value Time Base Range The range of values to which the horizontal deflection factor can be set Time domain Signals displayed with time on the X axis and amplitude on the Y axis Instruments that display signals in this format are called time domain instruments Time domain Signals displayed with time on the X axis and amplitude on the Y axis Instruments that display signals in this format are called time domain instruments Time Domain Network Analysis TDNA TDNA includes both time domain reflectometry TDR and time domain transmission TDT measurements Imperfect connectors cabling and even the response of the instrument itself can introduce errors into TDR TDT measurements Understanding the effects of these errors and more importantly how to remove them will result in more accurate and useful measurements 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 413 ps9000 en Glossary Time Domain Reflectometry TDR The technique of sending a pulse or step signal into a transmission line and analysing any reflections produced TDR gives an intuitive measurement of any discontinuities in a circuit It measures the location electrical length nature of circuit resistive Capacitive inductive and amount of reflection from discontinuities Tim
367. re of the root mean square amplitude minus the DC component of the waveform within the eye window a Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy OE Print Help Eye Diagram es ESE le SS Time Base ve Parameters ra Persistence M ACRMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level in ensitied elayed TOE Ta Bis Curre Total Meas Minimum Waite Dual Delayed Signal to Moise A Chi 146 mv 303 146 m 148 mw Con t off Zero Level BELT DELAY RZ AC RMS definition The RZ AC RMS is determined as follows iy E Al keri osis aean Feri asi Si RZ AC RMS 12 iv where S is the set of N samples s within the measured region This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 138 5 4 8 2 RZ Contrast Ratio RZ Contrast Ratio dB and RZ C
368. recoonononacnonacnnonenanacnonacnonencnnonenannenannononacnonnenannononacnonaccononcononenannenanacnunncnnons 20 1 Fit Acquisition To rrrrnnnnnnnn ener na rea re rare rn rara nan nana 24 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en lI Contents 2 Sampling Mode seeeeeererterterrterterreereessesseereestereestesteereentesnesseeseestesneentesteeneententeententensestentesteeneententeeseentetens 25 3 Channel Alt Mode creer rerererererereterenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenensnenanenssenasesssesasasasasasanasncnsnsnensnsneneees 25 AMode rash eect etl es sete gest E AA A 26 5 AVERAGE N ENVELOPE N eeeeeeeeeereereerterreereerresseereesteereestestesneeneessestentesteneententeeneeneessesteeneeseesneesteneennes 31 6 RECORD LENGTH 00 AAA AAA AAA AAA 33 TAU el CC cre A AAA A AAA EIA AE IAEA teen ee ern re 34 8 OF ACQUISITIONS cooorrrrrccrrconncnnnonanonocononononconnnonconnnonnnnnn nano n conc nnn non non aran nn nn on nr anna non anna anna cnn anna rra nora rra nena rnnarnss 34 E T E A EAS AA AAA PA 34 Channels Menton AI A OA 35 1 Channel Select sia REA OA A 36 2 Channel Display cerraran nana 36 3 Channel Acquire mr nn nen nnnnnnnnnnnnenes 36 A Channel SCALE sa AE 37 B Channel OFFSET eri tratr ATES AEN AENEA E NA ea r li 39 6 Channel Bandwidth Ree ee ee ee ee ere 41 7 Channel DES KEW e irsncisaiaiiids sd atte ac een sees in ose see toca eas lesa ee a ch See ERS 42 8 Channel Input Impedance vere eeeeeceeseeseseeeseee
369. reshold levels can be selected You can define the threshold settings that you want by going to the Define Parameters Thresholds 8 menus O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 92 If the rise time relative to the time per division is a small value the data acquired at the threshold levels on the falling edge will not yield accurate measurement results The rising edge will appear very steep on the display screen If the rising edge of your eye diagram is steep increase the timebase horizontal scale on the display so that the rising edge covers at least half a graticule division The instrument will be able to discern the data at the threshold levels producing more accurate results 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 93 5 4 6 ps9000 en Menu Y NRZ Eye Parameters Eye Diagram The list of Y NRZ Eye Parameters includes twenty seven eye drama parameters Two of the them Avg Power and Avg Power dBm can be MERA used in optical models only FT AC RMS Avg Power Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio l Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Max Mean You can perform up to four simultaneous measurements on one displayed waveform The measurement algorithms for Y NRZ Eye Parameters will only work when an NRZ eye diagram and not an RZ eye diagram or
370. rm memories or even other functions There are four functions F1 to F4 which can be set up in the Mathematics 22 menu When the function is set up and turned on a post processing calculation is done and a new waveform is displayed O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 392 6 7 G Gated measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using measurement gates GIF GIF Graphics Interchange Format is a standard graphics format used to store bit mapped graphic files that can be imported into other applications for documentation purposes Gigahertz GHz 1 000 000 000 hertz a unit of frequency Glitch A spike or short time duration structural aberration on an otherwise smooth waveform that is normally characterized by more gradual amplitude changes In digital electronics where the circuit under test uses an internal clock a glitch can be considered to be any pulse narrower than the clock width Glitch is an intermittent error in a circuit Glitch A spike or short time duration structural aberration on an otherwise smooth waveform that is normally characterized by more gradual amplitude changes In digital electronics where the circuit under test uses an internal clock a glitch can be considered to be any pulse narrower than the clock width GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus GPI
371. rnal Direct Display hannel 1 isplay ies All Locked Per Trace i cht che Trate E Dota ie vectors Var Persistence intin Persistence O Var Gray Scalin Infin Gray Scalir 7 ar Color Gradir Intin Color Gradi REFRESH TIME 20s Vector Display f On i off A2cauire ff On oi chi Eien ch2 ee CA ET f Ext Dir e posf Meg F FT O AlB DW Ext HF a O Y cB Os Int Clk ov E m J Vector Display Style 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 52 Display Persistence The Persistence function determines how long a data point is kept on the display before being erased Normally a waveform is displayed only for one trigger event When the next trigger event occurs the previous waveform is erased and the newly acquired waveform is drawn on the display Persistence is a display memory function therefore acquired waveforms are written only to display memory Acquisition memory is where the current waveform data is stored Therefore only the last acquired waveform is held in acquisition memory Display memory is what is seen on the display graticule Pico Technology 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i Ol xj Clear Display E StopiSingle L Autoscale J Default Setup Undo Cop a Print About Channels 3 gt Persistence Exter
372. rrent Total Wma Minimum Maximum Mean Std Deviation Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA BELAY a ue 53 171 47i pz 525 9 p4 500 7 pz Est HF gt cock ES 200 psiciv Et e pos neg Positive Width definition Positive pulse width is determined as follows Positive Width Tcross2 Tcross1 where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the two consecutive horizontal crossings on the first positive pulse If more than one positive pulse width can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of the positive pulse width The Margins 3 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of positive pulse width value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 253 Menu Positive pulse width value is affected by the Define Param 20 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 254 5 11 3 4 Negative Width Neg Width Negative Pulse Width is a measure of the time from the mid threshold of the first falling edge to the mid threshold of the next rising edge The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin a
373. rrent is typically in volts and seconds or other appropriate units for the source ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 212 5 9 1 3 3 DELTA X The DELTA X variable defines the horizontal tolerance around the edges of the reference waveform 5 9 1 3 4 DELTA Y The DELTA Y variable defines the vertical tolerance around the edges of the reference waveform 5 9 1 3 5 Build Automask Clicking the Build Automask button builds a mask with the new values of the DELTA X 2A and DELTA Y 212 variables O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 213 Menu 5 9 1 4 Edit Mask The Edit Mask function gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to construct a new mask or edit an existing one using the polygon method The procedure of editing a mask function brings up a set of brief instructions on how to construct a mask Mask editing procedure The following is a simple editing procedure of editing the OC48 STM16 standard mask into a user defined mask 1 Select the OC48 STM16 standard mask from Mask Test Create Mask Standard Mask SONET SDH OC48 STM16 Se ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 214 2 Click Edit Mask Click a polygon to select it and click again on a vertex of the polygon Note the square points on the selected polygon which are yellow when selected
374. rs Time Base Time Bit Period Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum IT Peak Peak Bit Rate Hie 518400 Mors Base Amplitude T middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area f fain O Intensified Delayed 1 naidi Cycle de RMS 1 naidiy e Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot BELA fos Dual Delayed Con f off KIG Current Total Wma Minimum dOd eh a E dOd 4 eet 194 5 m P 194 1 m DELTA DELAY Ch 1 ch E To FA 4 majdiv Et Dire pef ee a CAIB Bear u m ov E se os al Int Clk o B Cycle as RMS definition You can customize this measurement to be made either on one waveform cycle or across all data on the display The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of the Cycle ac RMS value will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 290 5 11 4 15 Cycle Area a Cycle Area Cycle Area is the averaged area under the curve for of one cycle the waveform within the measurement region in vertical units multiplied by horizontal units such as volt seconds or watt seconds The average of the data values is taken over an integral number of periods Area measured above ground is positive area measured below gr
375. rtion of the ADC The offsets must be subtracted from the recorded signals before being included in the summed average Division Measurement markings on the graticule of the oscilloscope Dragging The act of changing your selection either by clicking with the mouse or touching on a touchscreen a point on the screen and pulling across the screen while holding down the button mouse or maintaining contact with your finger touchscreen Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the average duration that a waveform remains above the mid amplitude point as a percentage of the waveform period Duty Cycle Distortion Duty Cycle Distortion DCD is caused by a different duration of 1 s and O s It is a measure of the time separation between the rising edge and falling edge at the 50 level of an NRZ eye diagram middle threshold The duty cycle distortion is then the difference in time between the intersecting edges The duty cycle distortion can also be viewed as a percentage of the time difference relative to the full bit period or the time between adjacent crossing points Dynamic Range 1 Dynamic Range specifies the amplitude size of a signal that can be input into the scope at a particular vertical scale without overdriving the front end resulting in an inaccurate acquisition of data 2 The ratio of the largest to smallest signal that can be accurately processed by a module E Earth Ground A conductor that will dissipate large electric
376. s the Freerun mode works similarly to the Triggered mode Use Freerun triggering when you are not using an external trigger and you want to view the waveform for amplitude information only Freerun triggering allows the instrument to trigger as soon as the instrument is armed and is asynchronous to the data You can also use Freerun triggering to view a signal without any timing information It is an easy way to examine the amplitude of a signal Triggered In Triggered mode the instrument displays data only after all of the trigger conditions are met Triggered mode keeps the instrument from triggering and displaying data on the screen before a specific trigger event occurs Use Triggered mode to update the display only when a trigger event occurs or for waveforms that have a fundamental period of less than 400 us 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 361 Menu 5 16 4 LEVEL The LEVEL variable specifies the voltage threshold that a signal must cross in order for the instrument to trigger on that signal When the input signal crosses this voltage level the instrument triggers LEVEL is active only when External Direct is selected in the Sourcel3 menu You can select the trigger level in one of three ways By using the LEVEL spin box e By using trigger level spin boxes in the Permanent Controls 31 area By using the Pop up Keypad 2 to quickly enter numeric data using the mouse When the External Direc
377. s turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available RZ Bit Time also is called RZ Bit Period 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 123 5 4 7 4 ps9000 en Menu RZ Cycle Area a Cycle Area RZ Cycle Area is a measure of the area under the curve for the RZ waveform within the eye window Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About Eye Diagram 1 1 te 1 50 aS Persistence External Direct Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Le 2 R Bit Rate Bit Time e Cycle Area Eye width Eye idth TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing g 5 LW Le Ped Bit kate Js 400 Wiis Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Dual Delayed Frag ifs Con t off Est HF BELT BELAY ead E Y 200 m y corto ALE i Ext Dir Post Neg RZ Cycle Area definition The RZ Cycle Area is determined as follows Ago Re CyeleArea ae VeriPosis Hel over all N samples s in the measured region eye window of duration At between t
378. s Guide 302 5 11 6 1 1 5 11 6 1 2 5 11 6 1 3 Mode The Mode menu defines one of three modes that determine the algorithm for statistical measurement calculations Normal Each of the acquired waveforms has an equal influence on the result of the statistical measurement calculation The WAVEFORMS 22 WEIGHT 0 variables are not active in this mode Window Only a limited number of the recently acquired waveforms have an equal influence on the result of statistical measurement calculations The WAVEFORMS 2 variable specifies the number of recently acquired waveforms used for statistical measurement calculations Use the Window mode when measuring a waveform that is rapidly drifting Exponential Each of the acquired waveforms has a weighted influence on the result of statistical calculations on eye diagrams Each subsequently acquired waveform has a greater influence than the preceding acquired waveforms The WEIGHT 3 variable specifies the degree of this influence Use the Exponential mode when measuring a waveform that is slowly drifting WAVEFORMS WAVEFORMS The WAVEFORMS variable specifies the number of recently acquired waveforms used for statistical measurement calculations The variable is active when Window is selected in the Mode 3 menu It can be varied from 8 to 8192 in multiples of two WEIGHT E The WEIGHT variable specifies the degree of influence of each recently acquired waveform against more r
379. s making the automatic measurement All calculations of mean value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 283 5 11 4 9 dc RMS Menu dc RMS is the root mean square voltage of the waveform over the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin The instrument can make either ac or dc RMS measurements 15 x Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 17 GHz Clear Display Persistence External Direct Measure Y Parameters Amplitude Paramete Maximum Minimum Peak Peak Top Baze Amplitude Middle Fun Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Unda i Cop a Print About Time Base Time Base f Time Bit Period Bit kate E 400 hits i Main C Intensified C Delayed Mean I de RMS ac Ems Area Cycle Mean Cycle de RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Wim Minimum L Std Deviation Dual Delayed 441 3 pu Con e Off DELTA DELAY f Ext Dir OD 0 Meg Ext HF A 1 v idiw Vv gt F as Cmc EE 250 m Ov O Converter Mask Test Eye Diagram TDR TDT Utility Advance d
380. s occur Run until a set number of waveforms occur Run until a set number of samples occur Stop Single The Stop Single function runs a mask test until the Stop Single button is pressed Use the Stop Single mode when you want the mask test to run continually and not stop after a fixed number of failures or acquisitions For example you may want the mask test to run overnight and not be limited by a number of failures or acquisitions Failed W ms The Failed Wfms function runs the mask test until a set number of failed waveforms are acquired When the Failed Wfm is selected you can set the number of failures from the OF FAILED WFM z variable Failed Samples The Failed Samples function runs the mask test until a set number of failed samples are acquired When the Failed Samples is selected you can set the number of failed samples from the OF FAILED SMPL 2 variable Waveforms The Waveforms function runs the mask test until a set number of waveforms are acquired When the Waveforms is selected you can set the number of waveforms from the OF WAVEFORMS 2 variable Samples The Samples function runs the mask test until a set number of samples are acquired When the Samples is selected you can set the number of samples from the OF SAMPLES 2 variable O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 233 5 9 3 2 5 9 5 3 ps9000 en Menu OF FAILED WFM OF FAILED SMPL OF WAVEFORMS and OFSAMPL
381. s selected in the Trigger Source i menu the Autoscale function can find repetitive signals having trigger frequency and amplitude as they are specified Autoscale is operative only for relatively stable input signals Autoscale looks for Signals on both channels even if they are turned off It also searches for a trigger signal on the trigger inputs If the Autoscale button is pressed unintentionally use the Undo button to return the instrument to the settings that existed before When the Autoscale is selected the following controls are set Time Base Mode Delayed B SCALE B to best display the waveform Trigger If the Direct Trigger Source is selected Freerun Mode Positive Slope Trigger LEVEL to 50 amplitude point of the trigger waveform Normal Hysteresis HOLDOFF with minimum value If the Prescaler Trigger Source is selected to best display waveforms o Vertical OFFSET to best display waveforms on active channels Vertical SCALE to best display waveforms on active channels O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 336 Autoscale options Auto single alued w MNR Re To perform autoscale right click the Autoscale button to get the four autoscale options Select one of them and then the scope will perform an optional Autoscale The four Autoscale options are Auto Single valued NRZ Single valued NRZ Optimizes the autoscale algorithm for such
382. s that determine how the acquired data is displayed on the screen You can configure the PicoScope 9000 for persistence or color graded display style select the graticule settings define the waveform display area for single or multiple waveform displays and you can change the color of most of the items that are displayed on the screen Display Display isplay olor o an All Locked Per Trace a Set Color ESTA set On Top Dots Vectors Var Persistence TRANSPARENGCE Intin Persistence out a O War Gray Scalin mee 0 ul Intin Gray Scalir Yar Color Gradir C infin Color Gradi PERSISTENT Display Display olor Grade Scale 50 100 set Color Set Color Set Color Default Colors set Color Set Color Default Colors C Frane Off 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 48 5 3 1 Trace Mode All Locked f Per Trace The PicoScope 9000 gives you the choice of constraining all input channels to the same display style or setting these for each trace individually All Locked Set the same display style for all traces Per Trace Set up traces individually 5 3 2 Trace Selects a trace to set Display Style Is active only when Per Trace is selected from the Trace Mode 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 49 5 3 3 ps9000 en Var Persistence Infin Persist
383. s the input waveforms to a scope and adjusts the scope s controls to get a stable waveform display Autoscale sets up front panel controls based on the characteristics of the active waveform In addition to turning on any channels that are sensed as active trigger horizontal and vertical settings are adjusted automatically based on the input waveforms A successful autoscale will set the volts div time div and trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display Autostore Autostore see also Infinite Persistence is a display mode in which acquired waveforms are displayed indefinitely O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 380 Average Acquisition mode In this mode the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that is the averaged result of several acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparent noise The oscilloscope acquires data as in the sample mode and then averages it according to a specified number of averages You can use Averaging to eliminate random noise from a repetitive waveform Average Optical Power AOP The time averaged measurement of the optical power over a much longer time period than the bit rate of the signal Averaging Mathematically smoothing the results of several measurements by adding them and dividing by the number of samples 6 2 B Balanced A signal transmitted through a pair of wires each having the same source imped
384. se Acquire f On CO off OFFSET 250 mw a Gain F Gain dB Back Total Wiima Minimum y atio Amplitude Paramete 1140 Jak CA 0 AB iv m Gb FOO ps 7 Int Clk pov CE Et e pos neg i Ext HF Two waveforms with entered deskew of 20 ps The DESKEW function allows you to set the horizontal position of a waveform in one of two ways Use the DESKEW spin box Use the Pop up Keypad to enter specific settings If fine mode is off you can change the deskew value in 1 ns steps When fine mode is on you can change the deskew value in 1 ps steps 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 43 5 2 8 5 2 9 Menu Channel Input Impedance The input channels of the PicoScope 9000 have 50 Q input impedance with DC input coupling This is useful for connecting to probes or circuits that require a 50 Q termination For example you might choose an active probe to measure a very fast ECL or GaAs circuit Such a probe usually has an amplifier near the tip of the probe which drives the signal through a 50 Q cable To minimize any waveform reflections the scope input impedance must match the cable impedance as closely as possible so you would choose the 50 Q setting for that channel s input impedance CAUTION To avoid damage to the input of the scope make sure you do not exceed the channel s maximum rated input voltage 2 V DC peak AC Using
385. se Maximum the maximum current value measured in the measurement database The measurement statistics reported will vary depending on the mode of operation selected ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 76 5 4 2 Source The Source control selects the source you are measuring The measurement read outs of parameters will have the same color as the selected source 5 4 3 X Eye Parameters Eye Parameters Click the X Eye Parameters button to open the list of NRZ or RZ eye parameters and select any of the eye parameters for measurements 5 44 Y Eye Parameters Y Eye Parameters Clicking the Y Eye Parameters button opens the list of NRZ or RZ eye parameters to select any of the eye parameters for measurements 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 77 5 4 5 ps9000 en Menu X NRZ Eye Parameters Eye Diagram we Parameters A MRZ Eve Paramet Area Bit Rate Bit Time Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycDist DutCycDist s Eye Width Eye Width Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time The list of X NRZ Eye Parameters includes fifteen eye parameters You can perform up to four simultaneous measurements on one displayed waveforms The measurement algorithms for X NRZ Eye Parameters will only work when an NRZ eye diagram and not
386. se a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 148 5 4 8 10 RZ Min Peres RZ Min is a measure of the minimum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz l m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy OE Print Help Eye Diagram es ESE sats SS Time Base ve Parameters Persistence MT AC RMS FF Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean hic Jv Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak T RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level in ensitied elayed Minima Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY ds li C BED E posi Neg Ext HF 145 5 pe 2 os Int Clk 50 3 a RZ Min definition The RZ minimum eye amplitude is determined as follows RZ Minimum max VertPos s where s is the set of samples in the measured region Minimum has no settable references When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico
387. seeeeeseeesteesteeneeeneeeneeeeeaeaeateeatesaeeenensaensaeasaeasacasaensasnsneneneaseeees 43 9 Channel Coupling erre rante renace nen enanos 43 10 Channel External Scale etomidato rnrO poo ds aa sed iio A a 44 11 Atten ation Units irinen n ee ee eee re err ee 45 ID ATTENUATION enana iera AAA te ni arr AAA 46 ge eel cece Lec ee erect ere eee ee ee Lee ee 46 3 Display Menu ssessesseeseesseeseesscsseeseeseenecssceseeneessceseeneessceseeneessesecescesresecesceseesecesceseesecesceseeseeseens 47 iTrice Mode ss nianiaasi A A TEE EA EA N 48 pine CC Emir a A E IA TA ANA AOS 48 3 Style EEE 49 4 PERSISTENCE TIME REFRESH TIME coro rorocooonononcncororonononononononcoconononnnononon on on nn nannnn nn nnon encara nana renanenan en ona 59 GResSt All rara AAN AAA cease EN ANE ENTA 59 6 Screen md lA A AAA aan ANA 59 TEOOlOF C wR See Senco meee ee wc A a AA EEE EANA 5 A RARA AAA AAA 65 4 Eye Diagram Menu s sseessseesseereseeesecessreenseeeneceesecessreenereesaceastessreesseeesertesaceasecesseeeseeeesecesseesseees 70 TM arsure isis dad ba 73 DESEES ANDAS A A ARA AA AE ENE AAA EA ARA 76 3 X Eye Parameters nn nn nen nn en nnnnnnnnnnnnss 76 4 Y Eye Parameters o nen nana nacen 76 5 X NRZ Eye Parameters 0 nana narnia nena re rare cn nara nano 77 6 Y NRZ Eye Parameters c nene nn rn rn anennnnnn ranas 93 7 X RZ Eye Parameters veevererereserererereresereresereresenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenen
388. sing The Margins 27 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of burst width value will be performed only inside these margins Burst width value is affected by the Define Param 3 menu In the Defined Thresholds 30 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 267 Menu 5 11 3 12 Cycle Cycles is defined as the number of cycles of a periodic waveform between the mid threshold crossings of two consecutive first and last edges of the same polarity The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin The detected edges can be either rising or falling Pico Techni e 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz T Oj xj Measure ls 2 GHz 55 56 Goals Persistence External Direct Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing 7 Bit Period Bit Rate A400 Wikis al Main Intensified e Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Iw Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Current T
389. splay is in decibels relative to a 1 V peak sine wave 0 dBV into 50 ohms Phase The PHASE SCALE function uses vertical software expansion to set the phase characteristic of the spectrum It does not affect the hardware settings in the instrument only the appearance of the phase waveform You can change phase scale from 4 5 div to 90 div VERT POSITION VERT POSITION PHASE POSITION The VERT POSITION controls use software to move the selected waveform vertically on the screen Vertical position is the value at the centre of the graticule area If you adjust the vertical position so that a peak is at the vertical centre of the graticule area then you know that the peak magnitude is the vertical position value For example if the peak of the spike is at the vertical centre of the graticule area and the vertical position is 20 dBV then you know that the peak magnitude is 20 dBV HORIZ SCALE The HORIZ SCALE control allows you to zoom in a portion of the waveform record Horizontal zooming can be entered in steps of 1 2 4 8 Changing the horizontal magnification of an FFT waveform using the HORIZ SCALE changes the appearance of the trace but does not increase the horizontal frequency resolution You can also change the frequency interval and frequency range by changing the record length and horizontal scale of the time domain waveform If the record length increases frequency resolution improves When the equivalent sam
390. sseesseerseereseeesseeessrernscresecessreesseeenacenactasecessecessecenaceaseceasreessreeseeesaceaseeesseees 354 A e A 358 INTERNAL RATE mieria eae ete A AAA ASAS 359 Mode mesma aiii pi 360 ALEVE AAA AA A A O AAA AA AAA 361 5 Slope nn nene nn nnannnannnens 361 GHOLDOFE pitt OEE ALA AA AAA ARA ARAS AA ANA 362 7 Hysteresis rr rre nn nene nnnnnn nano 363 8 External Direct S cales irradia 363 o Attenvation Units sara ds AAA SANA AAA 364 1I0ATTENUATION Bourn err er cern AA A er rere ret rere 365 17 Zoom Mentir dia 366 eee ee bt tol 367 2 Scaling RR Ana rana rate nenenanennoss 367 3 Complex Scale mn RR nena nnennenos 370 4 Suppression rr nen en ener nenas 374 B SUPPRESS LEVEL 000 aci ii AAA ARAS ESAS RADA A AAA AE 3 4 18 Pop up keypad o eroononocccnannonannononacnonacanonenanncnannononacnnnncnanneranacno anno nenennonenannenanacononenannenaccss 375 GHGIOSS A O 377 a E e EE EEE AA E LEA A L E A E EE A AT E A A ETE E E A A E A 377 pN e a E waa waa TE E S E E E T N 380 Be a ct O O 382 BN esas ae ae a CoE eras eee essen eae AA 384 DE ras 387 O Ey ee oe ee RRA 389 TA aa ey SATS a AA AAA IA ee ea AA ees 392 RA 393 O E E T 394 VO ar roo 395 A o 396 a EA EE AS P E E EN TS 396 Ga a aaa a a aaa a a a A a a a 397 VAN E E EEE E E EEE E E AE E AEA E E E L TAE E ENNEA AEN A Te 399 IEO nae A E E antcama aetna ese 401 GED E LS 402 A O O RUR MERON 404 T8 ee SN rT ER OTD ea ESO PERT rd a ae Ce eT ny 404 TIS Bak erates ee rors oa assets sitas
391. ssreensreenereanecessecensrernerresereneceasecessrernserenereaseeessecenereesereseeeane 12 4 Direct Trig g eraan rnn o a a O E A A E E 12 5 Prescaled Trigger oe inio rira e E A E A E E 13 6 Clock Recovery Trig ger PicoScope 9211 only eeeeeeeereeeeeessssssssrrrrrrtereererresessssrrrrrrrreereereeeeessereees 13 7 Acquisition ee eeeseeseeseerseeseessceseeseeseesecssceseesecssceseenecasceseesresscareseceseesecssceseeseesscaseeneessceseeseeseesees 13 8 Display eessesserseesseesersecesceseesecssceneeseeneesscaseenresscesrenteseceseeneesecseessceseeneessceseeseessceseeseessceseeseeseeses 14 9 SavefRecall eane nn O ES AOT EE N E EOT E 15 10 Marker ud AA AA AE E ES 15 Vi Mentira ii Noia 16 A E T OA A E AEA O OTE PT Oe EST ee CRU eee EE E ee 16 ASIA ebay CICS ea eae rook uate a sie hss estes ed ewes he heats 17 AEE ses eos sooesis a aes assesses ss e ww re ed cabs awe me ae acs e o ea 17 Zs OM ARA da 17 16 Histogram essesseeseessesseeseessceseeseeseenecssceseenecssceseenecssceseeseessesscssceseesecsscestenecsscesresecssceseeseeseens 17 17 Eye DiagramM enese aai aea E A E E EE 18 AS iMac le Tetona e a lu e a E teas 18 19 Environmental Conditions scsi id as 19 J0 PC connection eaea eones 19 21 Power Requirements onccion nisin ii a O E EE T O 19 22 Physical Characteristics e seeseeseeseessceseereeesceseesecssceseeneesscarensceseeseessceseeneessceseeseesscaseesreseesees 19 FMEN nar A EA E E E T O Goes 20 1 Acquisition Menu eooo
392. st pixel columns that contains data For vertical histograms width is the difference time between the first and last pixel rows that contain data 50 of the histogram samples are above the median and 50 are below the median Mean is the average value of all the points in the histogram The standard deviation o value of the histogram The percentage of points that are within 10 of the mean value The percentage of points that are within 20 of the mean value The percentage of points that are within 30 of the mean value Min is the minimum value of all the points in the histogram Max is the maximum value of all the points in the histogram The width between the vertical histogram s greatest peak Mean and Standard Deviation The PicoScope 9000 calculates the mean and standard deviation automatically It does not rely on the assumption that the data Is of a particular distribution to determine the Sample mean or standard deviation The microprocessor controlled acquisition allows the oscilloscope to store and display every data point Therefore the sample mean and Standard deviation are easily computed by the microprocessor using the following equations respectively where X mean S standard deviation n number of Samples and X value of each sample The mean for time histogram is the time from the trigger point without taking into account minimum delay to the sample average The mean for voltage histograms is
393. stical data that is acquired and stored in the measurement database The algorithms are dependent upon histogram means calculated from the measurement database Therefore if you want to perform eye measurements it is necessary that you first produce an eye diagram by triggering the Instrument with a synchronous clock signal Measurements made on a pulse waveform while in the Eye Diagram menu will fail Once the Eye Diagram measure menu has been selected the measurement database is enabled This database consists of all data samples displayed on the screen The measurement database provides the data for the construction of histograms generation of mask tests and a visual representation of the eye via the color graded display mode Once you are in the Eye Diagram menu perform an Autoscale This will ensure that an optimum eye diagram is displayed on the graticule An optimum eye diagram consists of a full display of the eye in addition to portions of the waveform preceding and following the eye ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 72 Data is acquired histograms are built and absolute maximum and minimum voltage power levels as well as relative maximum one and minimum zero voltage power levels are determined The crossing points of the eye are located the threshold levels are calculated and then depending on the specific measurement s activated the requested parametric m
394. stogram limits so that the histogram is built from a very narrow vertical slice of the graticule area IS Opened LJ The histogram window limits are only visible when the Histogram menu The default setup positions the histogram markers as follows o LEFT LIMIT lt RIGHT LIMIT BOTTOM LIMIT lt TOP LIMIT The values of LEFT LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT cannot be made greater than the values of RIGHT LIMIT and TOP LIMIT by repositioning the limits The histogram window is always the area inside the boundaries of all of LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT regardless of the limit values You can use the mouse to click and drag the histogram limits to new positions click and hold the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is on one of the limits then drag the marker to the position you want and release the mouse button Clicking and dragging a limit makes it easy to quickly move the limit to the desired waveform event The values of the limits and the position arrows are dependent upon the vertical and horizontal scale settings ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 184 5 6 5 3 5 6 5 4 5 6 6 5 6 6 1 Units Absolute Percent The Units function lets you select how you want the LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT TOP LIMIT and BOTTOM LIMIT variables represented Absolute Represents all limits in current unit Percent Represents all limits as
395. t Period Bit Time BEE E 1 Crossing Time 5 400 Mbs ee ee D DutCycDist C Main TF DutCycDist s E de Eye width Eye width 36 Fall Time FT Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period e Rize Time Cual Delayed Con Of ne DELTA DELAY os f Ext Dir Da Heg Ext HF 1 ae a Display sawe Recall Marker Measure Limit Test Mathematics VE DG My NRZ Rise Time definition A histogram is first constructed to find the mean location of the crossing points relative to the one level and zero level Histograms are then constructed at each of the three threshold levels for example the 10 50 and 90 points on the transition The instrument analyses each histogram to determine the histogram mean at which the data crosses the separate threshold levels Once the scanning of the waveform is complete and the instrument has identified the mean location for each threshold crossed then rise time can be computed NRZ Rise Time Time at the Upper Threshold Crossing Time at the Lower Threshold Crossing The instrument has two standard threshold levels for which fall time may be measured The default setting is from the 10 to the 90 point on the transition and the second is from the 20 to the 80 point on the transition The 20 to 80 transition is recommended for devices with significant pulse distortion Also user defined th
396. t Ratios M Ext Ratio RZ Extinction Ratio is a measure of the ratio of the one level and the zero level of an RZ eye diagram The accuracy of this measurement relies on determining and removing the dark level components from the measurement calculation In order to perform an accurate extinction ratio measurement you should first perform an extinction ratio calibration in order to minimize the dark level contribution Pico Teche PicoScope 9000 PC Sara Oscilloscope 12 GHz E E Ol x Print Help Time Base MT AC RMS T Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE FF ContrastRatio M Ext Ratio dB I Ext Ratio lv Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB E td M Dark Level Mean e hic Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak T RMS Signal to Noize Zero Level Bit Period Bit Rate Js A400 Wiis y Main O Intensified f Delayed Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY os ExtDir e Pos E Hed f Ext HF VD he LI y a 6 6 1 E t Int Clk 50 oh RZ Extinction Ratio definition RZ Extinction Ratio measurement is made in a section of the eye referred to as the Eye Boundaries and at the centre of the zero level between pulses The default value for RZ Eye Boundaries is the central 5 p p of the Bit Time or 47 5 Eye Boundary 1 and 52 5 Eye Boun
397. t the X source to channels 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 spectrum 1 and 2 Y The Y selects the waveform source related to the vertical Y axis You can set the Y source to e channels 1 and 2 functions 1 through 4 waveform memories 1 through 4 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 63 ps9000 en spectrum 1 and 2 Menu O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 3 62 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 64 Graticule Grid ABS C Framef Off The PicoScope 9000 has a 10 by 8 display graticule grid which you can turn on or off The Graticule menu selection is Off Off Frame Axes Grid Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz loj xj E Pico nology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz oO xj Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo Cony Print About Clear Display I Run Stop Single Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo E E Print About Channels 3 Sas 5 a ersistence x Display Channels Hz 25 GSa gocs gt Display Channel 1 Screen Channel 1 Screen e chi Ch2 e YT fe Chi Ch2 e YT C Dual YT Dual YT Display C Quad YT C Quad YT On Off es oe On Off cae C YT KY C YT XY Grid Axes Frame _ DM 7 D m y Turns the background
398. t the upper threshold on the edge you are measuring on It is a measure of the transition time of the data on the negative falling edge of a waveform The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display Run Stop sSingle Parameterz F Period F Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time fw Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Copy me Print Abot 250 as External Direct Ti me E ase Salz 250 Persistence 7 Bit Period Bit kate st A400 Wiis Mode i Main C Intensified ir Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY E s f AJB i Ext HF Aa m Int Clk o B Ly 25 Te EM E e pos neg Fall Time definition Fall Time is determined as follows Fall Time TcrossLT TcrossUT where TcrossUT is the time of crossing with the upper threshold and TcrossLT is the time of crossing with the lower threshold If more than one fall
399. t the zero level is disregarded 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 111 ps9000 en Menu The standard deviation that is reported on the instrument display as part of the measurement results is derived from the statistical analysis of the one level measurement result It is not the same as the standard deviation derived from the histogram analysis of the signal O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 112 5 4 6 14 NRZPeak Peak e Peak Peak NRZ Peak Peak is a measure of the difference between the Max and Min vertical values of the selected waveform within the eye window y Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz m Oj x Clear Display StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy ee Print Help Eye Diagram 1 43 aS als Persistence External HF E Time Base ve Parameters DT AC RMS TF Avg Power TF Avg Power dErr Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Eye Amplitude TF Eye Height Eye Height dB hax Mean hic F Min Neg Overshoot Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level e Peak Peak Pos Overshoot T RMS M SiN Ratio SIN Ratio dB Zero Level i ensified elayed Dual Delayed Con t off current Total Meas C BED E p
400. t trigger source is selected you can adjust the trigger level value between 1 V and 1 V in 10 mV steps coarse increment or 1 mV steps fine increment Perform the Autoscale function if you want the instrument to automatically set the trigger level to the amplitude midpoint of the trigger signal The trigger signal must be connected to the trigger input of the instrument For example if you are using the trigger input on the instrument front panel the trigger signal must be connected to the front panel trigger input Autoscale can then set the trigger level When direct edge trigger is in use the trigger level setting also determines what the instrument uses as a reference to determine a high or low A high is a voltage above the trigger level and a low is a voltage below the trigger level LEVEL changes automatically if the attenuation factor is changed 5 16 5 Slope Positive Negative The Slope menu specifies whether the instrument triggers on either the positive or negative edge of the signal The Slope menu is active when the External Direct source is selected in the Sourcel 35 menu Positive Triggers on an edge that transitions through and above the trigger level Negative Triggers on an edge that transitions through and below the trigger level ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 362 5 16 6 HOLDOFF Trigger holdoff helps stabilize trigger
401. technique in which several sample and hold circuits sample several different analog channels simultaneously Sine Wave A common curved wave shape that is mathematically defined by the value of the sin function O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 410 Single In single trigger mode the scope triggers once when the trigger conditions are met Once the acquisition process is complete the scope will display the acquired waveform and stop the acquisition process Single Shot A signal measured by an oscilloscope that only occurs once also called a transient event Single Valued Waveform A method of representing a signal in which every horizontal acquisition point has associated with it one and only one amplitude value In contrast an eye diagram is displayed by measuring and displaying multiple amplitude values for each horizontal acquisition point Skew Skew changes the horizontal position of a waveform on the display independent of any other waveforms on the display Skew is typically used for overlaying waveforms or eliminating timing differences caused by different cable and probe lengths The timebase position control moves all of the waveforms on the display at the same time whereas skew moves individual waveforms Slewing The causing of successive samples to be taken at different times than the trigger recognition point Slope On a graph or an oscilloscope scree
402. teen amplitude parameters for Amplitude Paramete pulse measurements Once the Top and Base calculation area is 7 Maximum completed most of the amplitude measurements can be made Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude Middle Mean de RMS ac RMS Area You can continuously update as many as ten measurement parameters and as many as four statistics measurements at any one time Cycle Mean TF Cyele de RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Fos Overshoot Meg Overshoot The pulse measurement algorithms for X Parameters will only work when a single valued signal is used and no NRZ eye diagram or RZ eye diagram is present on the screen Measurements made on both NRZ and RZ eye diagrams will fail 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 275 5 11 4 1 ps9000 en Maximum Menu Maximum is the voltage or power of the absolute maximum level of the measurement region The maximum level is taken directly from the histogram data The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico Techno ay menee 9000 PC SE Oscilloscope 12 GHz Y Parameters Amplitude Paramete e Maximum Minimum Peak Peak Top Base Amplitude T middle Mean T de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle de RMS Cycle ac RMS
403. ter and drift or to see a waveform s envelope look for timing violations and find infrequent events Color Grading This mode is similar to persistence mode The only difference is that the accumulated points are color graded shaded with different colors to indicate the density of the points and a color graded database is built You can use the color graded database with histograms mask testing statistical measurements and eye diagrams You can also use color grading to provide more visual information about the waveforms The Color Grading function uses the database in the size of the graticule area Behind each pixel is a 16 bit counter Each time a pixel is hit by data the counter for that pixel is incremented Each color used for the color grade mode represents a range of data counts As the total count increases the range of hits represented by each color also increases The maximum count for each counter is 65 535 There are five colors used in the color graded display Each color shows the number of hits per pixel over the graticule area and represents a range of counts which depends on the total number of hits As the total count increases the range of hits represented by each color also increases The colors can be changed from the Color Grade s menu 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 57 ps9000 en Menu Pico Technology a 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display 7
404. ternal HF Time Base Ac RMS FF Avg Power Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE FF ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening Max Mean T Mid Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Iw Moise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak FT RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level i Bit Period Bit Rate E A400 Wiis z Mode i Main Intensified f Delayed SCALE A Dual Delayed Con t Off DELTA DELAY fos Ext Dir o ees Neg f Ext HF m C Int Clk 50 RZ Noise RMS One and RZ Noise RMS Zero definition The RZ Noise RMS is determined as follows RZ RMS High RZ RMS Low The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width The High or Low selection for noise control in the Measurement Setup dialog instructs the measurement to be performed on the logical 1 or O levels This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it automatically sets the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 151 Menu 5 4 8 13 RZOne Level e One Level RZ One Level is a measure of the mean value found at the peak of the eye diagram logical 1 a Pico Technology PicoSco
405. th Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm e Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Channels l Of x Defaut Setup Undo coo GOR a AS About s Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit kate E A400 Wiis y bode C Main C Intensified ir Delayed tS Persistence External Direct al Wim Minimum Maximum Mean Dual Delayed Con i off DELTA DELAT CA 0 AE 100 psiciv Et e posC neg O Ext HF TER al la is Co Display SaveRecal Limit Test Mathematics 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved Positive Jitter p p definition Positive Jitter p p is determined as follows Positive Jitter p p Full width of the Horizontal Histogram in the Middle Threshold The Margins 37 menu sets the margin markers to see where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of Positive jitter p p will be performed only inside these margins ps9000 en 271 5 11 3 16 Positive Jitter RMS Menu Positive Jitter RMS is a measure of rms time variations of the rising edges of a pulse waveform at the middle threshold Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Run StopSingle Auto cale Defaut Setup Unido I aS 12 GHz 500 Ghals Persistence Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Period Fre
406. th the horizontal scale you set for the 10 division window determines the sample interval horizontal point spacing or resolution on the waveform SCALE A 10 n diw F SCALE B 2 naidi E The Time Base Scale Record Length Sample Interval and Eon e Off Resolution are related to each other and specify the horizontal ENTER acquisition window Relations between these horizontal elements are as DELTA DELAY 30 ns a follows El Time Duration seconds 10 div window size x Time Base Scale sec div Time Duration seconds Sample Interval seconds sample x Record Length samples Sample Interval seconds sample Resolution sec sample 1 Sample Rate samples sec These elements in formulas behave as follows if Record Length or Time Duration vary Sample Interval varies to accommodate them up to the highest sample rate lower sample interval or highest resolution If you set a faster Time Base Scale setting decreasing Time Duration and the Sample Interval reaches its lower limit the horizontal scale becomes limited to a setting compatible with the record length and the lower limit of the sample interval If you attempt to set a longer Record Length and the Sample Interval reaches its lower limit Time Duration remains constant and the record length becomes limited The equation becomes Maximum Record Length Time Duration Min Sample Interval 2009 Pico Technology All
407. the targeted waveform is used as the Base User Defined This method lets you set the top and base to a specific voltage value The upper middle and lower thresholds are then calculated from the voltage values you select The User Defined simplifies the threshold detection algorithm The result is that the measurement throughput of the instrument is increased because the instrument does not have to calculate the top and base values After you selected the User Defined method the Top and Base variables becomes active TOP and BASE The TOP and BASE variables let you set the top and base to a specific voltage value As an example for a 200 mV div vertical scale you can set the top and base voltage values from 798 mV to 798 mV in 25 mV coarse or 1 56 mV fine increments determined by the voltage range you are in Note that the top value cannot be less than base value 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 304 5 11 6 4 Thresholds e 1056 50 90 C 20 509 809 C User Defined The Thresholds menu sets the measurement points that the automatic measurements use for calculating the timing measurement results The threshold points are upper middle and lower For example rise time is measured from the lower threshold to the upper threshold while a width measurement is made between two middle thresholds The three threshold choices are the standard IEEE measurement points e 10
408. the best way to view most waveforms However there are times when you want to know the frequency content of a waveform In 1807 the French mathematician Jean Baptiste Fourier developed the Fourier series and Fourier transform to solve thermodynamics problems Using the Fourier series any periodic waveform can be constructed by adding a DC term to a series of sine and cosine terms You can use the Fourier transform to mathematically relate the time domain and the frequency domain The Discrete Fourier Transform DFT is used to convert sampled time domain waveform data into the frequency domain However the DFT is slow because it requires a large number of calculations This led to the development of the Fast Fourier Transform FFT which runs faster than the DFT on digital computers When an FFT or fast Fourier transform is added to an instrument signals can also be displayed in the frequency domain The frequency domain allows you to see the frequency content of a signal FFT functionality added to an instrument allows you to analyse a signal from two different but complementary points of view the frequency domain and the time domain The FFT process mathematically converts the standard in this case repetitive time domain signal into its frequency components providing spectrum analysis capabilities Being able to quickly look at a signal s frequency components and spectrum shape is a powerful research and analysis tool FFT is an
409. the firmware calibration temperature All specifications apply after the instrument s temperature has been stabilized after 1 hour of continuous operation Unless otherwise noted corrected limits are given when Specifications are achieved using software processing Many performance parameters are enhanced through frequent simple calibrations All specifications are subject to change without notice Specifications are valid after a 1 hour warm up period and 5 C from the firmware calibration temperature Characteristics provide useful but not guaranteed information about the functions and performance of the instrument Typical Performance where listed is not guaranteed but indicates the performance that most units will exhibit Nominal Value indicates the expected but not guaranteed value of the parameter Factory Calibration Cycle For optimum performance the instrument should have a complete verification of specifications once every 12 months Channels Vertical Number of Channels Bandwidth 3dB Flatness Full Narrow Rise Time 10 to 90 calculated from Tr 0 35 BW Full Bandwidth Narrow Bandwidth RMS Noise maximum Full Bandwidth Narrow Bandwidth Scale Factors Sensitivity DC Difference Voltage Accuracy DC Offset Range 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved 2 simultaneous acquisition DC to 12 GHz DC to 8 GHz 29 2 ps 43 7 ps lt 2 5 mV lt 2mV Note Averaging
410. the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 20 and RIGHT MARGIN 2 variables When the Peak is selected in the Method menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 313 variable You can choose a peak by using the PEAK 1 and PEAK 2 variables in the Define param 3 menu Total Harmonic Distortion THD is a ratio expressed as a percentage of the rms level of the measured signal with the fundamental harmonic removed to the rms level of the the fundamental harmonic Total harmonic distortion is determined as follows where Un is an amplitude of the n th harmonic and U1 is an amplitude of the fundamental harmonic THD is a measure of signal purity used to characterize linearity in electronic circuits and components A high purity sine wave one with low harmonic content is input to the device under test An analysis of the frequency content of the output from that device will reveal non linear operation in the form of increased harmonic levels ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 312 5 11 8 FFT Define Parameters Measure FT Define Param Method f Harmonic The Define Param 20 menu is changed when the spectrum waveform for FFT measurement is selected To select defined parameters for FFT measurements do as follows LEFT MARGIN Select one of the spectrums in the Sour
411. then dYM dXM is the slope of the signal 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 195 IAA ps9000 en Menu There are two options for the way in which PicoScope 9000 moves the markers Independent Paired Independent When Independent motion is selected you can move each marker independently The M1 POSITION variable moves the XM1 or the YM1 or the XYM1 marker The M2 POSITION variable moves the XM2 or the YM2 or the XYM2 marker Paired When Paired motion is selected you can move both markers with the M1 POSITION 1 variable simultaneously while the difference between markers can be moved with the M2 POSITION variable 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 196 5 5 Reference Fon Ot The Marker menu provides ratiometric measurements These measurements give results in such ratiometric units as dB and Degrees Ratiometric measurements require a reference for comparison The user can set the reference 1 First adjust the markers to a predetermined positional difference representing an absolute reference or position the markers on a reference waveform to define a specific parameter such as peak to peak voltage or period 2 Then clicking the Set Reference button the ratiometric values for the reference in the Marker Measure tab becomes 100 O dB or 360 These values are displayed in the same color as the markers When you chan
412. time can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of rise time The fall time will not be measured until the falling edge completes the transition through all three levels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 259 Menu The Margins 37 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of fall time value will be performed only inside these margins Fall time value is affected by the Define Param 20 menu In the Defined Thresholds 30 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 260 5 11 3 7 Positive Duty Cycle Positive Duty Cycle is defined as the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period This is the percentage of the period that the positive pulse width occupies The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run La 2 GHz es Fe Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Bit Rate E 2400 Mbs y Main O Intensified e Delay
413. tionkaso dS 10log erolevelleye center DarkLevel eroLevelleye center DarkLevel RE ExtinctionRato Cnelevelleve center DarkLevel 100 CreLevelleye center DarkLevel Re ExtirciiorRa o ceroLevelleve center DarkLevel 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 5 4 8 4 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved RZ Eye Amplitude 4 Eye Amplitude RZ Eye Amplitude is a measure of the difference between the logic 1 level and the logic O level histogram mean values of an RZ eye diagram It differs from eye height in that it does not account for the noise on the signal Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Default Setup Undo Copy ae Print Help 12 GHz 14 is 2 AY T Eye Diagram 1 4 Sala Hz 1 49 Persistence External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y RZ Eye Paramete Units f Time L Ai Bit Period Avg Power dBrr Contrast Ratio FF ContrastRatio dE ContrastRatio Ext Ratio dB Ext Ratio Ext Ratio jw Eye Amplitude Eve Height Eye Height dB Eye Opening FT Max Mean T mid Min Noise P p One Noise P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak T RMS Signal to Noise Zero Level 51 8400 Mihis Current Total Meas Minima 399 6 mv
414. tivity Prescaled Trigger RMS Jitter maximum Prescaled Trigger input characteristics Prescaled Trigger Maximum Safe Input Voltage Prescaled Trigger Input Connector Specifications amp Characteristics 200 mV p p to 2 V p p from 1 GHz to 8 GHz 300 mV p p to 1 V p p from 8 GHz to 10 GHz 3 5 ps 20 ppm of delay setting 50 ohm AC coupled divide by sixteen prescaler ratio fixed level zero volts 2 V DC peak AC SMA F Clock Recovery Trigger Picoscope 9211 only Clock Recovery Trigger Data Rate and Sensitivity Recovered Clock RMS Trigger Jitter maximum Clock Recovery Trigger input characteristics Clock Recovery Trigger Maximum Safe Input Voltage Clock Recovery Trigger Input Connector Acquisition Number of Acquisition Channels ADC Resolution Digitizing Rate Acquisition Modes Average Modes Number of averages Envelope Modes Data Record Length 50 mV p p typical from 12 3 Mb s to 2 7 Gb s Continuous Rate 1 0 of Unit Interval 50 ohm AC coupled 2 V DC peak AC SMA F 2 simultaneous acquisition 16 bits DC to 200 kHz maximum The signal is sampled and digitized at a rate dictated by the trigger repetition rate and the time base range If data acquisition is not trigger rate limited the maximum Sample rate is 100 kHz Sample normal Average Envelope Stable or Multiple From 2 to 4096 in x2 sequence Min Max or both Min Max values acquired over one
415. to your supplier within 28 days of purchase for a full refund Upgrades We provide upgrades free of charge from our web site at www picotech com We reserve the right to charge for updates or replacements sent out on physical media Trademarks Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Pico Technology and PicoScope are internationally registered trademarks of Pico Technology 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 7 Introduction 2 8 Contact details You can obtain technical assistance from Pico Technology at the following address Address Pico Technology James House Colmworth Business Park Eaton Socon St Neots PE19 8YP United Kingdom Phone 44 0 1480 396 395 Fax 44 0 1480 396 296 Email Technical Support support picotech com Sales sales picotech com Web site www picotech com ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 8 3 3 1 3 2 Product Information What do get Your PicoScope 9000 Series PC Oscilloscope kit contains the following items gt l PicoScope 9201 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 1 PicoScope 9211 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 2 SMA connector saver attached to oscilloscope DO134 PS007 1 Universal power adaptor M197 4 Set of SMA connector dust caps PicoScope 9201 Some product packs may contain additional items Connections Standard oscilloscope connectors The
416. toscale Detautt Setup Undo I Copy pe Print About Measure 1 VOM 12 GHz 100 GSavs Persistence External Direct Time Base Parameters Unite Time 7 Bit Period tS Amplitude Paramete Maximum FA Minimum Peak Peak Top Base e Amplitude T middle Mean MT de RMS ac RMS Area Cycle Mean Cycle dc RMS Cycle ac RMS Cycle Area Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Bit kate E A400 Wiis Woce Main O Intensified Delayed SCALE E 200 psidiv BELA 2502 Dual Delayed Con f off Mean A A E E 4 fi ht Fdo OF A pr pt Em Amplitude Ch14 4 v 642 497 5 mv 495 5 mv DELTA DELAY E Et e pos neg i Ext HF ans cno ES Amplitude definition Amplitude is determined as follows Amplitude Top Base where Top is the statistical maximum level and Base is the statistical minimum level Top may be less than or equal to the maximum value of the waveform while Base may be greater than or equal to the minimum value of the waveform The Margins 2 menu sets the margin markers to show where the scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of amplitude value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 281 Menu 5 11 4 7 Middle Middle is the computation of the middle point between the maximum and minimum amplitude peaks of the waveform ov
417. trigger source waveform that meets your trigger condition and tells the acquisition system where the sampled data point corresponding to the trigger point is stored in the channel memory The time at which the trigger event occurs is the time reference for the waveform and is by definition O seconds Trigger Holdoff A control that inhibits the trigger circuit from looking for a trigger level for some specified time after the end of the waveform Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Hysteresis is the difference between the arming voltage and the trigger level voltage This defines the minimum peak to peak waveform voltage which can cause a trigger The waveform must cross both the arming level voltage and the trigger level voltage to generate a trigger event Trigger Hysteresis helps to prevent false triggers from occurring on a falling edge due to noise when the rising edge is selected as the trigger edge or on a rising edge when the falling edge is selected as the trigger edge Trigger kick out A signal from a trigger circuit that comes out of the trigger input connector Trigger Level The voltage level that a trigger source signal must reach before the trigger circuit initiates a Sweep Trigger pick off A circuit used to extract a portion of the input signal to trigger the timebase Trigger recognition The process of responding to a Suitable triggering signal Trigger recognition point The time when trigger recognition occurs Also
418. ts a range of data counts The peak density of data counts is represented by the by the brightest regions of the waveform You can use the gray scale persistence mode to display waveforms that use the instrument s measurement database This database consists of all data samples displayed on the screen The measurement database provides the data for the construction of histograms and the generation of mask tests O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 393 6 8 ps9000 en Glossary Ground 1 A conducting connection by which an electric circuit or equipment is connected to the earth to establish and maintain a reference voltage level 2 The voltage reference point in a circuit Ground Loop A circuit with multiple low impedance paths connected to the same ground potential A ground loop acts as a shorted transformer turn which induces circulating ground currents These currents produce slight changes in the ground potentials within the circuit H Harmonic distortion HD A form of distortion in analog circuits that generates harmonics signals whose frequencies are integer multiples of the input signal It is calculated as the ratio of a single harmonic to the level of the original signal Harmonic distortion is related to total harmonic distortion THD the ratio of the sum of multiple harmonics to the level of the original signal Hardcopy The ability to save an oscilloscope display in an electronic format
419. uare and flat topped as possible Connect Dots Connect dots is a display technique in which a straight line is drawn between two adjacent samples on the display see Vectors 15 Contrast Ratio Contrast ratio is a measure of the RZ eye one level at the eye window to the one level found between eye diagram peaks Conversion time The time required from the moment a channel is interrogated to the moment that accurate data is available Usually associated with DACs and ADCs Convolution The integration of the product of two functions in time Convolution in the time domain is equivalent to multiplication in the frequency domain Countdown The process of dividing an input frequency by n to produce a lower frequency output Countdown is usually used in sampling oscilloscopes to generate a lower frequency trigger signal by responding to every nth signal transition N is an integer divisor that may or may not be constant Counter 1 In software a memory location used to store a count of certain occurrences 2 In hardware a circuit that counts events See also event counter Coupling The method of connecting two circuits together Circuits connected with a wire are directly coupled circuits connected through a capacitor or a transformer are indirectly or AC frequency filtering coupled 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 384 6 4 Crossing Percentage Crossing perce
420. ue the trigger point Because the PicoScope 9000 is a sequential sampling oscilloscope you can adjust the delay time only after positive delay value the trigger point Delay By Events Triggering Delay by events triggering is a trigger mode in which the trigger circuitry arms on an edge from one of the channels waits for a number of events on the selected channel then triggers on an edge of the selected channel Basically the trigger criterion is two edge triggers separated by a selectable number of events Delay By Time Triggering Delay by time triggering is a trigger mode in which the trigger circuitry arms on an edge of the selected channel waits for a period of time then triggers on an edge of the selected channel Basically the trigger criterion is two edge triggers separated by at least the selected period of time Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delayed Sweep Delayed sweep is a magnified portion of the main sweep When delayed sweep Is enabled an expanded view of a selected portion of the waveform are displayed by the scope allowing you to view and analyse the main sweep in more detail Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data Also called Delta Time 2009 Pico Technology All rights reser
421. ument to use external voltage attenuators or probes current probes and optical to electrical converters Scaling is automatically adjusted to account and display information at the input side of an external device For example you may need to reduce the voltage level of a pulse generator that exceeds a channel s maximum input level If you add a 20 dB attenuator the voltage is reduced by a factor of 10 1 Although the voltage levels into the channel are within acceptable limits your source measurements will be 1 10th of the actual source level External scaling allows you to compensate for the 20 dB attenuation so your measurements reflect the source level prior to attenuation The measurement result reflects the actual value at the external device input Once the number has been entered 1 is the default the instrument then uses the total attenuation factor in scaling measurement results Total attenuation is the product of the external attenuation multiplied by the hardware attenuation of the probe or another external unit or sampler When you enter attenuation amplification or conversion information with the External Scale menus the channel settings change in the following ways e The unit values and amplitudes of the markers and vertical measurements reflect the signal at the input of a transducer probe attenuator or amplifier For example you can connect an external device such as a photodiode to an electrical channel input and
422. up Undo I Copy i Print About LE y 12 GHz 50 G5a z Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display Persistence External Direct Display Screen C YT Dual YT f Guad YT O Y C TERY Dual YT KY Mathematics om e Operator Differentiate fia Chi Opera 2 Che CONS TANT a 400 m ul SMOOTH LEMETA a a a E Grid AES O Frame Ott Back chi E ch2 PE EDI q per Wee Est HF E E E os gt cno MO O ndo An example of GUI with two channel waveforms and four Math Functions Ch1 1 GHz sine wave Ch2 100 MHz sine wave F1 Addition Chi Ch2 F2 Multiplication Ch1xCh2 F3 Differentiate F1 F4 Absolute Chi You can use the waveform math function capabilities to perform math operations on one or two source waveforms For example you can subtract channel two from channel one to make a differential measurement Or if one channel is measuring current and another channel is measuring voltage you can use a function to multiply the two channels together and display the instantaneous power as a third waveform This new waveform can then be measured with markers or automatic measurements such as Peak Peak or AC RMS You can define up to four functions and in most cases a function may be used as a source for another function so the PicoScope 9000 can perform more complex math operations
423. ure Histogram Utility YT Display Format Dual YT Display Format Quad YT The Quad YT format is the normal time on the horizontal axis versus voltage on the vertical axis format with the display area divided into four equal screens XY The XY format displays voltages of two waveforms against each other and draws the Source 1 versus Source 2 display of the two selected sources Source 1 s amplitude is plotted on the horizontal X axis and the Source 2 s amplitude is plotted on the vertical Y axis 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 61 Menu y Pico Techeology PicoScope Soo PE Sampling Der Mosrcope 17 Gite E Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Clear Display i Stop Single Autoscale Deta ault Setup About na Sal 25 G ersistence Display creen Channels Place on Graticule 1 3 ee 4 Graticule A a Sa b x g a 4 C Frame Off Back CA 2n8 C EXtDir e Pos Ne Seii 3 C Ext HF Os m Int Clk Measure Utility Acquisition Histogram Quad YT Display Format XT Display Format YT XY The YT XY format displays both YT and XY pictures The YT format appears on the upper part of the screen and the XY format on the lower part of the screen The YT format display area is one screen and any displayed waveforms are superim
424. uses one sample interval for main or intensified traces and a different sample interval for delayed or dual delayed traces Equivalent sample rate The sample interval is 1 divided by the equivalent sample rate The time duration of the data in a channel memory is the time between the sample points times the number of points For example if the equivalent sample rate is 100 GSa s and the memory depth is 500 points 10 divisions the time between the sample points is 10 ps 10 ps times 500 points is 5 ns of waveform data stored in the channel memory Because there are ten horizontal divisions on the display set the time base to 500 ps div to show the whole channel memory on the display Time duration of the record record length equivalent sampling rate ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide Acquisition Acquisition Acq Chi amp Che Acquisition cont Fit Acquisition To Fun Until Main Menu C Stop single Butt C Single valued si Acquisitions Multi valued sigr simultaneons Alternate E OF ACGUISITIONS Channel Lt Model f chi che Sample Stable Average Multiple Average Median Average C Min Max Envelop C bax Envelope C hin Envelope 0 Peak Detect AW ERASE Ti 22 Acquisition menu The acquisition system of the PicoScope 9000 has several options for converting analogue data into digital form
425. ve Duty Cycle is determined as follows Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period 100 If more than one negative duty cycle can be found within the margins the scope measures the average value of all negative duty cycles The negative duty cycle will not be measured until the period and negative pulse width completes the transition through all three levels The Margins 2 71 menu sets the margin markers to see where scope is making the automatic measurement All calculations of negative duty cycle value will be performed only inside these margins 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 263 Menu Negative duty cycle value is affected by the Define Param 2 menu In the Defined Thresholds 3 menu you can redefine the mid threshold setting from 50 to any other level you want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 264 5 11 3 9 Positive aie Positive Crossing is defined as the time of the first positive crossing of the data Sampled at the mid reference level in the measurement region The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the right most portion of the display right margin Pico rechnelaas escape 9000 PC Sarai Oscilloscope 12 GHz 7 Oj x Measure 2 GHz 3 2 GHZ Persistence External Direct Time Base A Fara
426. ved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 386 Delta A Greek letter A uppercase used to represent a finite change in a variable Deterministic Jitter Deterministic jitter is data related jitter It is the combined effects of the data dependent jitter periodic jitter and bounded uncorrelated jitter components that are present on a signal Deterministic jitter is bounded meaning that measured values do not increase with longer measurement times Differential Input A circuit with two inputs that Is sensitive to the algebraic difference between the two Differential Linearity A term often inappropriately used to mean differential non linearity Differential Output A circuit with two outputs supplying one normal and one complementary level of output Signal Differential Pulses Two opposite polarity pulses coincident in time Differential time domain reflectometry TDR A technique for determining the impedance of coupled transmission lines in which complementary steps are applied to the two sides of the line to be tested and the timing and the amplitude of the reflected signals are to be measured Differentiate Signal Processing The capability of an oscilloscope to display a derivative math waveform The derivative math waveform indicates the instantaneous rate of change of the waveform acquired One use of derivative waveforms is the measurement of amplifier slew rate Digital Filtering The manipulation of digital d
427. vel This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 134 5 4 7 14 RZRise Time RZ Rise Time is a measure of the mean transition time of the data on the upward slope of an RZ eye diagram The data crosses through the lower middle and upper thresholds Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj xj Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Detaut Setup Undo I Copy ee Print About Eye Diagram 1 1 501 TSass 2 GHz 1 Persistence External Direct Time Base l sample ve Parameters Time Base RZ Eye Paramete Bit Rate i Bit Period 7 Bit Time Bit Rate Eye width Eye idth TF Fall Time Jitter P p Fall Jitter P p Rise T Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width e Rise Time Dual Delayed Total Meas Minima Con off i f Ext Dir fe F Pos Ne Ext HF 3 DELTA DELAY ead as Ez Ed AAA Int Eik 250 mi 100 my RZ Rise Time definition A histogram is first constructed to find the mean locations of the eye one level and zero level Histograms are then constructed
428. ver erased similar to a storage scope Setting the persistence time to intermediate values allows you to observe long term changes or trends Vectors Vectors or connect the dots is a display technique in which a straight line is drawn between two adjacent samples on the display It is a display feature and has no effect on the waveform data stored in the channel memory This method is also called linear interpolation Vernier Vernier or fine control allows a calibrated fine adjustment of a scaling factor such as the channel volts div or the timebase time div For example it is possible to set the mV div to 150 mV div instead of the standard choices of 100 or 200 mV div by entering the desired value using the numeric keypad for the mV div scale factor Vertical bar markers You position the two vertical bars to measure a time parameter of a waveform record The oscilloscope displays the value of the markers with respect to the trigger and the time difference between the bars Vertical Accuracy The closeness of the indicated signal voltage to the true value Vertical Resolution The number bits of bits used to digitise the input signal A 14 bit digitiser can resolve a signal into 16 384 levels 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 416 6 23 Vertical Sensitivity The range of values to which the vertical deflection factor can be set Volt The unit of electric potential dif
429. vertical window is always centered around the offset value that is set As the numeric value of the scale is increased the displayed waveform decreases in size and as numeric value of the scale is decreased the waveform increases in size Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz i z Oj x Clear Display Fun Stop Single Auto cale Channels 1 25 3 12 GHz 25 G5Sa Default Setup Undo E O E Print About 12 GHz 25 G5als Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base f Time Bit Period i chi f Cha Bit Rate B 400 Wih Mode f Main f Intensified Delayed AGGUIrE f on Off 2 pargis SCALES 2 patdi DELSEY Pos Dual Delayed Con fe off DELTA DELAY fos KG 2 neidiv l 2 if Pos Meg ro ae Os cme MEA Lo e Il Ja a Ty LIA Vertical scaling of a waveform The channel SCALE does not affect the vertical acquisition window Only waveform traces from input channels can be vertically adjusted with the SCALE control It does not affect waveforms saved in memories or waveform functions ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 38 You can set the vertical sensitivity of the selected channel in one of three ways Use the SCALE spin box Use the Chi and Ch2 spin boxes in the Permanent Controls area Use the Po
430. want ps9000 en O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 262 5 11 3 8 Negative Duty Cycle Negative Duty Cycle is defined as the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period This is the percentage of the period that the negative pulse width occupies The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run StopSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy E Print About 2 GHz 100 GSa Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base f Time Bit Period Bit Rate E 2400 Mbs y Main Intensified f Delayed Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Iw Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Pree ey ee Ce Se Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Mean Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA BELAY a ue 53 Est HF ET EtDir a pf NES T reco ME Negative Duty Cycle definition Negati
431. waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the gated region Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Attenuation Attenuation is the difference in a signal s voltage current or power when it goes through a probe or other attenuation device When using a standard 10 1 probe on a scope the input waveform will be reduced or attenuated by a factor of 10 in voltage or 20 dB Probe attenuation may be set in the CHANNELS menu Attenuation coefficient The rate of optical power loss with respect to distance measured in decibels per kilometer dB km at a specific wavelength Auto Auto or Freerun is a trigger mode in which the trigger circuit is armed and the instrument then waits for up to 400 us for a trigger to occur If a trigger does not occur within 400 us the instrument triggers itself and the data that is acquired with the trigger is displayed on the screen Automatic measurement An automatic measurement of a parameter and its numeric readout that the instrument takes and updates directly from a channel math or reference waveform in real time without operator intervention Autoprobe Autoprobe is an interface which detects the some types of probe that are connected to a scope s input channels Autoprobe automatically configures the vertical channel coupling and attenuation for the type of probe attached to the channel Autoscale Autoscale also Autoset evaluate
432. waveforms as sine waves or pulses for all main menus excluding the following cases Either NRZ of RZ is selected in the Eye Diagram Measurel 73 menu One of the standard masks for eye diagram waveforms is selected in the Mask Test 1 menu Optimizes the autoscale algorithm for such waveforms as sine waves and pulses Optimizes the autoscale algorithm for such waveforms as NRZ eye diagrams Optimizes the autoscale algorithm for such waveforms as RZ eye diagrams 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved ps9000 en 337 ps9000 en Menu Default Setup Factory Setup Power OFF Setup Save Os Default The Default Setup button returns the instrument to its default settings This places the oscilloscope in a known operating condition You may find it helpful to use this known operating condition when someone else has used the oscilloscope before you If you accidentally press the Default Setup button use the Undo button to return the oscilloscope to the operating condition it was in before Default Setup was pressed Right click on the button to get four options Default Setup Returns the instrument to its default settings Factory Setup Returns the instrument to default setting of the manufacturer Power Off Setup Returns the instrument to the last setting before switching off the power supply Save As Default Stores the present front panel setup as default setup 2009 Pico Technology All rights r
433. wider bandwidth option allows the instrument to respond to fast changes in a waveform The increased bandwidth thus yields the highest measurement fidelity The narrow bandwidth offers the best sensitivity by reducing the noise on the input waveform while still maintaining good frequency response A lower sampler bandwidth is especially useful for low level signals that cannot be averaged such as an eye diagram If you do not need wide bandwidth use the narrow bandwidth to keep the signal to noise ratio at the best possible level Narrow bandwidth removes high frequency noise from a particular channel s waveform The Bandwidth does not affect the trigger signal Full This button selects a 12 GHz bandwidth Narrow This button selects an 8 GHz bandwidth Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol x Clear Display Run StopiSingle Autoscale Copy E Print About 1 1T Persistence External Direct Utility Timing Parameters JITTER chi ff Cha on Off PULSE WIDTH 1 ne RISE TIME AGGIE fon Off SCALE OFFSET FALL TIME E E DELTA PHASE Standard Frequentes Current Total Wima Minimum ESA gt Trigger f Clock O Patter Back Ch1 PI cho BP CaA C AIB iv m Gb FOO ps 7 Int Clk pov EXE Et e pos neg Est HF Channel 1 yellow trace full bandwidth 12 GHz Channel 2 blue trace narrow bandwidt
434. width measurement of second short pulse Two modes are used to set the margins Waveform Marker Waveform Provides automatic setting of the left and right margins on any of the rising or falling edges of the selected waveform The LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN variables provide positioning of both margins into any upper middle or lower threshold with any rising or falling edge of the waveform Marker Provides manual setting of the left and right margins with the LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN variables O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 308 5 11565652 5 11 6 6 3 LEFT MARGIN and RIGHT MARGIN You can set the left and right margins with the LEFT MARGIN 28 and RIGHT MARGIN 308 variables When the Waveform is selected in the Mode menu both variables automatically set margins on any rising or falling edge of selected waveform With the LEFT MARGIN 30 marker or RIGHT MARGIN 28 marker you can move the left and right margins from the 1st rising edge up to the 256th falling edge Both variables set the margins at any point of the display manually when Marker is selected in the Model menu Left Threshold and Right Threshold The LEFT THRESHOLD and RIGHT THRESHOLD variables select crossing points on the edge of the selected waveform Both variables can be used only when Waveform is selected in the Mode menu Upper A margin will be placed on the upper t
435. wo consecutive edges of the rising slope at the Mid reference level This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 124 5 46729 RZ Eye Width and RZ Eye Width wf Eye Width Eye Width 9 RZ Eye Width is a measure of the horizontal opening of an RZ eye diagram The amount of jitter or noise that may appear on the waveform is measured to determine the actual horizontal opening of the eye Pico rechotlaaa PicoScope 9000 PC Sarna Oscilloscope 12 GHz a Ol x Print About Time Base Eye Diagram ve Parameters Time Base Area f Time T Bit Rate Bit Period Bit Time Elie izita Cycle Area 51 8400 Mis eve wah Mace e Eye width Main Fall Time Intensified litter Pap Fall f Delayed Jitter P p Rise T Jitter RMS Fall Jitter RMS Rise Neg Crossing SCALE A Pos Crossing Pos Duty Cycle Pulse Symmetry Pulse Width Rise Time Minimum Dual Delayed fon t Off DELTA DELAY ds ae E f Ext Dir a E Pos f MN Ext HF i i f Int Clk 2 RZ Eye Width definition To compute eye width the 50 height of the eye is first determined Then a vertically thin measurement
436. x Clear Display Pun Stop Single Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo Cop Pel Print Help Eye Diagram 1 93 Tsalz 12 GHz 1 493 TSa External HF Time Base ve Parameters Time Base Y NRZ Eye Paramet AC RMS Time Avg Power i Bit Period Avg Power der Crossing Crossing Level Ext Ratio dB MT Ext Ratio Ext Ratio FT Eye Amplitude Eye Height Eye Height dB 1 493 12 GH az Persistence Bit kate E S400 Mis a i Main C Intensified e Delayed F Neg Overshoot W Noize P p One W Noize P p Zero Noise RMS One Noise RMS Zero One Level TT Peak Peak Pos Overshoot RMS MT S N Ratio T SIN Ratio del Zero Level SCALE B Ef pelcliv a 53 DELAY a EHEN Dual Delayed Con off DELTA BELAY fos Ca Err CEL C AIB Ext HF VE co MESS ona lt NRZ Noise P p Zero definition The NRZ Noise P p One is determined as follows NRZ Noise P p One One P p The NRZ Noise P p Zero is determined as follows NRZ Noise P p Zero Zero P p Vone and Vzero are calculated from a histogram using data within the eye window These measurements are made in the center of the bit period within the Eye Boundaries The default value is 20 of the NRZ bit time This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will
437. y gt Screen Screen e YT e YT Dual YT C Dual YT C Quad YT C Quad YT OXY mM COOYT XY C YT XY C Dual YT XY C Dual YT XY Grid Axes Frame Off Back Grid Axes C Frame Off Back Ext A e Pos Nei C BtH 2 Int a ca BEN FED pos Neg a C AID E T ExtHF C Int Cik aj lv dr alo Measure Channels Time Base Save Recall Trigger Acquisition Acquisition Measure Limit Test Mathematics Zoom Utility Advance Histogram Utility O Converter FEL Histogram Mask Test Eye Diagram TDR TDT Frame Graticule Graticule is off ps9000 en 65 5 3 7 dl E ps9000 en Menu Color The Color button gives you access to a second level menu that allows you to define the display colors You may modify the color of many items display elements that are displayed on the screen For example you can change the color of an input waveform channel for better visibility Item The Item allows you to choose from the list of display elements You can modify the color of the channels functions display memories spectrums histogram graticule or screen The color of the selected display element can be changed with the Set Color menu Set Color Clicking the Set Color button recalls the Windows Color Dialog Basic colors A
438. y 2 When a Signal is aliased it shows up in the FFT spectrum as a signal of a lower frequency Because the frequency span goes from O to the Nyquist frequency the best way to prevent aliasing is to make sure that the frequency span is greater than all the frequencies present in the input signal Keep in mind that most periodic Signals that are not sine waves have frequency components much higher than the fundamental frequency of the signal Those components may also cause aliasing ps9000 en 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 310 5 11 7 1 Med eZ 5 11 7 3 FFT Frequency The FFT Frequency measures the frequency value of a peak in the FFT spectrum as defined by the Define param 32 menu When Harmonic is selected in the Method 30 menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among other peaks and located within the margins limited by the LEFT MARGIN 2 and RIGHT MARGIN 3 variables When the Peak is selected in the Methodi menu a peak 1 is defined as a peak having maximum amplitude among all peaks exceeding the value of the PEAK LEVEL 17 variable You can choose a peak by using the PEAK 1 variable in the Define param 320 menu FFT Delta Frequency The FFT Delta Frequency measures the frequency difference between two peaks in the FFT spectrum as defined by peak numbers the Define param 20 menu When the Harmonic is selected in the Method menu a peak 1
439. y a single color Often a monochrome image is presented as white on a black background Monotonic A function with a derivative that does not change sign Multiple Valued Waveform A method of representing a signal in which every horizontal acquisition point can have associated with it multiple amplitude values An eye diagram is an example of a multiple valued waveform In contrast a single valued waveform Is displayed by measuring and displaying one and only one amplitude value for each horizontal acquisition point Multiplexer MUX A set of semiconductor or electromechanical switches arranged to direct one of many inputs to a single output N NAND An AND circuit except with a complementary negative true output 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 400 Nanosecond ns A unit of time equivalent to 0 000 000 001 seconds Negative duty cycle A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative overshoot measurement Amplitude voltage measurement Negative width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points the falling edge middle reference point default 50 and the rising edge middle reference point default 50 on a negative pulse Noise An unwanted voltage or current in an electrical circuit Noise distortion The nonlinear behavior that circuits or devi
440. ye diagram Is present on the screen Measurements made on both NRZ and RZ eye diagrams will fail 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserved PicoScope 9000 Series User s Guide 248 5 11 3 1 Period aa Iv Period Period is a measure of the time between the mid threshold crossings of two consecutive edges of the same polarity The PicoScope 9000 starts the measurement on the first edge on the left most portion of the measurement region left margin and stops the measurement on the last edge on the right most portion of the measurement region right margin Pico Technology Picoscope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Oj x Clear Display Run StopSingle 2 GHz H Autoscale Default Setup Undo Cop E Print About pir O sale Persistence External Direct Time Base Time Base Time 7 Bit Period Measure A Parameters Timing Parameters Iw Period Frequency Pos Width Neg Width Rise Time TF Fall Time Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Pos Crossing Bit kate E A400 Wiis y bode C Main C Intensified f Delayed Neg Crossing Burst width Cycles FF Timegihtaximum FF Timegehinimurm Pos Jitter p p Pos Jitter RMS Neg Jitter p p Neg Jitter RMS Current Total Wma Minimum Maximum Mean Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY a ue 53 2 004 nz 157 ne Est HF E
441. yed When you turn Statistics on the minimum maximum mean and standard deviation values start to accumulate at the same time All results are continuously updated the mean standard deviation results are also calculated and_continuously updated Minimum and maximum are the absolute extremes of the automatic measurements Mean and standard deviation calculate the mean and standard deviation of the automatic measurement results Mean is the statistical average of all results for a particular measurement Standard deviation measures the dispersion of those measurement results The figure below shows the mean and standard deviation more graphically Standard deviation is represented by the Greek letter sigma 0 For a Gaussian distribution two sigma 10 from the mean is where 68 3 percent of the data points reside Four sigma 20 from the mean is where 95 4 percent of the data points reside Six sigma 30 from the mean is where 99 7 percent of the data points reside Mean 3g 20 lo QO lo 2o 30 a 08 3 Wo 99 Yo Standard deviation of a Gaussian distribution O 2009 Pico Technology All rights reserve d ps9000 en 245 ps9000 en Menu The mean is calculated as follows YA 2 iml w where u mean N the number of taken measurements Xi measurement i th result The standard deviation is calculated as follows where T mean N the number of taken measurements Xi measurement th result
442. zontal time histogram is constructed to determine the mean location at the crossing points as well as statistical distribution of the crossing points As would be expected noise and jitter will cause a large variance in the location of the crossing points and result in the closure of the eye Pico Technology PicoScope 9000 PC Sampling Oscilloscope 12 GHz Ol xj Clear Display Hz 74 Persistence External Direct 46 3 Goals Fun StopiSingle Autoscale Defaut Setup Undo I Copy ae Print About Eye Diagram are oi E MESE 742 Time Base ve Parameters MRAZ Eye Paramet FT Area Bt Rate Bit Time Bit Period Bit Rate Crossing Time Cycle Area DutCycDist DutCycDist s st S400 Wiis Mode i Main C Intensified e Delayed e Eye Width e Eye Yuidth Fall Time Frequency Jitter P p Jitter RMS Period Rise Time Minima Dual Delayed Con t off DELTA DELAY chi Kb lin Ch2 Beales CA BY paidi Ext Dir i Pos Meg C AIB Ext HF y 7 ae ae a ae EN I es cock MOR y ar NRZ Eye Width definition The eye width is determined using the time difference between the 30 standard deviation points of the crossing point histograms Eye Width measurement NRZ_ ByelWidth T ors E SE possad E UM o O esi sal You can choose to view eye width as a ratio of the

PicoScope 9000 Series User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents